owen county ems

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 3 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 15-33

OWEN COUNTY EMS PREPARED FOR OWEN COUNTY COMMISSIONERS August 10, 2018

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 3 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 15-33

OWEN COUNTY EMS

PREPARED FOR

OWEN COUNTY

BOARD OF COMMISSIONERS RQAW Corporation 8770 North Street Ste. 110 Fishers, IN 46038

File: 18-700-060-1

August 10, 2017

________________________

ERIC WEFLEN, AIA

AR11500136

dmulcahy

Model

INDEX - 1 Index

VOLUME 3

INDEX

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

22 05 13 Common Motor Requirements For Plumbing Equipment

22 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping

22 05 18 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping

22 05 19 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping

22 05 23 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping

22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

22 07 16 Plumbing Insulation

22 07 19 Plumbing Insulation

22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping

22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties

22 11 23 Facility Natural-Gas Piping

22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping

22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties

22 34 00 Fuel-Fired Domestic-Water Heaters

22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 00 00 HVAC General Requirements

23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC

23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

23 07 13 HVAC Duct Insulation

23 31 13 Metal Ducts

23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories

23 33 46 Flexible Ducts

23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators

23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles

23 54 16.13 Gas-Fired Furnaces

23 55 23.13 Low-Intensity, Gas-Fired, Radiant Heaters

23 72 23 Air-To-Air Energy Recovery Equipment

23 82 39.16 Propeller Unit Heaters

23 82 39.19 Wall and Ceiling Unit Heaters

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 00 10 Electrical General Requirements

26 00 15 Submittals

26 00 20 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

26 05 19 Wire, Cables, and Connectors

INDEX - 2 Index

26 05 20 MC and AC Cable

26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

26 05 33 Raceways and Fittings

26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways

26 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems

26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems

26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices

26 24 15 Distribution Panelboards

26 24 16 Panelboards

26 27 16 Boxes and Enclosures

26 27 26 Wiring Devices

26 28 03 Circuit Breakers

26 28 13 Fuses

26 28 16 Safety Switches

26 28 26 Transfer Switches

26 32 13 Engine Generators

26 43 00 Surge Protective Devices

26 51 19 LED Interior Lighting

26 52 13 Emergency and Exit Lighting

26 56 19 LED Exterior Lighting

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 05 13 Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security

28 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electronic Safety and Security

28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

31 05 13 Soils for Earthwork

31 05 16 Aggregates for Earthwork

31 10 00 Site Clearing

31 20 00 Earthwork

31 22 13 Rough Grading

31 23 16 Excavation and Fill

31 23 17 Trenching

31 23 23 Backfill

31 25 13 Erosion Control Devices

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 11 23 Aggregate Base Course

32 12 16 Flexible Pavement

32 13 13 Rigid Pavement

32 17 23 Painted Pavement Markings

32 91 19 Landscape Grading

32 92 19 Seeding

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

INDEX - 3 Index

33 05 13 Manholes and Structures

33 11 16 Site Water Distribution

33 12 13 Water Service Connections

33 12 16 Water Utility Distribution Valves

33 12 19 Water Utility Distribution Fire Hydrants

33 13 00 Disinfection of Water Distribution

33 31 00 Sanitary Sewer System

33 41 00 Storm Drainage

33 46 00 Subdrainage

END OF VOLUME 3 INDEX

08/10/2018 [22 05 13] - 1 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

SECTION 22 05 13

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.


B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

E. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

G. Insulation: Class F.

H. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

I. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

2.5 ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED MOTORS (ECM)

A. Motor: Brushless permanent magnet DC motor.

B. Control: Integral control module to convert AC power to DC power and to generate three-phase signal to direct motor speed. Motor speed adjustment through 0-10 V DC input.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 22 05 13

08/10/2018 [22 05 17] - 1 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

SECTION 22 05 17

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves. 2. Stack-sleeve fittings. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Sleeve-seal fittings. 5. Grout.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop collar.

B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

D. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.


E. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. 2. Zurn Industries, LLC.

B. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange for use in waterproof floors and roofs. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company. 4. Metraflex Company (The). 5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description:

1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20 psig minimum. 3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubberinterlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel, Composite plastic or Stainless steel. 5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating,

ASTM B 633 or Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS



1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company. 4. Metraflex Company (The). 5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall.

C. Plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.5 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink, for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.

2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.


D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint

sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

F. For galvanized sleeves, prepare and paint damaged galvanized coatings and end of sleeves with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

5. Use silicone sealant to seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.


3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Use grout to seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves, Steel pipe sleeves or Sleeve-seal fittings.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves, Steel pipe sleeves or Sleeve-seal fittings.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system, Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Sleeve-seal fittings.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inchannular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system, Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Sleeve-seal fittings .

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch > annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:


a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system, Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Sleeve-seal fittings >.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system, Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Sleeve-seal fittings.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves, PVC pipe sleeves, Stack-sleeve fittings, Sleeve-seal fittings, Molded-PE or -PP sleeves or Molded-PVC sleeves .

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Steel pipe sleeves, PVC pipe sleeves or Stack-sleeve fittings.

5. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves or PVC pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves.


08/10/2018 [22 05 18] - 1 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

SECTION 22 05 18

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped steel with polished, chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish; concealed or exposed-rivet hinge; and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. Split Floor Plates: Steel with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

08/10/2018 [22 05 18] - 2 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

B. Install escutcheons with inside diameter closely fitting around outside diameter of piping and piping insulation and with outside diameter completely covering opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep pattern.

b. Uninsulated Piping: One-piece steel. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece stamped steel or split-plate stamped steel.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with inside diameter closely fitting around piping and piping insulation and with outside diameter completely covering opening.

1. New Piping: Split floor plate.


A. Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates.


08/10/2018 [22 05 19] - 1 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

SECTION 22 05 19

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers. 2. Filled-system thermometers. 3. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 4. Light-activated thermometers. 5. Thermowells. 6. Dial-type pressure gages. 7. Gage attachments. 8. Test plugs. 9. Test-plug kits. 10. Sight flow indicators.




A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS


1. Ashcroft Inc. 2. Ernst Flow Industries. 3. Marsh Bellofram. 4. Miljoco Corporation. 5. Nanmac Corporation. 6. Noshok. 7. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. 8. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. 9. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 10. Trerice, H. O. Co. 11. WATTS. 12. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 13. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp. 14. WIKA Instrument Corporation. 15. Winters Instruments - U.S.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch nominal diameter.

D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F.

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.

H. Window: Plain glass or plastic >.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.


2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Trerice, H. O. Co.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.

3. Case: Cast aluminum; 6-inch nominal size. 4. Case Form: Back angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings graduated in deg F. 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a

maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee

fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.4 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:



a. Ametek U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Ernst Flow Industries. d. Flo Fab Inc. e. Marsh Bellofram. f. Miljoco Corporation. g. Noshok. h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. k. Trerice, H. O. Co. l. WATTS. m. Weiss Instruments, Inc. n. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp. o. WIKA Instrument Corporation. p. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100.

3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe

threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated

in psi. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass or plastic. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston or porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.6 TEST PLUGS



1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Miljoco Corporation. 3. Nexus Valve, Inc. 4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Trerice, H. O. Co. 7. WATTS. 8. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 9. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating500 psig at 200 deg F.

F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.

2.7 TEST-PLUG KITS


1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Miljoco Corporation. 3. Nexus Valve, Inc. 4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Trerice, H. O. Co. 7. WATTS. 8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

C. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F.

D. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F.

E. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig.

F. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

G. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

H. Install test plugs in piping tees.

I. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlets and outlets of each thermostatic mixing valve. 3. Other locations where indicated.

J. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building. 2. Suction and discharge of each booster pump system. 3. Other locations where indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:


1. Metal case, compact, industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.

B. Thermometers at outlets of each thermostatic mixing valve be the following:

1. Liquid-filled and Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.

C. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled and Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case.

B. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each booster pump system shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled and Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.


08/10/2018 [22 05 23] - 1 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

SECTION 22 05 23

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 3. Bronze swing check valves. 4. Iron, center-guided check valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads and flange faces. 3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 4. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature.

If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves. 3. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for

every 5 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.


2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

2.3 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

2.5 IRON, CENTER-GUIDED CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:


1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-125. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. d. Style: Compact wafer. e. Seat: Bronze.

B. Class 125, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-125. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. d. Style: Globe, spring loaded. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seat: Bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.


E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Center-Guided Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves. 2. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron, center-guided, metal-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

3.5 LOW-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE (150 PSIG OR LESS)

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

3.6 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.


B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze disc.

3. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 125, compact-wafer or globe, metal seat.


08/10/2018 [22 05 29] - 1 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTSFOR PLUMBING AND PIPING

SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Pipe stands. 6. Pipe positioning systems. 7. Equipment supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Pipe stands. 3. Equipment supports.



A. Welding certificates.

1.6 Closeout Submittals

A. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Warranty


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. SMACNA.

D. Pipe Hanger Standards: Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) SP-58, SP-89, and SP-69, as referenced.

E. Seismic applications listed within SMACNA that are not usable within a given structure, shall be resolved through engineered adaptations or alteration. Whenever possible these adaptations or alternations shall use SMACNA approved components, so as to maintain compliance and uniformity with SMACNA’s engineering standards and design principles. In all cases, and prior to installation, these adaptations or alternations shall be engineered in accordance with standard engineering practices by a qualified, registered structural engineer, and shall be submitted to project structural engineer and mechanical engineer for their review and approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. Where a specific manufacturer is listed in the Drawings, this shall be considered the Basis-of-Design.

1. Elcen Metal Products Co. 2. B-Line Systems Inc. 3. Carpenter and Paterson Inc. 4. Anvil.

B. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.


2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion

to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

C. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 7. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 8. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.


2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.5 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Base: Stainless steel. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel,

continuous-thread rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or

stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Bases: One or more; plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.

2.6 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.


2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Pipe Stand Installation:


1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for curbs.

F. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement.

J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

N. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.


3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel attachments for hostile environment applications.

G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.


J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

4. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

5. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

6. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

10. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

11. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 12. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction. 13. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36,

with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

14. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

15. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

16. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

17. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

19. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.


K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various

types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping

installations.

M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.


14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze

member.

P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.


R. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

S. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.


08/10/2018 [22 05 53] - 1 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING EQUIPMENT

SECTION 22 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Stencils. 5. Valve tags. 6. Warning tags.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass: 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.


5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-inch-thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not

less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than

24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with

substrate.

C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-inch-thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Red.

C. Background Color: White.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.


H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils for Piping:

1. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping. 2. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal. 3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel in colors complying with

recommendations in ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

4. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass: 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain, or beaded chain, or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and


variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.6 WARNING TAGS

A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or

"DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.


2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve or control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal

units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of

concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25

feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced

labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule: Comply with ASME A13.1 for pipe label background and lettering colors.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 1-1/2 inches, round. 2. Valve-Tag Colors: Natural. 3. Letter Colors: Black.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.


08/10/2018 [22 07 16] - 1 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

SECTION 22 07 16

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing equipment:

1. Domestic water boiler breechings. 2. Domestic water, booster and recirculation pumps. 3. Domestic water storage tanks.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail removable insulation at equipment connections and access panels. 4. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 5. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 6. Detail field application for each equipment type.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of


insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for equipment insulation application.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Domestic Water Boiler Breeching Insulation Schedule" and "Equipment Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. K-Flex USA.

G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc. e. Owens Corning.

H. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory-applied jacket.



a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (IIG-LLC). b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. ROXUL.

I. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.



J. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory-applied jacket.


a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (IIG-LLC). b. Knauf Insulation. c. Rock Wool. d. ROXUL. e. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.

K. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning.

2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-


SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

L. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.



2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.


a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.



2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F.



a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. e. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by calcium silicate manufacturer and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. K-Flex USA.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by flexible elastomeric and polyolefin manufacturer and with a VOC content of 80 g/L or less.


D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by mineral fiber manufacturer and with a VOC content of 80 g/L or less.


E. Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.




2. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. 3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. Adhesive: As recommended by Adhesive - PVC Jacket manufacturer and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.


2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. Mastics: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

2. Mastics shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Vimasco Corporation.


2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.



2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.



E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.


c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. f. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Vimasco Corporation.

3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 5. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:



2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less. 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.


3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 6. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less. 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perm when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1) Dow Chemical Company (The).


5. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perm when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.



6. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.



2.8 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. in. for covering equipment.



B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for equipment.


a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Vimasco Corporation.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..



a. Alpha Associates, Inc.

2.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. c. Polyguard Products, Inc. d. Proto Corporation. e. Speedline Corporation.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: Color-code jackets based on system. 4. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

C. Metal Jacket:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. b. RPR Products, Inc.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded

polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded

polyethylene and kraft paper.

3. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket

schedules.


c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

2.11 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Venture Tape.

2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.



2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.


C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. Compac Corporation. b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. c. Venture Tape.

2. Width: 2 inches.

3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.



2. Width: 2 inches.

3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

E. PVDC Tape: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The).

2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Film Thickness: 4 mils. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width.


2.12 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:



2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.


1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 4) Nelson Stud Welding.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.


1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) CL WARD & Family Inc. 3) Gemco. 4) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 5) Nelson Stud Welding.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.



1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.


1) Gemco. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

5. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.


1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.


c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 4) Nelson Stud Welding.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.


1) Gemco. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.


a. C & F Wire.

2.13 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.


C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.


H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation

on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

O. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps.


3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION

A. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe, and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers

on sides of tanks and vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service

temperature and with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from

insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of

tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches. 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.


9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates.

10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels.

1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.040 inch thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and

penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint

strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed

insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.


C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. 33-1/2-inch- circumference limit allows for 2-inch- overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

2. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:


1. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.9 DOMESTIC WATER BOILER BREECHING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Round, exposed breeching and connector insulation shall be the following:

1. High-Temperature Mineral-Fiber Board: 3 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Round, concealed breeching and connector insulation shall be one of the following:

1. High-Temperature Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 3 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

2. High-Temperature Mineral-Fiber Board: 3 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

3.10 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.

C. Domestic water pump insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

D. Domestic water (booster) pump insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

E. Domestic hot-water recirculation pump insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

F. Domestic water hydropneumatic tank insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 3. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch thick.


08/10/2018 [22 07 19] - 1 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

SECTION 22 07 19

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping. 3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping. 4. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 220716 "Plumbing Equipment Insulation."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).

1. Product Data: For adhesives, mastics, and sealants, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, mastics, and sealants, indicating

compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials.

3. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation.

5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.

6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.


B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.



A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.


1.8 SCHEDULING


B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.



G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation.


d. Manson Insulation Inc. e. Owens Corning.

H. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning.

2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

I. Phenolic:


a. Kingspan Tarec Industrial Insulation NV. b. Resolco International BV.

2. Preformed pipe insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1.

3. Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type II, Grade 1.

4. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 5. Factory-Applied Jacket: ASJ. Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied

Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.



B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.




2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by cellular glass manufacturer and with a VOC content of 80 g/L or less.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. K-Flex USA.

3. Adhesive: As recommended by flexible elastomeric and polyolefin manufacturer and with a VOC content of 80 g/L or less.

4. Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.



2. Adhesive: As recommended by mineral fiber manufacturer and with a VOC content of 80 g/L or less.


C. Phenolic Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.



a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by phenolic manufacturer and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.


D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



2. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less. 3. Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of

the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. d. Speedline Corporation.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by Adhesive - PVC Jacket manufacturer and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.



2.4 MASTICS


1. Mastics: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

2. Mastics shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Vimasco Corporation.



C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.




3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.



a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.



E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. f. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.


A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Vimasco Corporation.


3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.


2.6 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants for Phenolic Products:


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.


3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 5. Color: White or gray. 6. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less. 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:




3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less. 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation


of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:




3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 6. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less. 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.



B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.



a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Vimasco Corporation.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..


a. Alpha Associates, Inc.



B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. c. Proto Corporation. d. Speedline Corporation.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: Color-code jackets based on system. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field

fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

C. Metal Jacket:




2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. b. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded

polyethylene and kraft paper. c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded

polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-

radius elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers

are not available.

2.11 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.



2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.




2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. Compac Corporation. b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. c. Venture Tape.

2. Width: 2 inches.

3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.



2. Width: 2 inches.

3. Thickness: 3.7 mils.


4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.12 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:



2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal .

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy, 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel or 0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel.


a. C & F Wire.

2.13 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:


a. Buckaroos, Inc. b. Engineered Brass Company. c. Insul-Tect Products Co. d. McGuire Manufacturing. e. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. f. Truebro. g. Zurn Industries, LLC.


2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION


B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.


G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation

on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.


4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as recommended by the manufacturer:

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Testing agency labels and stamps. 2. Nameplates and data plates. 3. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.


2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover


in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.


A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus


circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF PHENOLIC INSULATION

A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.


2. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals.

B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus


circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation.

D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.



1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.



1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint

strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed

insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.10 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."







A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.



1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight


pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.12 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.13 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. c. Phenolic: 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. c. Phenolic: 1 inch thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. c. Phenolic: 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:



C. Stormwater and Overflow:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:


D. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies:



E. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities:


a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 thick. c. Polyolefin: 1/2 inch thick.

3.14 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

3.15 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

3.16 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET

A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over insulation material.


08/10/2018 [22 11 16] - 1 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

SECTION 22 11 16

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.

2. Encasement for piping.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not interrupt water service without Architect's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61.


2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and ASTM B 88, Type M water tube, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.


C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:

a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b. Dresser, Inc.; Piping Specialties Products. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). d. JCM Industries. e. Romac Industries, Inc. f. Smith-Blair, Inc.; a Sensus company. g. Viking Johnson.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:



a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. b. Harvel Plastics, Inc. c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

3. Description:

a. One end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-socket or threaded end.

E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:



a. Colonial Engineering, Inc. b. NIBCO Inc. c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

3. Description:

a. Brass or stainless-steel threaded end. b. Solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end. c. Rubber O-ring. d. Union nut.


2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:



a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International. e. Matco-Norca. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

3. Standard: ASSE 1079. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:



a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Matco-Norca. d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

3. Standard: ASSE 1079. 4. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 5. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 6. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

3. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 4. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 5. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 6. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 7. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:



a. Elster Perfection Corporation. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP. c. Matco-Norca. d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Victaulic Company.

3. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 4. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 5. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F. 6. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 7. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."


C. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

G. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install piping free of sags and bends.

O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

Q. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."


S. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.

D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

F. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.3 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.


3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

F. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.


B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than that required by plumbing code. 4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.



1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:


a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide

adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified

for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and

operation.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:


1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 8 and larger, shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:


1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed or soldered joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:


G. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 5 to NPS 8, shall be the following:


3.12 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.


08/10/2018 [22 11 19] - 1 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

SECTION 22 11 19

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. In-line, wet-rotor circulation pump. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Domestic water softener. 4. Balancing valves. 5. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. 6. Outlet boxes. 7. Hose stations. 8. Hose bibbs. 9. Wall hydrants. 10. Drain valves. 11. Water-hammer arresters. 12. Trap-seal primer valves. 13. Flexible connectors. 14. Water meters.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include materials for; construction, rated capabilities, certified performance curves with operating point plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



B. Source Quality Control reports for water softeners.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 IN-LINE, WET ROTOR CIRCULATION PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless, wet rotor, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.

B. Pump Construction:

1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, wet rotor type with motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal.

2. Casing: Bronze or stainless steel, with threaded or companion-flange connections.

3. Impeller: Corrosion resistant. 4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. As indicated on the drawings.

D. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.


1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping. 2. Range: 65 to 200 deg. F. 3. Enclosure: NEMA 250. 4. Operation of Pump: On or off. 5. Transformer: Provide if required. 6. Settings: Start pump at 105 deg. and stop pump at 115 deg.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers Manufacturers: Watts, Lawler and Ames

1. Standard: ASSE 1013. 2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 3. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 4. Size: See Drawings 5. Design Flow Rate: See Drawings 6. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies

with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger. 8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-throughflow. 9. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.

c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

d. Provide manufacturers recommended strainer before backflow preventer. e. Install Pressure gauge on inlet and outlet of backflow preventer.

B. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:

1. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-procedure instructions.

2.5 BALANCING VALVES

A. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 2 or smaller.


4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Port: Standard or full port. 6. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 7. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 8. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 9. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.

2.6 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:

1. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 4. Temperature Control: Adjustable. 5. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded. 6. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.

B. Primary Water Tempering Valves:

1. Standard: ASSE 1017, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve, listed as tempering valve.

2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Body: Bronze. 4. Temperature Control: Manual. 5. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded. 6. Valve Finish: Rough bronze.

2.7 OUTLET BOXES

A. Washer Machine Boxes (WMB-1):

1. Mounting: Recessed. 2. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate. 3. Faucet: Combination valved fitting or separate hot- and cold-water valved fittings

complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlets.

4. Supply Shutoff Fittings: NPS 1/2 ball valves with water hammer arrestors and NPS 1/2 copper, water tubing.

5. Drain: NPS 2 standpipe and P-trap for direct waste connection to drainage piping.

6. Inlet Hoses: Two 60-inch- long, rubber household clothes washer inlet hoses with female, garden-hose-thread couplings. Include rubber washers.

7. Drain Hose: One 48-inch- long, rubber household clothes washer drain hose with hooked end.

B. Icemaker Outlet Boxes (IM-1):

1. Mounting: Recessed.


2. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate. 3. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 or

smaller copper tube outlet. 4. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water tubing. 5. Coordinate final connection requirements with ice machine.

C. Coffee Maker Boxes (CM-1)

1. Mounting: Recessed. 2. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate. 3. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 or

smaller copper tube outlet. 4. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water tubing. 5. Coordinate final connection requirements with ice machine.

2.8 HOSE STATIONS

A. Wash Stations (WS-1):

1. Faucet: Provide widespread, commercial, wall mounted, sealed brass faucet with a chrome plated finish and 4” wrist blade handles. Faucet shall be rigid spout with wall brace and integral vacuum breaker, 3/4” hose thread outlet according to ASME B1.20.7. Faucet shall meet AS<E A112.18.1 standard.

2.9 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum

breaker complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle. 13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key. 14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.


2.10 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 3. Operation: Loose key. 4. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include

wall clamp. 5. Inlet: NPS 3/4. 6. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread

complying with ASME B1.20.7. 7. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover. 8. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 9. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.

2.11 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

2.12 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:

1. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 2. Type: Copper tube with piston. 3. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through

F.

2.13 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:

1. Standard: ASSE 1018. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. 3. Body: Bronze. 4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.


5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint. 6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is

not chrome finished. 7. Provide with distribution device capable of serving up to four floor drains where

required per the contract documents.

2.14 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper

tube. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.

B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

2.15 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 220513 "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in accessible location. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection

with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.


3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

C. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

D. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall or surface mounted on wall. Install 2-by-4-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

E. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

F. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

G. Pump Installation:

1. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation.

2. Comply with HI 1.4. 3. Install in-line, water rotor circulation pumps with shaft horizontal unless

otherwise indicated. 4. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping where indicated. 5. Install aqua-stat controler where indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.

C. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

D. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

E. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install shutoff valve on suction side of each pump, check and shutoff valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping".

F. Connect thermostats and timers to pumps that they control.


3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Set thermostats and timers for automatic starting and stopping operation of

pumps. 5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.

7. Start motor. 8. Open discharge valve slowly. 9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats. 10. Adjust timer settings.

3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. In-line, wet rotor circulation pumps. 2. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 3. Domestic water softener. 4. Calibrated balancing valves. 5. Primary water tempering valves. 6. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Adjust aquastat temperature set point to allow only 5.0 degree drop in line temperature.

C. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

D. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.


08/10/2018 [22 11 24] - 1 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

SECTION 22 11 23

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Manual gas shutoff valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Dielectric fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties. 2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components. 3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data

of selected models. 4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 5. Dielectric fittings.



A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding certificates.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators and service meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.


B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig or 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig or less.

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and

socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground

joint, and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150,

including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-

rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless

steel underground.

5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

6. Mechanical Couplings:


a. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. b. Buna-nitrile seals. c. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. d. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE

pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. e. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory

equipped with anode.

B. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1. 1. Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel. 2. Coating: PE with flame retardant.

a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

3. Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with corrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of metal-to-metal seal without gaskets. Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1.

4. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations. 5. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied protective coating.

Threaded connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing outlets.

6. Operating-Pressure Rating: 5 psig.

C. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe.

2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet.

b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering. Vent casing aboveground.

c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting. d. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier

pipe.

4. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.


a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet.

b. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. d. Factory-connected anode. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier

pipe.

5. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe. a. PE body with molded-in, stainless-steel support ring. b. Buna-nitrile seals. c. Acetal collets. d. Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener.

6. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 2 and Larger: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. Fiber-reinforced plastic body. b. PE body tube. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Acetal collets. e. Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

7. Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain-end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. b. Buna-nitrile seals. c. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. d. Factory-installed anode for steel-body couplings installed underground.

2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.


2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

C. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

D. Basket Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: [60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

E. T-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance.

2. End Connections: Grooved ends. 3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket

with 57 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 750 psig.

F. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.


2.5 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig . 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground

Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inchesto NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground

Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: BrassCraft, Conbraco, Burnaby 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

D. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Lee Brass, McDonald, Burnaby 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig.


7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

E. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: McDonald, Mueller, Xomox, Burnaby 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL


F. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Homestead, McDonald, Mueller, Burnaby 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL


G. PE Ball Valves: Comply with ASME B16.40. 1. Manufacturers: Kerotest, Lyall, Perfection 2. Body: PE. 3. Ball: PE. 4. Stem: Acetal. 5. Seats and Seals: Nitrile. 6. Ends: Plain or fusible to match piping. 7. CWP Rating: 80 psig. 8. Operating Temperature: Minus 20 to plus 140 deg F. 9. Operator: Nut or flat head for key operation. 10. Include plastic valve extension. 11. Include tamperproof locking feature for valves where indicated on Drawings.

H. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast-iron, two-section box. 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering.


3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter.

4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or

flat head, and with stem of length required to operate valve.

2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for

regulators NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Sensus, American Meter, Fisher, Invensys 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at

the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at

maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not

exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if

not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig.

C. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Sensus, American Meter, Fisher, Invensys 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at

the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at

maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not

exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if

not connected to vent piping.


12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 10 psig .

D. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Manufacturers: Sensus, Eaton, Harper, Maxitrol 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint

finish. 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if

approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig.

2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Watts, McDonald, Wilkins 2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Watts, McDonald, Wilkins 2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Calpico, Advanced Products &

Systems 2. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.



A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit.

C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774.

D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective

coating manufacturer.


3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

E. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective

coating manufacturer.

F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.


1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

P. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.

3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation.

4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers.

5. Prohibited Locations:

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.

Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

T. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

U. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.


V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install manual gas shutoff valve outlet box at exterior wall.

C. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

D. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.

3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless

dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded

or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.


3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.

F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.

H. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.


A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 20548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 3/4 and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.


C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.10 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel gloss. d. Color: Gray.

C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex gloss. d. Color: Gray.

2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd gloss. d. Color: Gray.


D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.

3.11 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

6. Use 3000-psig, 28-day, compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.13 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be the following:

1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location.

2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.


C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.14 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends to match adjacent piping.

2. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:


C. Underground, below building, piping shall be the following:


D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.15 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG AND LESS THAN 5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends to match adjacent piping.

2. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.

C. Underground, below building, piping shall be the following:


D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.


E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.16 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's gas mains and listed by an NRTL.

B. Underground:

1. PE valves. 2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze plug valves. 3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron, lubricated plug valves.

3.17 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.

B. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger at service meter shall be the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.

C. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.

D. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, lubricated plug valve.

E. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following: 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.

END OF SECTION 221123

08/10/2018 [22 13 16] - 1 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

SECTION 22 13 16

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.






A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.


2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.


E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

L. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent slope downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent slope down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

M. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

N. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.

3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.


E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

4. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

5. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.


C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping shall be the following:

1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

B. Aboveground, vent piping shall be the following:

1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following:

1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.


08/10/2018 [22 13 19] - 1 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

SECTION 22 13 19

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Trench drains. 4. Air-admittance valves. 5. Through-penetration firestop assemblies. 6. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 7. Oil interceptors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:

1. Oil interceptors.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee with couplings as required to match

connected piping. 4. Closure: Countersunk, drilled-and-threaded, brass plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with

screw.

B. Plastic Floor Cleanouts:

1. Size: Same as connected branch. 2. Body: PVC. 3. Closure Plug: PVC. 4. Riser: Drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as drainage

piping. 5. Provide with adjustable body and round nickel bronze top inside finished spaces

and ductile iron top for unfinished spaces and grade cleanouts.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. FD-1: Floor Drain. (General Duty):


Duco cast iron bottom outlet body, with double drainage flashing flange and reversible clamping collar, with 5” round adjustable nickel bronze strainer assembly. Strainer diameter to be a minimum twice the outlet size of the outlet connection. Provide Jay R. Smith Model #2005Y (-ANB) floor drain with #7219S deep seal cast iron p-trap or approved equal. This drain is to be provided with a trap guard for sewer gas control. FD-2: Floor Drain. (General Duty): Duco cast iron bottom outlet body, with double drainage flashing flange and reversible clamping collar, with 5” round adjustable nickel bronze strainer assembly. Strainer diameter to be a minimum twice the outlet size of the outlet connection. Provide Jay R. Smith Model #2005Y (-ANB) floor drain with Funnel top #7219S deep seal cast iron p-trap or approved equal.

2.3 TRENCH DRAINS

A. Trench Drains:

D. Refer to contract documents for trench drain requirements. Provide with deep seal type P-trap and required components to connect into sanitary system. TD-1: Apparatus Bay Area - Pre-formed, pre-sloped, High Density Polyeth-ylene (HDPE) channels. With stainless steel perforated grate and stainless steel frame. Channels shall have a nominal outside width of 8” Trench drain shall be connected to a catch basin containing a sediment bucket and connected to a trap.

a. Mea-Josam Pro-Plus 200 channel with a heavy duty frame as-sembly

b. Grating: 8” wide, Ductile Iron, Class “C” Slotted Grate. c. Catch Basin: Josam Pro-Plus Silt-Box # 200CXX-SB with 6”

side outlet. d. Trench Drain System e. is approximately 76’-0” in total length.

1.

2.4 AIR-ADMITTANCE VALVES

1. Standard: ASSE 1051, Type A for single fixture or Type B for branch piping. 2. Housing: Plastic. 3. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm. 4. Size: Same as connected fixture or branch vent piping.


2.5 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:

1. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 2. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack. 3. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral

nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 4. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with

neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.

5. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal.

B. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

C. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

D. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals:

1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead-coated copper, or galvanized steel.

2. Design: To provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with counterflashing.

E. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M. 2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland. 3. End Connections: Matching connected piping. 4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.


2.7 OIL INTERCEPTORS

A. Oil Interceptors:

1. Plastic Oil Interceptors (Refer to the contract drawings for requirements):

2. Type: Factory-fabricated interceptor for separating and removing light oil from wastewater.

3. Body Material: Plastic. 4. Interior Lining: Not required. 5. Exterior Coating: Not required. 6. Inlet and Outlet Size: 3” 7. End Connections: PVC, solvent. 8. Cleanout: Integral. 9. Mounting: Recessed, flush with grade at concrete. 10. Flow-Control Fitting: Required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100

feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, flush with finished wall.

D. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

3. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain.

E. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.


F. Install fixture air-admittance valves on fixture drain piping.

G. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

H. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

I. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

J. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance.

K. Install oil interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.

L. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to unit; flow-control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction piping to oil storage tank.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.


08/10/2018 [22 34 00] - 1 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

SECTION 22 34 00

FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Commercial, gas-fired, high-efficiency, storage, domestic-water heaters. 2. Domestic-water heater accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance:


1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned-tube, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Commercial, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Three years. 2) Controls and Other Components: One year.

b. Expansion Tanks: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMERCIAL, GAS-Fired, STORAGE, domestic-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Gas-Fired, High-Efficiency, Fully Condensing, Storage Type, Power-Direct Vent, Domestic-Water Heater:

1. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3. 2. Description: Manufacturer's proprietary design to provide at least 95 percent combustion

efficiency at optimum operating conditions.


3. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig> minimum working-pressure rating.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and

stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.

4. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank. c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005. d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank

except connections and controls. e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish. f. Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency

requirements for gas-fired, high-efficiency, domestic-water heaters and natural-gas fuel.

g. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. h. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices

or systems. i. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M.

Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

5. Draft Hood: Draft diverter, complying with ANSI Z21.12.

B. Capacity and Characteristics:

1. Refer to the drawings for additional information. 2. Temperature Setting: 140 deg F. 3. Gas Pressure Regulator: Set by Manufacturer

a. Capacity: 100,000 btu/hr b. Inlet Pressure: 2 psig water column. c. Gas Pressure Required at Burner: 4” to 7” water column. d. Provide with vent limiting device on regulator to allow to not provide vent piping

for the regulator.


2.2 Domestic-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Expansion Tanks: (ET-1)

1. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.

2. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

3. Capacity and Characteristics:

a. Refer to the drawings for additional requirements. b. Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

B. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1-M, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping.

C. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3, appliance type. Include 2-psig pressure rating as required to match gas supply.

D. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.

E. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M.

F. Venting: 1. Direct Vent, 3” PVC, route to roof and terminate with concentric vent kit. 2. Blower Motor: 120 v/single phase power, less than 5.0 amps. Coordinate power with Electrical Contractor.

G. Drain: Provide and install condensate neutralization kit

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.


B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and re-inspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Commercial, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial domestic-water heaters on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. 3. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 4. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 6. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 7. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

C. Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters according to NFPA 54.

1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without shutoff valves.

2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.

3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters if required for operation of safety control.

4. Comply with requirements for gas shutoff valves, gas pressure regulators, and automatic gas valves specified in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."


D. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

F. Install thermometer on outlet piping of domestic-water heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

G. Fill domestic-water heaters with water.

H. Charge domestic-water expansion tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Comply with requirements for gas piping specified in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."

C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.


4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and re-inspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, gas-fired, storage domestic-water heaters.


08/10/2018 [22 40 00] - 1 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

SECTION 22 40 00

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to: 1. Inclusion of all plumbing fixtures, complete and ready for use. All fixtures,

except as otherwise specified, shall be constructed of vitreous china with all visible exposed surfaces glazed.

2. Providing all stops, traps, escutcheons, connections, etc., as are necessary to complete the installation of each fixture, whether such items are listed or not.

3. Plumbing Trim: All finished exposed faucets, traps, connecting piping, stops, flush valves and other fixture trim shall be chromium-plated brass unless otherwise specified and shall be supported rigidly to fixtures and to walls with matching brackets at not more than 2'-0" center. All fastenings shall be chromium-plated brass or may be 302 stainless steel if of matching color and finish. Faucets shall be furnished as required. Vacuum breakers shall be provided as a part of the fixture trim wherever there is a possibility of back-siphoning.

4. Fixture Stops: Shut-offs for urinal and water closet flush valves shall be an integral part of the fixture or fitting; shut-offs for all other fixtures shall be loose-key, lock-shield-type. All fixture stops shall be angle- or straight-type adapted for each particular location and shall be located immediately adjacent to the fixture. Use threaded adaptors when used in conjunction with copper tube work.

5. All exposed screws or fasteners for plumbing fixtures and faucets shall be vandal proof. Contractor shall take care to coordinate this item with his suppliers prior to Shop Drawings submittal.

6. Aerators, where required for sinks and lavatories shall be vandal proof type.


A. Material Standards 1. ANSI/ASME A112.19.2-90: Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. 2. ANSI/ASME A112.19.5-79: Trim for Water Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals. 3. ANSI/ASSE 1016-90: Performance Requirements for Thermostatic, Pressure

Balancing and Combination Control Valves for Bathing Facilities.

B. ANSI/ASSE 1025-78: Performance Requirements for Diverters for Plumbing Faucets with Hose Spray, Anti-Siphon-Type, Residential Applications.


1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fixtures.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories and sinks.

C. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. For flushometer valves to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 2. For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

a. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.

3. For sinks to include in maintenance manuals. 4. For shower faucets to include in maintenance manuals. 5. For pressure water coolers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no less than one of each type.

2. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

3. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

4. Filter Cartridges: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each type and size indicated, but no less than 1 of each.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL

A. Acceptable Manufacturers


1. Plumbing Faucets: Chicago Faucet, American Standard, Kohler, Symmons, Speakman, and Moen.

2. Flush Valves: Sloan and Zurn. 3. Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures: American Standard and Kohler. 4. Mop Sink Basins: Fiat, Stern and Williams, Mustee, Zurn and Creative

Industries. 5. Closet Seats: Church, Sperzel, Bemis, Beneke, and Centoco. 6. Shower Mixing Valves: Powers, Leonard, Lawler, and Bradley. 7. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay and Just 8. Electric Water Coolers: Elkay, Haws, Oasis, and Halsey-Taylor. 9. Laundry Tubs: Fiat, Stern/Williams, Mustee. 10. Carriers: Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade, Watts and Zurn

B. Plumbing Fixtures – General: Constructed or equipped with anti-siphon devices to prevent siphoning waste material into potable water supply system.

C. Escutcheons and Plates: Conceal all holes where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings; use plates or escutcheons.

D. Piping Exposed in Finished Areas (including fittings and trim): Chromium-plated or nickel-plated brass with polished bright surface.

E. Trim for Lavatories and Sinks: Provide with renewable cartridges.

F. Vitreous Caps: Provide for water closet bolts.

G. Sealant: Silicone-type. See Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”.

2.2 FLOOR MOUNTED WATER CLOSETS

A. Manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements: 1. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5. b. Material: Vitreous china. c. Type: Siphon jet. d. Style: Flushometer valve. e. Height: ADA (WC-1). f. Rim Contour: Elongated. g. Water Consumption: 1.6 GPF. h. Spud Location: top. i. Outlet Location: bottom. j. Color: White.

2. Bowl-to-Drain Connecting Fitting: ASME A112.4.3.

B. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves: 1. Manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements,

a. Standard: ASSE 1037. b. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig.


c. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device. d. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components. e. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated. f. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel. g. Style: Exposed. h. Consumption: 1.6 GPF.

C. Toilet Seat 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

a. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5. b. Material: Plastic. c. Type: Commercial (Heavy duty). d. Shape: Elongated rim, open front. e. Hinge: Self-sustaining, check. f. Hinge Material: Non-corroding metal. g. Seat Cover: Not required. h. Color: White.

2.3 VITREOUS-CHINA, COUNTERTOP-MOUNTED LAVATORIES

A. Oval, self-rimming, vitreous china, counter mounted. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. b. Type: Self-rimming for above-counter mounting. c. Faucet-Hole Punching: Three holes. d. Faucet-Hole Location: Top. e. Color: White. f. Mounting Material: Sealant. g. Faucet: Manual.

B. Faucets 1. General: NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System

Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water

2. Lavatory Faucets: Manually Operated a. Manual-type, single-control mixing solid-brass lead free valve. b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

1) Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. 2) General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet

inlets with supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

3) Body Type: Centerset. 4) Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. 5) Finish: Polished chrome plate. 6) Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 GPM. 7) Mounting Type: Deck, concealed. 8) Valve Handle(s): Single lever. 9) Spout: Rigid type. 10) Spout Outlet: Aerator.


C. Supply Fittings 1. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System

Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. 3. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching

water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

4. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.

5. Operation: Loose key 6. Risers: ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel flexible hose.

D. Waste Fittings 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. 2. Drain: Grid type with straight tailpiece. 3. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 17

gauge seamless brass tube to wall, cleanout plug and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.

2.4 MOP SINKS

A. Mop Sinks: Molded Stone, floor mounted. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 99. b. Shape: Rectangular. c. Nominal Size: 24 by 36 inches. d. Height: 12 inches. e. Rim Guard: On all top surfaces. f. Drain: Grid. g. Service faucet h. Hose and Bracket i. Mop hanger j. Vinyl Bumperguard k. Stainless Steel Wall Guards – (Two Walls)

B. Faucets 1. General: NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System

Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water

2. Service Sink Faucets: Manual type. 3. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. 4. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with

supplies and coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor. 5. Body Type: Widespread. 6. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. 7. Finish: Chrome plated. 8. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 GPM. 9. Handle(s): Lever.


10. Mounting Type: Wall, exposed. 11. Spout Type: Rigid, solid brass with wall brace. 12. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet. 13. Spout Outlet: Hose thread according to ASME B1.20.7.

2.5 LAUNDRY TUB

A. Laundry Tub: Free-standing, plastic. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

a. Nominal Size: 20 by 23.875 inches b. Height: 33.69 inches c. Material: Heavy duty polyethylene d. Color: White. e. Provide fixture with manufacturer’s recommended drain and P-trap. f. Provide fixture with manufacturer’s faucet

B. Faucets 1. Faucet shall be deck mounted on the laundry tub. 2. Faucets: Manual type. 3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with

supplies and fixture hole punching; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.

4. Body Type: Centerset 5. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. 6. Finish: Chrome plated. 7. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 GPM. 8. Handle(s): 4-inch blade. 9. Spout Type: 6.75-inch swing spout. 10. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet. 11. Spout Outlet: Aerator and hose adaptor. Hose thread shall comply to ASME

B1.20.7.


Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water




5. Operation: Loose key 6. Risers: ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel flexible hose.


2.6 STAINLESS STEEL SINKS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: 1. Standards: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 and NSF/ANSI 2. 2. Type: Top mount, basin with radius corners, 4 holes drilled for faucet, and fully

undercoated to dampen sound and prevent condensation. 3. Number of Compartments: One for S-2, two for S-1. 4. Metal Thickness: 18 gauge 5. Drain: Nickel plated brass body with grid strainer, polished finish. 6. Garbage Disposal: Continuous feed, galvanized steel grinding elements with two

stainless steel 360 degree swivel lugs, dishwasher connection. This will be provided in the left compartment of fixture S-1.

B. Sink Faucets: Manually Operated 1. Manual-type, single-control mixing solid-brass lead free valve. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. b. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets

with supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

c. Body Type: Widespread with side spray. d. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. e. Finish: Polished chrome plate. f. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 GPM. g. Mounting Type: Deck, concealed. h. Valve Handle(s): Single lever. i. Spout: Swing, round tubular type. j. Spout Outlet: Aerator.


Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.




5. Operation: Loose key 6. Risers: ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel flexible hose. 7. Provide hot water connection for dishwasher with S-1.

D. Waste Fittings 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. 2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 17

gauge seamless brass tube to wall, cleanout plug and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.


2.7 SHOWERS

A. Individual Showers 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

a. SH-1, shower enclosure to be provided as indicated. showers will be provided with shower head, mixing valve and drain, refer to contract documents for additional requirements. Note: Showers shall be ADA compliant, the maximum height of the shower threshold shall be 1/2”. Contractor shall coordinate the size of the shower base with the General Contractor to recess the concrete slab under the shower a minimum of 2”.

2. Shower Enclosure (SH-1) a. Model Information: Aqua Bath Company model # IS4836BF-OT 2”. b. Inside Dimensions: 43 inches wide by 36 inches deep by 78 inches height. c. Outside Dimensions: 48 inches wide by 37 inches deep by 84 inches

height. d. Threshold: 2 inches e. Provide with molded corner soap dish, curtain rod and weighted shower

curtain with hooks. Do not provide with grab bars, fold-up seat, or manufacturer recommended shower head.

f. Provide unit with integral drain and 2 inch outlet for sanitary connection.

3. Shower Mixing Valves a. General: NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water

System Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

b. Description: Single-handle, pressure-balance mixing valve with hot- and cold-water indicators; check stops; and shower head in a surface mounted shower system with recessed soap dish.

c. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and ASSE 1016. d. Body Material: Solid brass. e. Finish: Polished chrome plate. f. Mounting: Exposed. g. Operation: Single-handle, twist or rotate control. h. Antiscald Device: Integral with mixing valve. i. Check Stops: Check-valve type, integral with or attached to body; on hot-

and cold-water supply connections.

4. Shower Head a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. b. Type: Ball joint with adjustable spray pattern. c. Shower Head Material: Metallic with chrome-plated finish. d. Shower-Arm, Flow-Control Fitting: 2.0 GPM.

2.8 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirement:


1. Comply with NSF 61. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of

Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant unless otherwise indicated.

3. Cabinet: Bi-level with two attached cabinets, vinyl-covered steel with stainless-steel top.

4. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on each cabinet deck. 5. Control: Push bar. 6. Filter: One or more water filters complying for cyst and lead reduction to below

EPA standards; with capacity sized for unit peak flow rate. 7. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air-

cooled condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant, corrosion-resistant-metal storage tank, and adjustable thermostat. a. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

8. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Cooled Water: 8 GPH. b. Ambient-Air Temperature: 90 deg F. c. Inlet-Water Temperature: 80 deg F. d. Cooled-Water Temperature: 50 deg F. e. Electrical Characteristics: 120 VAC, Single phase, 60 HZ

9. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type I water-cooler carrier.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Water-Closet 1. Installation:

a. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. b. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting

attachments to piping or building substrate. 2. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

a. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet.

b. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.


c. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted on open side of water closet.

d. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

3. Install toilet seats on water closets.

B. Urinal 1. Installation:

a. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. b. Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached

to supports. 2. Support Installation:

a. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals. b. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals. c. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for urinals.

3. Flushometer-Valve Installation: a. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each

urinal. b. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind

fixtures.

C. Lavatories 1. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed,

finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

4. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

D. Sinks 1. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout. 3. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.

a. Exception: Use ball valves if supply stops are not specified with sink. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

b. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 4. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed,

finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

E. Showers 1. Assemble shower components according to manufacturers' written instructions. 2. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each shower faucet.


a. Exception: Use ball valves if supply stops are not specified with shower. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

b. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 3. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower

arms. 4. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed,

finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheons requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

5. Verify that shower threshold does-not exceed 1/2” in height.

F. Electric Water Coolers 1. Install electric water cooler level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

3. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

4. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.

5. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants.” Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. 3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 22 05 18

"Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

H. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color. 3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."


3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixture with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to fixtures, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust fixture and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixture

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean fixture and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


08/10/2018 [23 00 00] - 1 - HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 23 00 00

HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to all Division 23 HVAC Work.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general requirements applicable to all HVAC work.

B. Provide complete and fully operational HVAC systems controlled as indicated.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: As indicated in other Division 23 Sections. 2. Shop Drawings: As indicated in other Division 23 Sections.

B. Informational Submittals:


1. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, and details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

a. Building roofs, walls, and floors. b. Building structural components to which equipment, piping, ductwork, cables, and

conduit will be attached. c. Suspended ceiling components. d. HVAC equipment, piping, ductwork, and controls. e. Size and location of access doors and panels installed in walls and inaccessible

ceilings for products installed behind walls and requiring access. f. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

1) Luminaires. 2) Air outlets and inlets. 3) Ceiling-mounted devices including speakers, sensors, and WI-FI antennae. 4) Sprinklers. 5) Service access panels.

C. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC systems and equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Provide data in pdf format on CD, DVD, or USB media.

2. Warranty Documentation: 3. Record Documentation: 4. Maintenance Items: Provide items specified in other Division 23 Sections packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


A. Where feasible, arrange for product delivery when construction has progressed enough to allow the products to be installed in their final locations. If lieu of the above, store products protected from weather and physical damage.

B. Handle products to prevent damage. Do not install damaged items; replace them with new items. If approved by the Engineer, items with minor damage may be repaired and installed.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installation.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the listed manufacturers. Where a specific manufacturer is listed in the Drawings, this shall be considered the Basis-of-Design.

2.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment with higher electrical power requirements may be furnished provided that such proposed equipment is approved in writing and that connecting electrical supply, wiring, overcurrent protection devices, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

2.3 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine work area and rough-in work before beginning installation.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Plan Work beforehand.

B. Request explanation from the Engineer if the intent of the Drawings and/or Specifications is not clear.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install mechanical items in accordance with the Specifications and manufacturer’s installation instructions.


3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project site.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 03.

3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 for structural steel.

B. Metal channel (strut) products in accordance with Metal Framing Manufacturers Association standards may be used for metal framing and anchorages.

C. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.6 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting or weakening wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.7 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will contact grout.


C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth and level bearing surfaces for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom if specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Maintain manufacturer’s recommended service clearances. Maintain NFPA 70 required clearances to electrical components.

D. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

E. Install equipment to allow space for piping installed at required slope.

3.9 CLEANING AND RESTORATION

A. Repair damage resulting from the execution of the Work.

B. Leave the work area in broom clean condition or better at the end of each day.

C. Thoroughly clean the work area at the completion of construction.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect mechanical equipment components, assemblies, and installations, including connections.

B. Non-Conforming Work: Items will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Reports: Prepare test and inspection reports for informational submittals.


3.11 PAINTING

A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09.

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.12 STARTUP

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to startup mechanical equipment according to manufacturer’s instructions.

3.13 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chillers. Video record the training sessions and provide electronic copy to Owner.


08/10/2018 [23 05 13] - 1 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

SECTION 23 05 13

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.


B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

E. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

G. Insulation: Class F.

H. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

I. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width-modulated inverters.

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors. 5. Grounding: Maintenance free, conductive micro-fiber shaft-grounding ring with a

minimum of two rows of circumferential micro fibers to discharge shaft voltages away from the bearings to ground. a. Motors 100 HP or Less: One shaft grounding ring installed either on the drive end

or non-drive end. b. Motors More Than 100 HP: Insulated bearing on the non-drive end and a shaft

grounding ring on the drive end of the motor. c. All Motors: Bonded from motor foot to system ground with high-frequency ground

strap of flat braided, tinned copper with terminations to accommodate motor foot and system ground connections.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.


2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

2.6 ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED MOTORS (ECM)

A. Motor: Brushless permanent magnet DC motor.

B. Control: Integral control module to convert AC power to DC power and to generate three-phase signal to direct motor speed. Motor speed adjustment through 0-10 V DC input.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


08/10/2018 [23 05 48] - 1 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC

SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes vibration and seismic isolation devices for HVAC.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development (for the State of California).

1.3 SUBMITTALS



a. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

b. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic-restraint component required.

1) Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

2) Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

c. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

2. Shop Drawings:

a. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.


3. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation and seismic-restraint device.

a. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and vibration isolation bases complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

b. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight, operation, and seismic and wind forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic and wind (where applicable) restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

1) Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

c. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system was examined for excessive stress and that none exists.

d. Seismic and Wind-Restraint Details:

1) Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

2) Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

3) Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

4) Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


1. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation and seismic bracing for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.

2. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. 3. Welding certificates. 4. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing lab as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Wind-Restraint Loading: Refer to Drawings.

B. Seismic-Restraint Loading: Refer to Drawings.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. Where a specific manufacturer is listed in the Drawings, this shall be considered the Basis-of-Design.

a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. b. Mason Industries, Inc. c. Novia; A Division of C&P.

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 5. Surface Pattern: Smooth, ribbed, or waffle pattern. 6. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers. 7. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads. 8. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:




2. Mounting Plates:

a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded with threaded studs or bolts.

b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to support structure.

3. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material.

2.4 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:



2. Description: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints containing two separate and opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel. b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material.

2.5 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators:




2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 6. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator

pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 7. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to

fasten and level equipment.

2.6 HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing:


a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. b. Mason Industries, Inc.



deformation or failure. 6. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an

elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top housing with attachment and leveling bolt.

2.7 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:



2. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed.


a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top plate with threaded mounting holes. c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

3. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load. 5. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 6. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 7. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

2.8 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part Telescoping Housing:


a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. b. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.



deformation or failure.

2.9 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:




2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact.

2.10 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression.



2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure. 7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod. 9. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

2.11 SNUBBERS


1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Mason Industries, Inc.


3. Novia; A Division of C&P.

B. Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type.

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch-thick resilient cushion.

2.12 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS


1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.13 RESTRAINT CABLES


1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Novia; A Division of C&P.

B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

2.14 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES


1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.


3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Novia; A Division of C&P.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.

D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

2.15 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS


1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.16 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS


1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.


2.17 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES


1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Novia; A Division of C&P.

B. Steel Rails: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Rails shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

C. Steel Bases: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.


D. Concrete Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated or field-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete.

1. Design Requirements: Low mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.


4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic and wind-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Division 3 Sections.

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Sections for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

D. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

E. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.


F. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

G. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

H. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

I. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

J. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in other Division 23 Sections for piping flexible connections.




1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


2. Schedule test with Owner, through Engineer, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' notice.

3. Obtain Engineer’s approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

3.7 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Division 3 Sections.


08/10/2018 [23 05 53] - 1 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Duct labels. 5. Warning tags.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each type of product. 2. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each

identification material and device. 3. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the

proposed content for each label. 4. Valve numbering scheme.

B. Closeout Submittals:

1. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass: 0.032-inch, stainless steel: 0.025-inch, aluminum: 0.032-inch, or anodized aluminum: 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.


4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-inch-thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS


B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.







I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

2.4 DUCT LABELS


B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Black.






I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include duct size and an arrow indicating flow direction.


1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety-yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.


B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve or control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Refrigerant Piping:

a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White.

3.5 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot-air and variable temperature supply ducts. 3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.


08/10/2018 [23 05 93] - 1 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Balancing air systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Certified TAB reports.


1. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

2. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

3. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician.

B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.


2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard AABC or NEBB TAB forms.

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide at least seven days' notice before each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.6 HVAC CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide TAB agency one complete set of contract documents, change orders, and approved submittals in digital pdf format.

B. Control contractor shall provide required BAS hardware, software, personnel, and assistance to TAB agency as required for TAB agency to balance the systems. Control contractor shall also provide trending reports as needed to demonstrate that systems are complete.

C. Coordinate meetings and assistance from suppliers and contractors as required by TAB agency.

D. Provide additional valves, dampers, sheaves and belts as required by TAB agency.

E. Flag all manual volume dampers with high-visibility tape.

F. Provide access to all dampers, valves, test ports, nameplates, and other appurtenances as required by TAB agency.

G. Remove and replace or repair insulation as needed to provide access for the TAB work.

H. Have the HVAC systems at complete operational readiness before TAB begins.

I. Promptly correct deficiencies identified during TAB.

J. Maintain a construction schedule that allows the TAB agency to complete work prior to occupancy.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.


B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC systems and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenums are sealed (and fire-stopped if required).

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that might cause reduced capacities.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment under actual installed conditions. Use tables and charts in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems" or in SMACNA "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, clean filters are installed, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for each equipment item.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. General:

a. Electrical power wiring is complete. b. Control systems are operational. c. Access is provided to balancing and control devices. d. Variable frequency drive start-up procedures are complete.


e. Safety devices are operational and indicating normal status.

2. Air Side:

a. Ductwork is complete with air terminals installed. b. Balance, fire, and smoke dampers are open and operational. c. Control dampers are in their normal (fail) positions. d. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. e. Clean filters are installed. f. Fans are operating and rotating in correct directions. g. Fan vibration levels are within tolerance limits. h. Building envelope is complete, and exterior windows and doors are closed.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

2. Install new insulation where insulation is removed for TAB to match removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish.

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control devices, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" duct layouts with all components identified.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

D. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

E. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

F. Check condensate drains for proper connections and function.

G. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.


3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AND VARIABLE-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow as follows:

a. Set outdoor air, return air, and relief air dampers for proper positions that simulate minimum outdoor air conditions.

b. Where conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

c. Where conditions are not suitable for duct Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable.

2. Where sufficient space is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the discharge flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fan at the fan inlet or through the inlet flexible connection.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fan through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan or through the inlet flexible connections.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling unit, rooftop unit, or other air-handling equipment. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

4. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed as needed to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflows of branch ducts. 2. Adjust branch duct balance dampers for specified airflows. 3. Re-measure each branch duct after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3. Measure airflows at all inlets and outlets. 4. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow.


5. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after all have been adjusted.

D. Verify final system conditions.

1. Re-measure and confirm minimum outdoor air, return air, and relief air flow rates are within design tolerances. Readjust as necessary.

2. Re-measure and confirm total airflow is within design tolerance. 3. Re-measure all final fan operating data. Include fan speeds, motor voltages, motor

amperages, and static profiles. 4. Mark all final settings. 5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation; adjust if necessary. Measure

and record all operating data. 6. Record final performance data.

3.6 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Other Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 5 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3.7 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into a separate section for each tested and balanced system. Provide a final report that is a complete record of the HVAC system performance, including conditions of operation, any outstanding items, and any deviations found during the testing and balancing process. The final report is to provide a reference of actual operating conditions for the owner and operations personnel. All measurements and test results that appear in the report must be made on site and dated by the responsible technician or test and balance engineer.

B. As a minimum the report shall include the following information:

1. Title page, including:

a. TAB company name, address, and telephone number. b. Project name, client, identification number, and location. c. Project architectural firm, address, and telephone number. d. Project HVAC engineering firm, address, and telephone number. e. Project HVAC contracting firm, address, and telephone number. f. TAB certification statement. g. Test and balance engineer name, signature, and certification number. h. Report date.

2. Table of contents. 3. TAB national performance guarantee. 4. Report summary, including:

a. List of items that do not meet specified tolerances. b. Information that may be considered in resolving deficiencies.

5. Instrument list, including:


a. Type. b. Manufacturer. c. Model. d. Serial number. e. Calibration date.

C. TAB test data for all systems included in the Work.

3.8 SCHEDULE

A. Provide hydronic and air balancing for each of the following equipment items as part of this work. Note that listing an item of equipment includes any motors, valves, dampers, and filters associated with that equipment:

1. Fans 2. Air outlets and inlets 3. Furnaces 4. Unit heaters 5. Refrigerant condensing units 6. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment 7. Wall or ceiling heaters 8. Gas-fired radiant heaters


08/10/2018 [23 07 13] - 1 - HVAC DUCT INSULATION

SECTION 23 07 13

HVAC DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes duct insulation and appurtenances.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.





B. Protection: Do not permit mineral fiber insulation to get wet. Mineral fiber insulation that is or has been wet shall be removed from the project site.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields.

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.


1.6 SCHEDULING


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

E. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.



2. Properties:

a. Maximum Operating Temperature: 180 deg F. b. Minimum Operating Temperature: -70 deg F. c. Maximum Thermal Conductivity at 75 deg F Mean Temperature: Thickness 1 Inch

or Less: 0.245 Btu-in/hr-ft2-deg F. d. Maximum Water Vapor Permeability Thickness 1 Inch or Less: 0.05 perm-inches. e. Maximum Water Absorption by Volume: 0.2%.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin in a flexible blanket. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.



a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Atmosphere Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; SOFTR Duct Wrap FRK.

2. Properties:

a. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. b. Maximum Compressed Thermal Conductivity at 75 deg F Mean Temperature:

1) Density 0.75 PCF: 0.29 Btu-in/hr-ft2-deg F. 2) Density 1.0 PCF: 0.27 Btu-in/hr-ft2-deg F. 3) Density 1.5 PCF: 0.24 Btu-in/hr-ft2-deg F.

G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin in a semi-rigid board. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ or with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; CertaPro Commercial Board. b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. c. Knauf Insulation; Earthwool Insulation Board. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

2. Properties:

a. Maximum Operating Temperature: 450 deg F. b. Minimum Operating Temperature: 0 deg F. c. Maximum Thermal Conductivity at 75 deg F Mean Temperature:

1) Density 3.0 PCF: 0.23 Btu-in/hr-ft2-deg F. 2) Density 6.0 PCF: 0.23 Btu-in/hr-ft2-deg F.

d. Minimum Compressive Strength at 10% Deformation:

1) Density 3.0 PCF: 25 lb/ft2. 2) Density 6.0 PCF: 200 lb/ft2.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.


B. For indoor applications, adhesives shall have VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

2.3 MASTICS


B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.



C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.


A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.


1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.


2.5 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White.


A. Insulation system specifications indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. All-Service Jacket (ASJ): White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. Maximum water vapor permeance 0.02 perms.

2. All-Service Jacket – Self-Sealing Lap (ASJ-SSL): ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. Maximum water vapor permeance 0.02 perms.

3. Foil-Scrim Kraft (FSK) Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. Maximum water vapor permeance 0.02 perms.



B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

1. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as indicated; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Adhesive as recommended by jacket material manufacturer.



a. Johns Manville; Ceel-Co or Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

3. Color: White unless indicated otherwise.

C. Metal Jacket:

1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn. b. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn].

2. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M. a. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn. b. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn.

D. Self-Adhesive Indoor or Outdoor Jacket: Multiple-ply laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation; consisting of aluminum, Tedlar, or laminate sheet with integral acrylic peel-and-stick adhesive with white, silver, or black facing as indicated.


a. 3M; VentureClad. b. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.



3.2 PREPARATION



A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

B. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

C. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system.

D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. Mineral fiber insulation that is or has been wet shall be removed from the job site.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.


4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.


2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches on center

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches on center

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.


C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.


A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket or Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to all surfaces of ducts, fittings, and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches on center

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches on center each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not over compress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with outward-clinching staples, 1 inch on center


Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches on center.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. For board insulation, groove and score insulation to fit to outside and inside radii of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches on center.



1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.


1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at

end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches on center and at end joints.


3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in painting specifications.






3.9 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Duct Construction Schedule on drawings.


08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 1 - METAL DUCTS

SECTION 23 31 13

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sheet metal ducts and fittings. 2. Sheet metal materials. 3. Duct liner. 4. Rectangular duct connection systems. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports. 7. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Related Requirements

1. ANSI/SMACNA 006-2006 (SMACNA 006) HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible Third Edition. All ductwork shall be in conformance with this standard.

2. Structural Performance: Duct hangers, supports, and seismic restraints (where applicable) shall withstand the effects of gravity, wind, and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA 006, ASCE/SEI 7, and local requirements.

3. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing the proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

a. Prefabricated ductwork and fittings. b. Liners and adhesives. c. Rectangular duct connection systems. d. Sealants and gaskets.

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 2 - METAL DUCTS

e. Seismic-restraint devices.

2. Shop Drawings:

a. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

b. Fittings, including details of construction. c. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure

classes. d. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts along with applicable elevations of structural

elements. e. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. f. Reinforcement and spacing. g. Duct material and gauge thickness by pressure class. h. Seam and joint construction. i. Penetration details through fire-rated, smoke barriers and other rated partitions. j. Equipment installation based on equipment being utilized on this project. k. Duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and duct access doors. l. Length of application of acoustic duct liner where it will be applied. m. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building

attachment, seismic restraints, and vibration isolation. n. Other systems installed in the same space as ducts where order of installation

affects access. o. Ceiling and wall mounted access doors and panels required to provide access to

dampers, controls and other operating devices. p. Ceiling mounted items, including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, smoke

detectors, sprinklers, other electrical devices, equipment and building structural members.

q. On each drawing, include a tabular list of each fan system’s ductwork represented on that drawing and the total square foot surface area of each fan’s duct system illustrated on the drawing.

r. Shop drawings shall be submitted prior to the fabrication or installation of the ductwork and serve as the foundation for coordination between various trades to maintain required ceiling heights.

3. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the following:

a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.

B. Leakage Testing Documentation: Contractor shall submit a written report to the authority having jurisdiction in which ducts designed at static pressures more than 3” wg pressure class have been leak tested and that the air leakage class is less than 6.0 per the Energy Code. Provide duplicate submittal to the Owner and the Engineer.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 3 - METAL DUCTS

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for steel hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum hangers and

supports. 3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. NFPA Compliance: Applicable requirements in:

1. NFPA 90A. 2. NFPA 90B. 3. NFPA 96.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.


A. Damage: Handle, transport, and store ducts to avoid damage. Damaged ductwork is not acceptable.

B. Protection: Protect ducts from mechanical damage, weather, and exposure to chemicals (including road salt). Do not permit insulation materials to get wet under any circumstances. Remove insulation that is or has been wet from the project site, and replace the insulation with undamaged new materials.

C. Ductwork and associated components shall be stored on blocking in a clean dry area to prevent damage and to prevent the entrance of dirt, debris, foreign matter and moisture.

D. Ductwork shall be adequately supported during storage to prevent sagging or bending.

E. Provide temporary storage, delivery and handling in accordance with SMACNA Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines, Intermediate Level.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA 006 based on indicated static-pressure class. The figure numbers below reference that standard.

1. Transverse Joint: Figure 2-1. 2. Longitudinal Seam: Figure 2-2. 3. Pressure Class Gage and Reinforcement: Table 2-1 through Table 2-52 and Figure 2-3

through Figure 2-18. 4. Elbow: Figure 4-2 (Use the following types only unless specifically approved by the

Engineer.):

a. Type RE 1 (radius elbow). b. Type RE 2 (square throat elbow with turning vanes).

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 4 - METAL DUCTS

c. Type RE 3 (radius elbow with vanes). d. Type RE 5 (dual radius elbow). e. Type RE 6 (mitered elbow without turning vanes) only for angles not greater than

45 degrees.

5. Turning Vanes: Figures 4-3 and 4-4. Figure 4-9 short radius vanes in accordance with Chart 4-1 are acceptable.

6. Branch Connection:

a. Diverging Flow: Figure 4-5 (all types). Figure 4-6 (following types only):

1) 45-degree entry to rectangular branch. 2) 45-degree lead-in to round branch. 3) Conical connection. 4) Bellmouth connection. 5) Conical or bellmouth spin-in fitting only for pressure class 2” WG or less.

b. Converging Flow: Figure 4-5 (all types) and Figure 4-6 (all types). Conical or bellmouth spin-in fitting is acceptable only for pressure class 2” WG or less.

7. Offset, Transition, or Obstruction: Figure 4-7 (all types) and Figure 4-8 (Figure B and C). Do not use Figure 4-8 Figure A (pipe through duct), Figure D (mitered offsets around obstruction, or Figure E (split duct around obstruction) unless specifically approved by the Engineer.

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND OR FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA 006 Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class.


a. Eastern Sheet Metal. b. FlaktGroup SEMCO. c. Lindab Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

2. Transverse Joint: Figure 3-1 (all types). 3. Longitudinal Seam: Figure 3-2 (all types). Do not use type RL-5 (grooved seam pipe

lock or flat lock), RL-6 (snaplock), RL-7 (snaplock), or RL-8 (snaplock) seam for duct over 1” WG pressure class. Fabricate round duct larger than 90-inch diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seam.

4. Pressure Class Gage and Reinforcement: Table 3-2 through Table 3-15 and Figure 3-3. 5. Elbow: Figure 3-4. Use centerline radius of 1.5 diameters for each elbow unless space

constraints prevent a radius that large; in that event, the radius may be reduced to that indicated in Table 3-1 with mitered segments. If space constraints prevent a radius as large as indicated in Table 3-1, a mitered elbow with turning vanes similar to Figure 4-3

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 5 - METAL DUCTS

and Figure 4-4 may be used. Do not use an adjustable elbow for duct over 1” WG pressure class.

6. Branch Connection with Diverging or Converging Flow: Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6. All types are acceptable for pressure class 2” WG or less duct. For pressure class 3” WG or more duct, use 90-degree tee fitting with oval-to-round tap, 45-degree lateral fitting, conical fitting, or wye fitting. Reducers may be incorporated into the fitting. Use only factory-fabricated fittings, not saddles or field-fabricated taps, for pressure class 3” WG or more duct.

7. Offset, Transition, or Obstruction: Figure 4-7 and Figure 4-8 modified for round or flat oval duct. Do not use Figure 4-8 Figure A (pipe through duct), Figure D (mitered offsets around obstruction), or Figure E (split duct around obstruction) unless specifically approved by the Engineer.

8. Flat Oval: Figure 3-7 and applicable figures for equivalent round duct.

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA 006 for material thicknesses and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated.

D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: 1. Steel Duct: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black or galvanized. 2. Aluminum Duct: ASTM B209 alloy 6061-T6 members or steel members isolated from

the aluminum with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. 3. Other Duct Materials: Reinforcement materials compatible with the duct materials at

contact points.

F. Tie Rods: Materials compatible with duct materials. Galvanized steel or stainless steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A.

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 6 - METAL DUCTS


a. Aeroflex USA Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. Rubatex International, LLC.

2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.

3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Flame-spread index no greater than 25 and smoke-developed index no greater than 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

4. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A. For indoor applications, adhesive with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- or 0.135-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized steel, aluminum, or stainless steel (as appropriate); with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA 006 Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-

edge overlapping. 5. Do not install liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal liner joints at locations other

than corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.

6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams. 7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not

exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 7 - METAL DUCTS

a. Fan discharges. b. Lined duct following unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are 2500 fpm or

more. d. Other locations as indicated.

9. Terminate liner with buildouts (metal hat sections) at dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT CONNECTION SYSTEMS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Hart & Cooley, Inc. Ward Industries. 3. McGill Airflow LLC.

B. Connection System: Rectangular duct transverse joint connection, reinforcement, and sealing system with roll-formed metal flanges, metal corner pieces, sealants, gaskets, and cleats.

2.6 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a flame-spread index no greater than 25 and a smoke-developed index no greater than 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 3. Water resistant. 4. Mold and mildew resistant. 5. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 6. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 7. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 8. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum. 9. For indoor applications, sealant with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). For school projects, sealant complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 8 - METAL DUCTS

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). For school projects, sealant complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts or other materials compatible with duct materials.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods; galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation; or stainless steel all-thread rods and nuts.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA 006 Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Cables:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. 2. Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 9 - METAL DUCTS

3. End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Structural shapes and plates of materials compatible with duct materials and environmental conditions. Support material shall match duct construction material.

2.8 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Mason Industries. 6. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC. 7. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized-steel or ASTM A 492, stainless-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 10 - METAL DUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction losses for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings or Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA 006 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically plumb or horizontally level, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. Avoid diagonal runs to maximum extent possible.

D. Install ducts with a minimum clearance of 2 inch plus allowances for insulation thickness and access requirements.

E. Cable hangers may only be used on low pressure (2” wg construction and lower) round spiral ductwork which is not insulated and has a diameter 10” or less. Utilize the double lock method such that the lower loop is clinched tight to the ductwork and the cable is vertical. Utilize manufacturer’s top attachment device.

F. Provide duct offsets needed to avoid interferences with structure, finishes, piping, other ducts, conduit, etc. Coordinate the work with all trades to minimize such offsets. Install ducts with fewest joints possible.

G. Do not penetrate ducts with conduit or piping.

H. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

I. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at maximum intervals of 12”, with a minimum of 3 screws in each round metallic duct coupling.

J. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. Do not field-cut taps for branch connections in ducts with SMACNA pressure class magnitude more than 2 in wg.

K. Install round or flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths to minimize joints.

L. Do not install any duct in an electrical equipment room unless that duct serves that room.

M. Do not install any duct in an elevator equipment room unless that duct serves that room.

N. Do not install any duct over an electrical transformer, electrical switchgear, or an electrical panel unless approved in writing by the Engineer.

O. Maintain clearances required in the National Electric Code for electrically-powered items.

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 11 - METAL DUCTS

P. Where ducts pass through interior partitions or exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal type and thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on all sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

Q. Where ducts pass through fire-rated partitions, install fire dampers unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in other Division 23 Sections for fire dampers.

R. Where ducts pass through smoke partitions, install smoke dampers unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in other Division 23 Sections for smoke dampers.

S. Install ductwork takeoffs at smoke dampers such that there is a minimum of 24” between the damper and the start of the first takeoff.

T. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts that are to be exposed in finished spaces from damage including dents, surface scratches, and markings. Exposed ducts must be undamaged and present a clean, neat appearance in materials and workmanship.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system in finished spaces.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surfaces free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets and inlets.

E. Repair or replace ducts that do not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. In accordance with ASHRAE 90.1, seal all ducts to SMACNA 006 seal class A with all transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations sealed. Seal openings for rotating shafts (including dampers) with bushings or other devices. However, do not seal an opening if sealing the opening would void a manufacturer’s listing. Spiral lock seams in round or flat oval ducts do not require sealing unless leakage is detected.


A. Comply with SMACNA 006 Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 12 - METAL DUCTS

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA 006 Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. Other types of hangers may be used if so indicated or if approved by Engineer.

E. Vertical Ducts: Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the ducts with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Upper Attachments: Install upper attachments secured to structural members. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials. Do not attach duct supports to roof decks.

3.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" or ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet on center and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet on center.

2. Brace changes of direction longer than 12 feet (or less if local requirements indicate a shorter length).

B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry static and seismic loads.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent items.

D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to building structural members such as flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or concrete members.

G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, conduit, and piping.

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 13 - METAL DUCTS

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Install heavy-duty sleeve anchors with sleeves fully engaged in the structural elements to which anchors are to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for

applications exposed to weather.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to motorized equipment with flexible connectors complying with other Division 23 Sections. Comply with SMACNA 006 for branch, outlet, inlet, and terminal unit connections.



B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test.

2. Test ductwork sections that have a design static pressure class magnitude of 4-inch wg or more regardless of duct locations. Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area. Obtain Engineer’s approval of specific sections to be tested beforehand.

3. Test all ductwork located outdoors. 4. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing

and for compliance with test requirements. 5. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 6. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

7. Give at least seven days notice for testing. 8. Tests must demonstrate that tested ducts meet SMACNA leakage class 4 or less. If any

tested section of ductwork fails to meet this requirement, perform the following at no additional cost to the Owner:

a. Leak test 100 percent of the ductwork in every duct system with any failed section. b. Provide additional sealing of ductwork to eliminate excessive leakage in failed

sections. If necessary, replace duct sections. c. Retest 100 percent of the ductwork in every duct system with any failed section. d. Continue sealing and retesting until the entire system is proven to meet the leakage

requirement. Note that once a section is proven to meet the leakage requirement that section does not need to be tested again unless it is damaged later.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

08/10/2018 [23 31 13] - 14 - METAL DUCTS

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 DUCT CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Fabricate ducts with materials, pressure classes, and insulations indicated on Drawings.


08/10/2018 [23 33 00] - 1 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

SECTION 23 33 00

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Fire dampers. 3. Ceiling radiation dampers. 4. Flange connectors. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct-mounted access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Duct accessory hardware.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



a. For fire-dampers, smoke-dampers, combination fire- and smoke-dampers, and ceiling dampers include installation instructions.


1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Maintenance Material Submittals:

1. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

2. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to at least 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.


B. Comply with SMACNA 006 for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or Type 316 as indicated. Unless indicated otherwise, No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and No. 4 finish for exposed ducts.

C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS


1. Ruskin Company. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. Greenheck 4. McGill Airflow LLC. 5. Nailor Industries Inc. 6. Pottorff. 7. Safe Air – Dowco Products. 8. Vent Products Co., Inc.

B. Round Manual Volume Damper: Diameter 20 inches or less, air velocity 1500 fpm or less, and duct static pressure class 2-inch or less. Galvanized steel sleeve with reinforcing beads. Single galvanized steel blade on axle with molded synthetic bearing at each end of axle and locking quadrant on standoff bracket. Basis of design Ruskin MDRS25.

C. Round or Oval Manual Volume Damper: Diameter 48 inches or less, air velocity 4000 fpm or less, and duct static pressure class 10-inch or less. Galvanized steel construction for galvanized steel duct. Type 304 stainless steel construction for type 304 stainless steel or aluminum duct. Type 316 stainless steel construction for type 316 stainless steel duct. Rolled hat channel frame


arranged for slip-in mounting. Single blade (or dual blades with center mullion for oval duct over 36 inches wide). Neoprene blade edge seals. Class II leakage rating. Blade mounted on axle with stainless steel sleeve bearing at each end of axle and locking quadrant on standoff bracket. Basis of design Ruskin CDR25 or CDO25.

D. Rectangular Manual Volume Damper: Height 12 inches or less, air velocity 1500 fpm or less, and duct static pressure class 1-inch or less. Galvanized steel sleeve with blade stop. Single galvanized steel blade on axle with molded synthetic bearings and locking quadrant on standoff bracket. Basis of design Ruskin MD25.

E. Rectangular Manual Volume Dampers: Height 5 inches or more, air velocity 1500 fpm or less., and duct static pressure class 3-inch or less. Galvanized steel hat channel frame with mitered and welded corners and blade stop. Flanged for attaching to wall and flangeless for installing in duct. Multiple single-thickness formed galvanized steel blades with opposed blade linkage enclosed in frame. Blades mounted on axles with molded synthetic bearings. Control shaft extended beyond frame with locking quadrant on standoff bracket. Basis of design Ruskin MD35.

2.4 CURTAIN-TYPE FIRE DAMPERS


1. Ruskin Company DIBD series. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Pottorff. 6. Safe Air – Dowco Products. 7. Vent Products Co., Inc.

B. Type: Static or dynamic as indicated on Drawings; rated and labeled according to UL 555.

C. Fire Damper Dynamic Closure Rating: At least 2000-fpm velocity for all sizes and mounting arrangements at 4-inch wg static pressure.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 or 3 hours as indicated on Drawings.

E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

F. Frame and Blade Material: Galvanized steel (or stainless steel for aluminum or stainless steel duct).

G. Frame: Frame roll-formed in gages required by UL listing; with mitered and interlocking corners. Blade lock.

H. Blades: Roll-formed interlocking curtain blades operated by fusible link and stainless-steel closure spring. Link temperature rating 165 or 212 deg F as indicated on Drawings.


I. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, galvanized steel in length required for installation. Steel mounting angles. Ends of sleeve act as duct collars for Style A or B. Integral duct collars at ends of sleeve for Style C, CR, or CO.

2.5 MULTIPLE-BLADE-TYPE FIRE DAMPERS


1. Ruskin Company DFD60 series. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Pottorff. 6. Safe Air – Dowco Products. 7. Vent Products Co., Inc.

B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555.

C. Fire Damper Dynamic Closure Rating: At least 2000-fpm velocity for all sizes and mounting arrangements at 4-inch wg static pressure.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 or 3 hours as indicated.

E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

F. Frame and Blade Material: Galvanized steel.

G. Frame: Hat channel frame, minimum 16 gage, with mitered and interlocking corners.

H. Blades: Single-piece airfoil blades equivalent to 14-gage strength, mounted on plated steel axles with permanently-lubricated stainless steel sleeve bearings pressed into frame. Parallel-blade-operation linkage concealed in frame.

I. Fusible Link: Temperature rating 165 or 212 deg F as indicated on Drawings.

J. Closure Spring: Stainless steel.

K. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, galvanized steel in length required for installation. Steel mounting angles. Ends of sleeve act as duct collars for Style A or B. Integral duct collars at ends of sleeve for Style C, CR, or CO.

2.6 CEILING RADIATION DAMPERS

1. Ruskin Company CFD series. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. Greenheck 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Pottorff.


6. Safe Air – Dowco Products.

B. General Requirements:

1. Labeled according to UL 555C. 2. Comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-ceiling assemblies as

indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."

C. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, round or rectangular, style to suit ceiling construction.

D. Blades: Galvanized sheet steel with refractory insulation.

E. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F or 212 deg F rated, fusible links.

F. Fire Rating: 1, 2, or 3 hours as indicated.

2.7 FLANGE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.8 TURNING VANES

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA 006.

D. Vane Construction: Single wall for vanes up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.


2.9 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA 006. Double wall, rectangular door. Galvanized sheet steel with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Butt or piano hinges and cam locks, quantities as indicated in SMACNA 006. Doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. Galvanized sheet steel frame with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. Vision panel where indicated.

B. Pressure Relief Access Door: Door and frame of galvanized sheet steel. Double wall door with insulation fill and metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class. Open outward for positive-pressure duct and inward for negative-pressure duct. Factory set at 3.0-inch to 8.0-inch wg positive or negative. Door retaining device. Neoprene or foam rubber seal.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. Minimum weight 26 oz./sq. yd. Minimum tensile strength 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. Service temperature range minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

B. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA 006 for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116 for fibrous-glass ducts.

C. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

D. Compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 restricts the use of backdraft dampers, and requires control dampers for certain applications. Install backdraft or control damper (as indicated) at inlet of exhaust fan or in exhaust duct close to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.


E. Install volume dampers only in ducts constructed to magnitude 2” pressure class or less. Provide at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

F. Set each damper fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

G. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

H. Install fire damper according to UL listing.

I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. Downstream from manual volume damper, control damper, backdraft damper, and equipment.

2. Adjacent to and close enough to fire damper to reset or reinstall fusible link. Door for access to fire damper having fusible link shall be pressure relief access door and shall be outward operation for access door installed upstream from damper and inward operation for access door installed downstream from damper.

3. Elsewhere as indicated.

J. Install access door with swing against duct static pressure.

K. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Two-Hand Access: 12 by 12 inches. 2. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 12 inches. 3. Head and Shoulders Access: 24 by 18 inches. 4. Body Access: 30 by 18 inches. 5. Body plus Ladder Access: 30 by 30 inches. 6. Where duct width does not permit door size specified above, one dimension of door size

may be reduced to 2 inches less than duct width.

L. Label access door as specified in another Division 23 Section to indicate the purpose of the access door.

M. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. If vibrating equipment is internally isolated from casing, provide rigid duct connections.

N. Connect diffuser or register to duct directly or with maximum 60-inch length of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

O. Connect flexible duct to metal duct with liquid adhesive plus tape.

P. Install duct test hole where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:


1. Operate each damper to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed

and that door can open fully. 3. Operate fire damper to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-

response or smoke-sensing device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.


08/10/2018 [23 33 46] - 1 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS

SECTION 23 33 46

FLEXIBLE DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Insulated flexible ducts.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each type of product. 2. Shop Drawings: For flexible ducts. Include plans showing locations and mounting and

attachment details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA 006 "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

C. Comply with Air Diffusion Council "ADC Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1."

D. Comply with ASTM E 96/E 96M, "Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials."

2.2 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS


1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill Airflow LLC. 3. Thermaflex; a Flex-Tek Group.

08/10/2018 [23 33 46] - 2 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS

4. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, two-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. 4. Insulation R-Value: R6.

C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene aluminized vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. 4. Insulation R-Value: R6.

2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

A. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

B. Non-Clamp Connectors: Liquid adhesive plus tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible ducts according to applicable details in SMACNA006 for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116 for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install in indoor applications only. Flexible ductwork should not be exposed to UV lighting.

C. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions or correct misalignments.

D. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

E. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape or draw bands.

F. Installation:

1. Install ducts fully extended. 2. Do not bend ducts across sharp corners. 3. Centerline radius of bends of flexible ducting shall not be less than one duct diameter. 4. Avoid contact with metal fixtures, water lines, pipes, or conduits.

08/10/2018 [23 33 46] - 3 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS

5. Install flexible ducts in a direct line, without sags, twists, or turns except as noted elsewhere.

G. Supporting Flexible Ducts:

1. Suspend flexible ducts with bands 1-1/2 inches wide or wider and spaced a maximum of 48 inches apart. Maximum centerline sag between supports shall not exceed 1/2 inch per 12 inches.

2. Install extra supports at bends approximately one duct diameter from center line of the bend.

3. Ducts may rest on ceiling joists or truss supports. Spacing between supports shall not exceed the maximum spacing per manufacturer's written installation instructions.

4. Vertically installed ducts shall be stabilized by support straps at a maximum of 72 inches on center.


08/10/2018 [23 34 23] - 1 - HVAC POWE

SECTION 23 34 23

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Propeller fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevation.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. b. Certified fan sound-power ratings. c. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. d. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. f. Roof curbs.


1. Field quality-control reports.


1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

D. Maintenance Material Submittals:

1. Belts: One spare set for each belt-driven unit.

08/10/2018 [23 34 23] - 2 - HVAC POWE


A. AMCA Compliance:

1. Comply with AMCA performance requirements and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

2. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PROPELLER FANS


1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Hartzell Fan Corporation. 3. Loren Cook Company. 4. PennBarry. 5. Twin City Fan & Blower.

B. Housing: Galvanized-steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel finish coat applied after assembly.

C. Steel Fan Wheel: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub.

D. Direct Drive (Where Applicable): Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.

E. Belt Drive (Where Applicable):

1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Statically and dynamically balanced. 3. Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower,

with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 4. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit. 5. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5. 6. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 7. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

Bearing life by ABMA 9 L10 of 100,000 hours. 8. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.

08/10/2018 [23 34 23] - 3 - HVAC POWE

9. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.

10. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 11. OSHA Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.

Baked enamel coating.

F. Accessories:

1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame; interlocked blades with nylon bearings and blade seals.

2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable for maintenance.

3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. 4. Weather Shield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. 5. Weather Shield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen. 6. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside

fan housing, factory wired through metal conduit.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors as indicated on Drawings and specified in another Division 23 Section. Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.


A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301. Factory test fans according to AMCA 300. Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210. Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

D. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Coordinate roof curb installation with General Contractor.

08/10/2018 [23 34 23] - 4 - HVAC POWE

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors.

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.



B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension where applicable. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Provide and verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.



08/10/2018 [23 37 13] - 1 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

SECTION 23 37 13

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittal:

1. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

a. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

b. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

2. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

a. Ceiling suspension assembly members. b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. c. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. d. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. e. Duct access panels.

3. Color Samples for Initial Selection: For each product with factory-applied color finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Titus. 2. Price. 3. Krueger. 4. Hart & Cooley.


5. Nailor Industries Inc. 6. Tuttle & Bailey.

2.2 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

A. Square Ceiling Diffuser: 1. Material: Steel. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Size: Refer to schedule. 4. Face Style: Cones (three). 5. Mounting: Lay-In or Surface Mount, refer to schedule. 6. Accessories: Factory-insulated R-6 foil-backed insulation.

B. Square Ceiling Diffuser: 1. Material: Steel. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Size: Refer to schedule. 4. Face Style: Perforated Face. 5. Mounting: Lay-In or Surface Mount, refer to schedule. 6. Accessories: Factory-insulated R-6 foil-backed insulation


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.


C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

D. Provide sponge rubber gasket, mounting frame, and concealed fastener mounting on all surface mounted grilles and registers.

E. Paint inside portion on all ductwork and plenums visible behind air device non-specular flat black enamel.

F. Provide additional support for grilles, registers, and diffusers mounted in lay-in ceiling.

G. Provide non-specular flat black steel blank-offs behind all unused portions of linear air devices.

H. Coordinate exact location of Diffusers, Grilles and Registers with area smoke detectors, lights, and electrical devices. Air devices shall not be closer than 3 feet from area smoke detector.

I. Final location of diffusers, registers and grilles shall be from architectural reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.


08/10/2018 [23 54 16.13] - 1 - GAS-FIRED FURNACES

SECTION 23 54 16.13

GAS-FIRED FURNACES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Gas-fired, condensing furnaces and accessories complete with controls. 2. Air filters. 3. Refrigeration components.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



a. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

2. Shop Drawings:

a. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

b. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


1. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each furnace and associated items to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

2. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

a. Disposable Air Filters: Furnish one complete set. b. Disposable Air-Cleaner Media: Furnish one complete set.



A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in:

1. ASHRAE 62.1. 2. ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of furnaces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period:

1. Warranty Period, Commencing on Date of Substantial Completion:

a. Furnace Heat Exchanger: 10 years. b. Integrated Ignition and Blower Control Circuit Board: Five years. c. Draft-Inducer Motor: Five years. d. Refrigeration Compressors: 10 years. e. Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING


1. Carrier Corporation; a unit of United Technologies Corp. 2. Lennox 3. Rheem Manufacturing Company; Heating and Cooling Products. 4. Trane. 5. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.

B. Cabinet: Galvanized steel.

1. Cabinet interior around heat exchanger with factory-installed insulation. 2. Lift-out panels shall expose burners and all other items requiring access for maintenance. 3. Factory paint external cabinets in manufacturer's standard color. 4. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.


C. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted, direct drive.

1. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23. 2. Special Motor Features: Electronically commutated motor (ECM) controlled by

integrated furnace/blower control.

D. Type of Gas: Natural.

E. Heat Exchanger:

1. Aluminized steel or Stainless Steel

F. Burner:

1. Gas Valve: 100 percent safety modulating main gas valve, main shutoff valve, pressure regulator, safety pilot with electronic flame sensor, limit control, transformer, and combination ignition/fan timer control board.

2. Ignition: Electric pilot ignition, with hot-surface igniter or electric spark ignition.

G. Gas-Burner Safety Controls:

1. Electronic Flame Sensor: Prevents gas valve from opening until pilot flame is proven; stops gas flow on ignition failure.

2. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box; prevents burner operation. 3. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting; de-energizes burner on

excessive bonnet temperature; automatic reset.

H. Combustion-Air Inducer: Centrifugal fan with thermally protected motor and sleeve bearings pre-purges heat exchanger and vents combustion products; pressure switch prevents furnace operation if combustion-air inlet or flue outlet is blocked.

I. Furnace Controls: Solid-state board integrates ignition, heat, cooling, and fan speeds; adjustable fan-on and fan-off timing; terminals for connection to accessories; diagnostic light with viewport.

J. Accessories:

1. Combination Combustion-Air Intake and Vent: CPVC plastic fitting to combine combustion-air inlet and vent through exterior wall or roof (as indicated on Drawings).

2. CPVC Plastic Vent Materials:

a. CPVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 441/F 441M. b. CPVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 438, socket type. c. CPVC Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493.

2.3 THERMOSTATS

A. Controls shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, "Controls."

B. Solid-State Thermostat: Wall-mounted, programmable, microprocessor-based unit with automatic switching from heating to cooling, preferential rate control, seven-day


programmability with minimum of four temperature presets per day, vacation mode, and battery backup protection against power failure for program settings.

2.4 AIR FILTERS

A. Disposable Filters: 4-inch- or 5-inch-thick fiberglass media with ASHRAE 52.2 MERV rating of 8 or higher.

B. Filter Frame: Sheet metal frame with hinged access door and filter tracks.

C. Filter Sizes: Filters shall be in sizes readily available without requiring custom fabrication.

2.5 REFRIGERATION COMPONENTS

A. General Refrigeration Component Requirements:

1. Refrigeration compressor, coils, and specialties shall be designed to operate with CFC-free refrigerants.

2. Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Comply with AHRI 210/240. Match size with furnace. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet complying with ASHRAE 62.1.

1. Refrigerant Coil Enclosure: Steel, matching furnace, with access panel and flanges for integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet and galvanized sheet metal drain pan coated with black asphaltic base paint.

C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed-copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized with nitrogen, sealed, and with suction line insulated. Provide in standard lengths for installation without joints, except at equipment connections.

1. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type I, 1 inch thick.

D. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with requirements in Division 23.

E. Air-Cooled Compressor-Condenser Unit:

1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed scroll type.

a. Crankcase heater. b. Vibration isolation mounts for compressor. c. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start

capacitor, relay, and contactor. d. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.


3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with AHRI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

4. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat. 5. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. 6. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. 7. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F. 8. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine factory-installed insulation before furnace installation. Reject units that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for gas and refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54.

B. Suspended Units: Suspend from structure using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and plumb.

1. Install seismic restraints to limit movement of furnace by resisting code-required seismic acceleration.

C. Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure base if required by installation conditions.

1. Anchor furnace to substrate to resist code-required seismic acceleration.

D. Controls: Install thermostats and humidistats at code-required mounting height.

E. Wiring Method: Install control wiring in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal control wiring except in unfinished spaces.

F. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on reinforced concrete base; at least 4 inches larger on each side than unit footprint. Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.


3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Gas piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect gas piping with union or flange and appliance connector valve.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Vent and Outside-Air Connection, Condensing, Gas-Fired Furnaces: Connect plastic piping vent material to furnace connections and extend outdoors. Terminate vent outdoors with a cap and in an arrangement that will protect against entry of birds, insects, and dirt.

1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. 2. Remove dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. 3. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and

fittings according to the following:

a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

b. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, Appendix.

4. Slope pipe vent back to furnace or to outside terminal.

D. Connect ducts to furnace with flexible connector. Comply with requirements in Division 23.

E. Connect refrigerant tubing kits to refrigerant coil in furnace and to air-cooled compressor-condenser unit.

1. Flared Joints: Use ASME B16.26 fitting and flared ends, following procedures in CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

2. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

3. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

F. Comply with requirements in Division 23 for installation and joint construction of refrigerant piping.



1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and test for leaks. Repair

leaks, replace lost refrigerant, and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements. 4. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.



B. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:

1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casings. 2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight. 3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris. 4. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight. 5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections. 6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.

B. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's operational checklist.

C. Measure and record airflows.

D. Verify proper operation of capacity control device.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

B. Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance and efficiency. Adjust heat-distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum heating performance and system efficiency.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, clean furnaces internally according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install new filters in each furnace within 14 days after Substantial Completion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing units.

END OF SECTION 23 54 16.13

08/10/2018 [23 55 23.13] - 1 - LOW-INTENSITY, GAS-FIRED, RADIANT HEATERS

SECTION 23 55 23.13

LOW-INTENSITY, GAS-FIRED, RADIANT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes low-intensity, gas-fired, radiant heaters.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



a. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

2. Shop Drawings: a. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting/attachment details. b. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

c. Detail fabrication and assembly of low-intensity, gas-fired, radiant heaters, as well as procedures and diagrams.

d. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


1. Field quality-control reports. 2. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranties.


1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For gas-fired, radiant heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

2. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

a. Igniter: One hot-surface burner igniter for each style of low-intensity, gas-fired, radiant heater furnished.

1.3 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of radiant heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


1. Warranty Period: All warranty periods listed below are from date of Substantial Completion.

a. Burner Assembly: Three years. b. Combustion and Emitter Tubes: Two years. c. Heater Controls: One year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. UL listed and labeled, with UL label clearly visible on units indicating compliance with ANSI Z83.20/CSA 2.34.


2.2 FORCED-DRAFT HEATERS


1. Detroit Radiant Products Company. 2. Roberts-Gordon, Inc. 3. Space-Ray; a division of Gas-Fired Products Inc. 4. Schwank 5. Sterling 6. Reznor.

B. Description: Factory-assembled, indoor, overhead-mounted, electrically controlled, low-intensity, infrared radiant heating units using gas combustion. Heater to have all necessary factory-installed wiring and piping required prior to field installation and startup.

C. Fuel Type: Design burner for natural gas having characteristics same as those of gas available at Project site.

D. Burner Assembly: 1. Combustion-Air Inlet: Ducted horizontal to outdoors through sidewall with vent caps. 2. Burner Control Housing: Corrosion-resistant, aluminized steel.

a. Totally enclosed with steel access cover. b. Sight glass for visual inspection of burner. c. Finish: Enameled finish.

3. Burner: Stainless steel. 4. Ignition System: Silicon carbide hot-surface igniter with flame rod sensing capabilities

and self-diagnostic control module.


5. Combustion Blower Fan: Dynamically balanced, direct-driven, forward-curved fan with cast-aluminum-alloy impeller and aluminized-steel housing, with a minimum temperature rating of 450 deg F.

6. Motors: General requirements for motors are specified in Division 23.

a. Motor: Resilient-mounted, capacitor-start-capacitor-run type with sealed ball bearings; totally enclosed, nonventilated type with internal thermal protection.

b. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

E. Combustion Chamber: 4-inch-diameter, 16-gage, aluminized-steel tubing with high-emissivity, high-temperature, corrosion-resistant external finish. Chambers shall be equipped with sight glass for burner and pilot flame observation.

F. Emitter Tube: 4-inch-diameter, 16-gage, aluminized-steel tubing with high-emissivity, high-temperature, corrosion-resistant external finish. Emitter tubing shall be equipped with baffles to maximize heating efficiency.

1. Tubing Connections: Stainless-steel threaded couplings. 2. 90-degree-bend emitter steel tubing with high-emissivity, high-temperature, corrosion-

resistant external finish. 3. Exhaust Vent Termination: Horizontal though side wall with vent caps.

G. Reflector: Polished aluminum, with end caps. Shape to control radiation from tubing for uniform intensity at floor level with 100 percent cutoff above centerline of tubing. Reflectors or entire heater shall accommodate rotational adjustment from horizontal to a minimum 30-degree tilt from vertical.

H. Accessories:

1. Reflector Extension Shields: Same material as reflectors, arranged for fixed connection to lower reflector lip and rigid support to provide 100 percent cutoff of direct radiation from tubing at angles greater than 30 degrees from vertical.

2. Protective grilles mounted to reflectors to protect emitter tubing. 3. Stainless-steel flexible connector with manual valve for gas supply. 4. Hanger chain with "S" hooks. 5. 3/16-inch-diameter, aluminized-steel wire tubing hangers and reflector supports. 6. Rigid mounting kits. 7. Clearance warning plaque.

2.3 CONTROLS AND SAFETIES

A. Gas Control Valve: Two-stage, regulated redundant 24-V ac gas valve that contains pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body.

B. Failure Safeguards: 100 percent shutoff of gas flow in the event of flame or power failure.

C. Prepurge of air control system prior to burner ignition.


D. Safety lockout of burner after three consecutive ignition failures.

E. Blocked Vent Safety: Differential pressure switch in burner safety circuit to stop burner operation with high discharge or suction pressure.

F. Control Panel Interlock: Stops burner if panel is open.

G. Indicator Lights: "Airflow-on" and "burner-on" indicator lights.

H. Thermostat: Two-stage, wall-mounted type with 50 to 90 deg F operating range and fan on switch.

1. Control Transformer: Integrally mounted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine structures, substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for fuel-gas piping to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Installation: Install gas-fired, radiant heaters and associated gas features and systems according to NFPA 54.

B. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using chain hanger kits and building attachments.

1. Restrain the unit to resist seismic acceleration. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 23.

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Division 23.

C. Maintain manufacturers' recommended clearances for combustibles.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Gas Piping: Comply with Division 23. Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner removal and service. Connect gas piping to radiant heaters according to NFPA 54.


B. Where installing piping adjacent to gas-fired, radiant heaters, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Vent Connections: Comply with Division 23.

D. Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory mounted.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Gas-fired, radiant heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial-temperature set points.

B. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gas-fired, radiant heaters.


08/10/2018 [23 72 23] - 1 - AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT

SECTION 23 72 23

AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged energy recovery units.


A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Seismic Performance: Air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.



A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which equipment or suspension systems will be attached.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for air-to-air energy recovery equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set(s) of each type of filter specified. 2. Fan Belts: One set(s) of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.



B. ARI Compliance:

1. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ARI 1060, "Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment."

2. Capacity ratings for air coils shall comply with ARI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air- Cooling and Air-Heating Coils."

C. ASHRAE Compliance:


1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

2. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."

D. NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed according to recommendations of NRCA.

E. UL Compliance:

1. Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in UL 1812, "Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Nonducted Heat Recovery Ventilators."

2. Electric coils shall comply with requirements in UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment."

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of air-to-air energy recovery equipment and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of air-to-air energy recovery equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Packaged Energy Recovery Units: Two years. 2. Warranty Period for Fixed-Plate Total Heat Exchangers: 10 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Engineered Air. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 3. Loren Cook Company. 4. RenewAire LLC.


5. Trane.

B. Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Housing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion-protection coating and exterior finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 2-inch- thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior drain connection, and lifting lugs.

1. Inlets: Ducted exhaust and supply to building louvers, with damper for exhaust and supply.

a. Exhaust: Gravity backdraft damper. b. Supply: Gravity backdraft damper.

D. Heat Recovery Device: Fixed-plate heat exchanger.

E. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal fan with spring isolators and insulated flexible duct connections.

1. Motor and Drive: Direct driven. 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure

type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

4. Spring isolators on each fan having 1-inch static deflection.

F. Disposable Panel Filters:

1. Comply with NFPA 90A. 2. Filter Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors

on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from access plenum.

3. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type. 4. Thickness: 2 inches. 5. Minimum Arrestance: 80, according to ASHRAE 52.1. 6. MERV: 8, according to ASHRAE 52.2. 7. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive 8. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet

side, hinged, and with pull and retaining handles.

2.2 CONTROLS

A. Time Clock: Solid-state, programmable, microprocessor-based unit for wall mounting with up to eight on/off cycles per day and battery backup protection of program settings against power failure to energize unit.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-to-air energy recovery equipment installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixed-plate heat exchangers so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions.

1. Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for access to heat exchanger. Access doors and panels are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install floor-mounted units on 4-inch-high concrete base designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by code.

C. Suspended Units: Suspend and brace units from structural support frame using threaded steel rods and spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Pipe drains from drain pans to nearest floor drain; use ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 PVC pipe and solvent-welded fittings, same size as condensate drain connection.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

B. Connect piping to units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

C. Comply with requirements for ductwork specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

D. Install electrical devices furnished with units but not factory mounted.



A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.


1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Adjust seals and purge. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment. 4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points. 5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

D. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air energy recovery units.


08/10/2018 [23 82 39.16] - 1 - PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS

SECTION 23 82 39.16

PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes propeller unit heaters with electric-resistance heating coils.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

C. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




2. Shop Drawings:

a. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. b. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,


c. Include location and size of each field connection. d. Include equipment schedules to indicate rated capacities, operating characteristics,

furnished specialties, and accessories. e. Indicate location and arrangement of piping valves and specialties. f. Indicate location and arrangement of integral controls. g. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 Closeout Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For propeller unit heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Electric Unit Heaters:

a. Berko; Marley Engineered Products. b. Engineered Air. c. INDEECO. d. Marley Engineered Products. e. QMark; Marley Engineered Products. f. Modine. g. Trane.

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical or horizontal discharge configuration as indicated with adjustable discharge louvers.


C. Comply with UL 2021.


A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2.4 HOUSINGS

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heaters before shipping.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical units.

2.5 COILS

A. General Coil Requirements: Test and rate propeller unit-heater coils according to ASHRAE 33.


B. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in steel or corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends shall be enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 550 deg F at any point during normal operation.

1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection of heaters.

2. Wiring Terminations: Stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant material.

2.6 FAN AND MOTOR

A. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi. Static and dynamic balance.

B. Provide fan guard.

C. Motor: Permanently lubricated, constant Speed. Comply with requirements in other Division 23 Sections.

2.7 CONTROLS

A. Control Devices:

1. Unit- or wall-mounted thermostat as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit-heater installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.

C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and spring hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in other Division 23 Sections.


D. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.

D. Ground equipment according to Division 26.

E. Connect wiring according to Division 26.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections.

3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.


08/10/2018 [23 82 39.19] - 1 - WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS

SECTION 23 82 39.19

WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wall and ceiling heaters with propeller fans and electric-resistance heating coils.

1.2 SUBMITTALS




2. Shop Drawings:

a. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. b. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,


c. Include equipment schedules to indicate rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

d. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wall and ceiling unit heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Berko; Marley Engineered Products. 2. INDEECO. 3. Markel Products; TPI Corporation.


4. QMark; Marley Engineered Products. 5. Trane.

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Assembly including chassis, electric heating coil, fan, motor, and controls. Comply with UL 2021.


2.3 CABINET

A. Front Panel: Stamped-steel louver, with removable panels fastened with tamperproof fasteners.

B. Finish: Baked enamel over baked-on primer with manufacturer's standard color selected by Architect, applied to factory-assembled and -tested wall and ceiling heaters before shipping.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Surface-Mounted Cabinet Enclosure: Steel with finish to match cabinet.

2.4 COIL

A. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in corrosion-resistant metallic sheath. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware, and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Provide integral circuit breaker for overcurrent protection.

2.5 FAN AND MOTOR

A. Fan: Aluminum propeller directly connected to motor.

B. Motor: Permanently lubricated. Comply with requirements in other Division 23 Sections.

2.6 CONTROLS

A. Controls: Built in tamper-resistant thermostat.

B. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection with disconnect switch.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive wall and ceiling unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit-heater installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall and ceiling unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Install wall and ceiling unit heaters level and plumb.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26.

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26.


08/10/2018 [26 00 10] - 1 -ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 26 00 10

ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes: 1. Descriptions 2. Quality Assurance 3. Record and Information Manuals 4. Examination of Site 5. Warranty 6. Definitions 7. Power System Coordination Analysis 8. Load Balancing 9. Scheduling 10. Coordination Between Trades 11. Coordination With Utility Companies 12. Owner Furnished Equipment 13. Materials And Equipment 14. Approved Equals 15. Manufacturer’s Declaration 16. Installation 17. Painting And Related Work 18. Cutting, Patching, and Openings 19. Tests 20. Temporary Power 21. Electrical Demolition 22. Cleaning

B. This Section applies to all sections of Division 26, 27, and 28.

C. All applicable requirements of other portions of the Contract Documents apply to the work of all sections of Division 26, 27, and 28, including, but not limited to, Division 01, General Requirements.

1.2 DESCRIPTIONS

A. The Contractor shall provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to complete and leave ready for operation all electrical systems as called for in these specifications or shown on the drawings and all details essential to complete the work. Items omitted from either the specifications or the drawings, but shown or described in the other trades, and all items necessary to make the electrical system complete and workable shall form a part of the work. No “extras” will be allowed.


B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor certifies that: 1. He has visited the site and is satisfied that he understands all site conditions that may

have an effect on his bid price. 2. He fully understands the make-up, construction, and operation of all systems and

equipment he is bidding on, and he has included in his price all materials, supplies, accessories, and services necessary to make these systems complete and operational.

C. Extent of Work: Work under this contract consists of furnishing, installing, testing, placing into operation, and guaranteeing complete electrical systems as shown on the drawings and as specified in Division 26. The Contractor shall connect and place all wired equipment in proper working order. Refer to the plans and specifications for work included in this Contract. Some general guidelines to coordinating work between Division 26 and other Divisions are as follows: 1. Division 26 includes all power wiring and raceways for other Divisions' equipment.

Division 26 is responsible to furnish and install motor starters and disconnect switches for Division 22 and Division 23 equipment, unless otherwise noted. Remote two wire control logic will be extended to the motor starters as work of other Divisions. Where combined line voltage power/control is used for Division 22 or Division 23 equipment, the wiring and raceways are treated as power wiring and are work of Division 26.

2. Division 26 is responsible for providing appropriate wire and conduit between all distribution equipment and all electrical devices and utilization equipment shown on plans. It is also the responsibility of Division 26 to provide all wire, conduit, and devices necessary to accomplish all control functions as indicated by the control diagrams which are not specifically shown as work of another division.

D. Abbreviations used in these specifications: 1. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act 2. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 3. ASTM - ASTM International 4. CBM - Certified Ballast Manufacturers 5. EIA - Electronic Industries Association 6. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories 7. FCC - Federal Communications Commission 8. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association 9. IEC - International Electro Technical Commission 10. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society 11. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 12. ITL - Independent Testing Laboratories 13. NEC - National Electrical Code 14. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association 15. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 16. NESC - National Electrical Safety Code 17. UL - Underwriters Laboratories 18. A/E - Architect of Record or Engineer of Record


A. Codes and Standards: Perform all work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing agencies having jurisdiction and in accordance with these plans and as specified herein.


1. All work shall be installed in full accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) as prepared and published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and any applicable local or state codes. All electrical equipment shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or any approved independent nationally recognized electrical testing laboratory where such standards exist. Optionally, in lieu of such listing and labeling, equipment preapproved by the Electrical Inspector may be supplied. Wherever UL compliance is mentioned in the specifications, the above alternatives shall be understood to apply to all listing and labeling requirements. This does not preempt or replace the specifications or replace the approval process. All service switches/circuit breakers shall be listed and labeled as outlined above for service entrance duty.

2. Comply with the requirements of NFPA Code 241 "Building Construction and Demolition Operations," the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and the National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) National Joint Guideline NJG-6 "Temporary Job Utilities and Services."

3. In addition to the requirements outlined under other sections of the Contract Documents, all Work, material, and equipment shall comply with all requirements of the latest editions and interim amendments of the National Electrical Safety Code, National Fire Protection Association, OSHA, the building Owner's insurance company, and all applicable federal, state, and local laws and ordinances. All materials shall be listed and labeled by UL and installed as required by the listing.

4. Should any changes in the Drawings or the Project Manual be required to conform to the above regulations, the Contractor shall notify the A/E at the time of submitting his bid. After entering into the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the Contractor shall be held to complete all Work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner.

B. Permits and Regulations 1. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances,

rules, regulations, and public authority having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall obtain certificates of such inspections and shall submit same to the A/E. The Contractor shall pay all fees, charges, and expenses in connection therewith. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a certificate of final inspection from the proper authority prior to final payment. Obtain and pay for easements required to bring temporary utilities to the site, where the Owner's easement cannot be utilized for that purpose.

2. The Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the Work to be covered up or enclosed until the A/E or Owner has been notified and given reasonable opportunity (2 working days) to review the Work. When required by law or regulations, the governmental agency having jurisdiction for inspections shall be given reasonable notice and opportunity to inspect the Work. Any Work that is enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test shall be uncovered at the Contractor's expense; after it has been inspected, the Contractor shall restore the Work to its original condition at his own expense.

C. Interpretation of Drawings and Project Manual 1. Any discrepancies between Drawings, Project Manual, Drawings and Project Manual, or

within Drawings and Project Manual shall be promptly brought to the attention of the A/E for clarification during the bidding period. No allowance shall subsequently be made to the Contractor by reason of his failure to have brought said discrepancies to the attention of the A/E during the bidding period or of any error on the Contractor's part.


2. The locations of switch, receptacle, light, motor, outlets, etc. shown on Drawings are approximate. The Contractor shall use good judgment in placing the preceding to eliminate all interference with ducts, piping, etc. Where any doubt exists, the exact location shall be determined by the A/E.

3. Check all door swings so that light switches are not located behind doors. Relocate switches as required, with A/E's review.

4. All general trades and mechanical Drawings shall be checked by the Contractor before installing any outlets, power wiring, etc.

5. Equipment sizes and locations shown on the Drawings are estimated. Before installing any wire or conduit, the Contractor shall obtain the exact equipment requirements, including wire and conduit entrance locations, and install wire, conduit, disconnect switches, motor starters, overload heaters, circuit breakers, or other items of the correct size and locations for the equipment actually installed. However, wire and conduit sizes shown on the Drawings shall be taken as a minimum and shall not be reduced without written approval from the A/E.

6. The Contractor shall provide all wiring, including disconnect switches and starters for all electrically operated equipment shown on Drawings, specified or required, except that starters and/or disconnect switches need not be furnished where it is specifically noted that they are furnished with the equipment.

7. The Drawings show the general arrangement required for installation of equipment and materials. The Contractor shall follow these Drawings as closely as possible. Should conditions necessitate other arrangements, the Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings showing the changes to the A/E for review before proceeding with the Work.

8. The A/E reserves the right to make minor changes in the location of the installation of equipment and materials up to the time of roughing in at no extra cost to the Owner.

9. The Drawings, do not show all offsets and do not detail every point at which unusual conditions of construction may require special attention. All additional fittings, conduits or specialties and other appurtenances necessary due to field conditions shall be provided by the Contractor.

10. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is herein referred to in the singular number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installations.

11. Wherever in this Division 26 a Manufacturer is specified with the notation "or approved equal" or "A/E approved", the decision as to the material or equipment being "equal" shall be made by the A/E without exception and this decision shall be accepted by the Contractor as final. Where the Contractor proposes to furnish equipment or material in accordance with the "or approved equal" notation said equipment or materials shall be submitted to the A/E, for review.

12. Elevators: The location of switches, receptacles, lights, telephone outlets, etc., in elevator pits and shafts shall be located as required by the elevator Shop Drawings. Elevator controls shall be interlocked with fire alarm system for elevator recall function and fire fighter control.

1.4 RECORD AND INFORMATION MANUALS

A. Record drawings 1. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section

"Project Closeout." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate installed conditions for:


a. Raceway systems, size, contents, and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of all concealed utilities; locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.

b. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

c. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

d. Any deviations made necessary to incorporate equipment different from the Design Base equipment.

e. At completion of the project, contractor shall deliver record drawings to the A/E. 2. The Record drawings must be kept current and accurate, and may be reviewed at any

time by the A/E or Owner.

B. Operations and Maintenance Manuals 1. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."

Compile and assemble the operation and maintenance data of equipment specified in Division 26 into a separate set of vinyl covered three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference. Data shall clearly indicate all options and accessories.

2. The following items, together with any other necessary pertinent data, shall be included in each Manual: a. Each manual shall be labeled on front cover with project name, Contract,

Contractor's name, A/E, and date of project completion. b. Manufacturers' names, nearest Factory Representative, and model and serial

numbers of components of systems c. Operating instructions, start-up and shut-down procedures d. Maintenance instructions. e. Routine and 24-hour emergency service/repair information: f. Name, address and telephone number of servicing agency g. Names of personnel to be contacted for service arrangements h. Parts list with numbers of replaceable items, including sources of supply i. Manufacturers' literature describing each piece of equipment j. One approved copy of each submittal k. Written warranties l. Certificate of Material Receipt and Certificate of System Completion m. One typewritten directory for each panelboard as installed n. Record (as-built) drawings o. Certificate of Final Inspection signed by Building Authority having jurisdiction p. Test Results q. Coordination analysis (see "Power System Coordination Analysis") r. Video tapes of all equipment demonstrations and training sessions.

3. In addition to the requirements listed above and specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: a. Manufacturers' Descriptive Literature b. Final Signed Submittal Copy of Shop Drawings c. Spare Parts and Replacement Parts Lists d. Manufacturers' Maintenance and Service Manuals e. Project-Specific Description of Operation f. Wiring Diagrams g. Motor list including motor description, motor horsepower, motor voltage, fuse

size, fuse type, and overload size. h. Fuse list including fuse location, fuse size, fuse type, and load description.


i. Fixture Ballast Schedule j. Lamp Schedule

4. Materials for more than one item shall clearly indicate which item or items are included on the Project.

5. Shop Drawings which are folded and punched for insertion in the Manual shall be such that the Drawings can be unfolded without removing them from the Manual, and all information shall be legible.

1.5 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. Certain existing conditions may affect the manner or sequence of the performance of work. Review existing services and structures prior to bidding the work. Review operating schedules for existing systems and services. Coordinate the scheduling of the work with existing operations.

B. The contractor is required to visit the site of the proposed project. After the contract is signed, no allowance will be made for lack of knowledge of the project conditions.

C. Verify and reconcile work required by the contract documents with conditions at the site prior to bid.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 26 into a separate set of vinyl covered three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.

B. Provide complete warranty information for each item. Information to include: 1. Product or equipment list. 2. Date of beginning of warranty or bond. 3. Duration of warranty or bond. 4. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining

warranty services.

1.7 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Areas: In general, areas with carpet or tile floors, lay-in or fixed ceiling tile, special architectural ceiling treatment, or tiled, plastered, or paneled walls shall be considered finished areas.

B. Interior: For the purposes of this specification, interior is any area within the boundaries of the foundation of any building within the superstructure or other structures not classified as a building.

C. Concealed: Embedded in or installed behind walls, within partitions, above suspended ceilings, below grade, in trenches, in tunnels and in crawl spaces.

D. Exposed: Not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above

E. Provide: To furnish and install (complete, tested, and ready for operation).


F. Furnish: To purchase and deliver products to the project site and make ready for installation.

G. Install: To take furnished products, assemble, erect, secure, connect, and place into operation.

H. Products: Includes materials, systems and equipment.

I. Work: The providing of products for entire contract.

1.8 POWER SYSTEM COORDINATION ANALYSIS

A. The contractor shall provide a complete reports containing the following as a minimum: 1. Provide a complete documented over-current protective device time/current coordination

analysis with all circuit breaker setting and fuse characteristics documented for high level, low level, and ground fault coordination. Analysis shall be conducted by over-current protection manufacturer using established computer based programs.

2. Provide a neatly bound typewritten report completely describing all settings of over-current devices in the electrical distribution system. Provide one line diagrams with numerically keyed symbols identifying each device in the report.

3. Provide composite-time-current graphs of all devices including receptacle or circuit breaker ground fault circuit interrupters. Only one device in each panelboard need to be shown where typical of others.

B. Adjustments: Contractor shall calibrate, adjust and set all adjustable circuit breakers and protective devices in accordance with final analysis.

C. Testing: Provide a functional test of each adjustable circuit and protective device to ensure proper operation prior to initially energizing the power system.

1.9 LOAD BALANCING

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to balance the loads on the service system, all distribution systems, and all power equipment so that the variation in amperes per phase readings shall not exceed 5% under normal operating conditions.

B. Special care shall be taken during load balancing to prevent reverse rotation of motors.

C. If, during load balancing, a load is shifted from one phase to another in a color coded system, the Contractor shall paint or tape the ends of the wire at all outlet points with the proper color code for that phase. Failure to do so shall constitute justifiable grounds to require the Contractor to replace the entire circuit with the proper coded wire at no expense to the A/E or Owner.

1.10 SCHEDULING

A. General: It is mandatory that the facility be maintained in operation during construction and that periods of shutdown due to line changeovers, etc. are held to a minimum. These outages must be scheduled with and have the concurrence of the A/E and Owner. Further, it is mandatory that the completion of various stages of the electrical work coincide with the other


phases of construction to maintain and permit operation of new installations as construction progresses.

1.11 COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES

A. General 1. Coordinate all requirements of the Work of this Division with other Trade Contractors.

Such requirements include, but are not limited to, locations, sizes, anchors, and similar items.

2. Provide all necessary information to other Trade Contractors for such coordination. Such information shall include conforming Shop Drawings, conforming Product Data, and all other required data.

3. This Contractor shall bear all costs for providing affected Work of related Trade Contractor(s) with no change to the Contract Sum or Date of Substantial Completion.

4. This Contractor shall coordinate all of his/her work with the General Trades Contractor for location of all devices, fixtures and equipment prior to rough-in.

B. Mechanical/Electrical Coordination 1. Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC, and Electrical Contractors shall coordinate their

rough-in, service, and control requirements with each other. Electrical Contractor shall review all control drawings to coordinate exact number and locations of temperature control panels as well as to provide proper starters (including necessary time delays, auxiliary contacts, etc.).

2. All wiring required to power Plumbing, Fire Protection, or HVAC equipment shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor, including 120 volt to temperature control panels. All control and interlock wiring, regardless of voltage, is by the Contractor furnishing the control panel. The Division 28 Contractor shall be responsible for the wiring from the fire alarm control panel to the control device.

3. All electrical devices furnished as a part of Division 23 equipment, and installation requirements of all electrical work done by Division 23 Contractors shall conform to the applicable sections of Division 26.

4. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors prior to installation of switchboards and panelboards to insure requirements of NEC Articles 110 and 408 are met. The Contractor violating this requirement shall be responsible for the cost of all modifications required to comply to the satisfaction of the inspection agency for failure to meet the above code requirements.

5. If motors and/or equipment are furnished by other Divisions, which require larger starters, safety switches, circuit breakers, fuses, and/or branch circuit conductors than indicated, due to a larger size than specified, the Contractor furnishing the motors shall reimburse the Electrical Contractor for any cost differential.

6. Final operation of equipment provided under other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the other Divisions Contractor.

C. Foundations, Bases, Curbs, and Supports 1. Provide and coordinate all requirements for foundations, bases, curbs, and supports with

the related Trade Contractor(s). 2. Provide required dimensions, templates, and all required information on anchors, sleeves,

and cast-in-place accessories, including dimensions, to the related Trade Contractor(s).

D. Openings, Recesses, and Chases


1. Coordinate all requirements and locations for openings, recesses, and chases with the related Trade Contractor(s).

E. Final Connections 1. Coordinate with the related Trade Contractor(s) all requirements for rough-in and final

connections for equipment installed under this Division.

1.12 COORDINATION WITH UTILITY COMPANIES

A. Description 1. The Division 26 contractor shall:

a. Coordinate division of responsibility with the utility companies serving the building.

b. Provide, furnish or install materials and labor not provided, furnished or installed by the utility companies.

B. Division of work-electric power utility 1. In general, the power company will do the following:

a. Provide standard riser b. Provide primary cable c. Provide load break connectors d. Provide Terminators e. Provide grounding f. Provide security padlock g. Provide meter h. Furnish meter trim i. Furnish metering transformers j. Provide meter wire from metering transformer to meter k. Provide transformer primary l. Provide terminal pole and framing

2. The electrical contractor is responsible for all other work, including the following:

a. Provide sleeve for grounding rod b. Install meter trim c. Provide conduit for meter wiring from transformer to meter trim d. Provide guard post e. Furnish easement or right-of-way f. Provide concrete pad g. Provide trenching h. Provide primary duct i. Provide secondary duct j. Provide secondary conductors and lugs k. Provide pulling wire, string, or rope, in duct

C. Division of work-Telephone utility 1. In general, the telephone company is responsible for all service cable work, including

furnishing and installing main service copper, fiber and coax cables to the building. 2. The electrical contractor is responsible for all other work, including the following:

a. Providing trenching and backfill for telecommunications service conduits. b. Furnishing and installing telecommunications service conduits.


c. Provide a minimum of a #6 solid copper ground wire from main building ground to telecommunication plywood backboard location. Provide the service entrance plywood backboard and a 120volt GFCI with TVSS double duplex receptacle.

D. Division of work- – CATV and High Speed Data utility 1. In general, the Cable TV & High Speed Data internet utility company is responsible for

all service cable work, including furnishing and installing main service, fiber and coax cables to the building.

2. The electrical contractor is responsible for all other work, including the following: a. Providing trenching and backfill for cable and internet communications service

conduits. b. Furnishing and installing cable and internet service conduits. c. Provide a minimum of a #6 solid copper ground wire from main building ground

to telecommunication plywood backboard location. Provide the service entrance plywood backboard and 120volt GFCI with TVSS double duplex receptacle.

1.13 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for the Owner furnished equipment.

B. The Contractor shall remove, receive, store, uncrate, protect, and install the equipment in place, complete with field connections between shipping splits, feeder connections, and all appurtenances required to place the equipment in operation, ready for use. The Contractor shall be responsible for the equipment when received, as if he had purchased the equipment himself.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. New material and equipment; all bearing manufacturer’s name, model number, or other identification marking.

B. Provide standard project; latest design with published properties of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of specified material or equipment for minimum 5 years (unless exempted by A/E).

C. Unless otherwise scheduled or indicated, equipment of same type in same room must match as to color, finish, and design.

D. Unless otherwise submitted to and approved by A/E, equipment and its devices must be of same manufacturer; or devices must be approved and warranted by equipment manufacturer.

E. Whenever the Contractor furnishes equipment or material other than the Design Base Manufacturer specified, the Contractor is responsible for the cost and coordination of all modifications required not only for his work, but also for the work of all other Trades affected. Where changes to other Trades’ work are required, this Contractor must include the additional costs of all such work in his bid and ultimately make arrangements with these other Trades for such changes and compensate them accordingly. Where changes to design are required, the


Contractor shall submit such changes to the A/E for approval. The Contractor shall investigate potential conflicts such as the following: 1. Provide Physical dimensions and weights 2. Code required working clearances 3. Connecting pipe sizes 4. Additional control and interlock wiring 5. Lug size and quantity 6. Increased wire size, fuse size, and motor control equipment size 7. Increased ventilation requirements 8. Battery capacity 9. Sound levels of audible devices 10. Increased withstand and interrupting ratings of downstream equipment due to differences

in over-current protective device characteristics

2.2 APPROVED EQUALS

A. Equal (equivalent) components (articles, devices, materials, forms of construction, fixtures, etc.) by manufacturers not listed but meeting the specifications may be submitted to the A/E for approval and subsequent inclusion into the bidding documents. Submission must be received no later than 10 working days before bid date. If approved, such manufacturers will be listed in an addendum.

B. Submittals must include all of the following: 1. Cover Letter: Company letterhead; addressed to A/E. Indicate the following

a. Project name, project number, and phase or bid package if applicable b. Specification Section by number and title c. Specified Product d. Proposed Product e. Deviations, if any, from Specified Product f. List of attachments

2. Product Data: Manufacturer’s literature, fully describing proposed product with exact item highlighted or clearly indicated.

3. Specifications: Manufacturer’s specifications with all modifications noted as required to show compliance with Bidding Documents.

4. Test Data: Where performance requirements are specified, submit laboratory tests to indicate compliance.

5. Samples: Submit appropriate samples of proposed product when required by A/E, showing color, texture, construction and other attributes necessary for evaluation.

2.3 MANUFACTURER’S DECLARATION

A. Submit a list of the suppliers of Major Equipment to be used on this project. This shall be submitted with the bid. This list shall be typed on company letterhead and shall list the project title. The manufacturer and catalog number/type shall be listed adjacent to each specification section number and product description.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Rough-In 1. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of

the actual equipment to be connected. 2. Refer to equipment specifications in other Divisions for rough-in requirements.

B. Electrical Installations 1. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems,

materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: a. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other

building components. b. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. c. Coordinate and provide chases, slots, and openings in other building components

during progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations. d. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured in place concrete or supported from or on other structural components, as they are constructed.

e. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building and equipment which must be placed in service before further construction can take place.

f. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

g. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service and place each in proper operating order.

h. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that the work is shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the A/E before final placement.

i. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

j. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

k. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

3.2 PAINTING AND RELATED WORK

A. Finish painting in areas of new construction is the responsibility of the General Trades Contractor and is specified in Division 9.

B. Any other painting, required by Sections in Division 26, is the responsibility of the respective Division 26 Contractor. It shall meet the requirements of Division 9. Each Contractor is responsible for repainting of finished areas disturbed by his own cutting and patching.


C. Factory-finished equipment which has rusted or has been damaged shall be cleaned, spot primed with zinc chromate, and finished to the original quality and color by the Contractor.

D. Support steel shall be cleaned, rust removed, primed, and painted.

3.3 CUTTING, PATCHING AND OPENINGS

A. Unless otherwise required in General or Special Conditions, Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching required for his own work. Work must be accomplished in a neat and workmanlike manner, acceptable to the A/E.

B. If necessary to cut into work of other Trades, it shall be done by other Trades at this Contractor’s expense. Patching shall be similarly executed.

C. Cutting, burning or drilling of structural support beams, joists, plates, or other structural members is strictly prohibited without the specific written consent of the A/E. Use rotary drills where cutting holes through concrete, brick, plaster, or tile is necessary. Obtain approval of the A/E before proceeding with work.

D. The General Trades Contractor shall locate and size openings for conduit, bus-way or other items prior to construction.

E. All cutting and patching shall be done promptly and all repairs shall be made as necessary to leave the entire work in good condition, including all cutting, fitting, and drilling of masonry, concrete, metal, wood, plaster, and other materials as specified or required for proper assembly, fabrication, installation, and completion of all work of the Contract.

F. Patching shall match adjacent materials and shall be accomplished only by trades men skilled in the respective craft required. Materials and equipment used in the patching work shall comply with requirements of those Sections of the Specification relating to material to be used in new construction.

G. Electrical provides: 1. All opening and hole information through floors, walls, and roofs for his work; Including

all pipe and conduit, inserts, hangers, and plates. 2. Exact information to other contractors as to size, depth, and location of such openings

before construction is in place; and delivery and setting in place of all boxes, sleeves, inserts, and forms for his work in time for installation in all locations.

3. All cutting, patching and restoration to accommodate Electrical contractor’s failure to provide specified date in time for openings to be left or to accommodate boxes, sleeves, inserts, and forms after construction has been Completed by other contractors.

4. Skilled craftsmen to cut, patch, rebuild, restore, replace, refinish and repaint new construction cut, disturbed, or marred by him to original or new condition; for installation of new, exposed, concealed, underground, or underfloor work of all kinds; for admission of new work and equipment; for installation of new equipment and new work in new construction; for complete restoration of pipe, duct, or equipment covering disturbed or marred by his personnel.

3.4 TESTS


A. The Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction may require portions of the work to be inspected, tested, or approved. These services shall be performed by approved agencies.

B. The A/E must be notified of all scheduled tests and adjustments at least 48 hours before they are scheduled so that he may witness same. If the Contractor performs any test or adjustment without the A/E present, or without proper notification, the Contractor may be required to perform the test or adjustment a second time. All schedules are to be coordinated with the A/E and Owner far enough in advance so-as to minimize inconvenience.

C. Tests shall include: 1. Proper operation of lights and equipment. 2. Continuity of conduit system. 3. Insulation leakage and impedances. 4. Ground system resistance. 5. Any sub-system tests described in other Sections of these Specifications. 6. Record line voltage at service entrance equipment with all systems operating.

D. Provide a signed statement that all tests have been performed and have met all requirements as described in other Sections. This signed statement shall be incorporated into the Record and Information Manual.

E. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspections, tests, or approvals.

3.5 TEMPORARY POWER

A. Provide temporary electrical power to be used for construction purposes by all contractors in accordance with Division 1. Provide all fixtures, wiring, and equipment, and make all connections required for temporary electrical service during the construction period; coordinate all power and lighting requirements with the various trades. Contractor to pay for energy consumption, and any utility company charges to establish service. 1. Temporary Service Panels: Provide a minimum of one 100 ampere rated service panel in

a location or locations within 200 feet of all building work areas; include as many such panels as required to meet 200 foot maximum distance. Provide all wiring and raceways required for service connection and branch circuit wiring connecting each panel to the serving utility and to the following electrical loads; obtain all permits required.

2. Lighting: Provide minimum of 5 foot-candles of illumination in all building work areas where construction work is being accomplished; increase illumination to 50 foot-candles for painting, plastering and other interior fine finish work.

3. Outlets: Provide duplex receptacle outlets on 100 foot centers maximum; arrange and locate so that no work area of the building is more than 100 feet from a 120-volt outlet; allow no more than 5 outlets on any 20-ampere circuit.

4. Power Circuit Breaker: Provide one 100-ampere, 208-volt, 3-phase or 240-volt, 1-phase circuit breaker in each panel for power equipment.

B. Power shall be obtained from the local electrical utility.

C. Temporary power shall not be obtained from the generator purchased as part of this project.


3.6 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

A. Removal and Relocation of Existing Electrical Apparatus 1. The Contractor, under this section, shall remove, store, reconfigure and relocate the

existing equipment. a. All light fixtures designated to be relocated shall be cleaned and re-lamped.

2. Where existing electrical equipment is shown to be removed, the Contractor shall also bypass to existing branch wiring.

3. Where part of the existing equipment on a branch circuit is to be disconnected, the circuit shall be de-energized only long enough to disconnect the equipment and terminate the wiring that is to remain.

4. All equipment and major lengths of wiring retired and removed shall remain the property of the Owner unless shown or directed otherwise and shall be placed in storage on the site by the Contractor where ordered.

5. Any electrical equipment or components damaged during the performance of this Contract shall be replaced or repaired to a like new condition in accordance with the requirements of this Division.

B. Utilities 1. Shut-off active utilities:

a. Where existing electrical service is to be permanently abandoned, shut-off and cap or arrange with proper utility company for shut-off.

b. Where existing electrical services are to be rerouted or reused in new work, shut-off, cut and install temporary switches to minimize future shut down periods.

2. Existing utilities to remain: Maintain in service and protect against damage. 3. Existing electrical services to be rerouted: Where electrical services remaining “In

service” interfere with demolition or future construction, shut-off, disconnect remove, relocate and reconnect as shown or required.

4. Shut-down periods: a. Arrange timing of shut-down periods of all in-service utilities with the Owner. Do

not shut-down any utility without prior written approval. b. Keep shut-down period to a minimum or use intermittent period as directed. Shut-

down periods may require premium Contractor work.

C. Protection 1. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other approved methods to limit the

amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. a. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as

ice, flooding, pollution and electrical shock. b. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by

demolition operations, as directed. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to the start of the work.

2. Do not throw materials from windows or use metal chutes. Use hoists, wheel barrows, plywood chutes or other acceptable methods.

3. In removal of existing materials, take care not to damage work remaining in place, salvable materials, or equipment. Repair or replace any existing construction, materials, or equipment damaged during demolition, to the owners satisfaction at no additional cost.

4. Remove all materials completely and neatly, leaving surfaces smooth and ready for new work. Saw-cut where necessary. Do not use jack hammers as a means of cutting.


D. Procedures 1. Locate demolition equipment so as not to impose excessive loads to supporting walls,

floors, roof or framing. 2. Proceed with demolition in a systematic manner and coordinate all trades involved. 3. Carefully remove equipment, materials, or fixtures which are to be reused. 4. Remove all burnable materials from the site. 5. Disconnect or shut off service to areas where electrical work is to be removed. Remove

all electrical fixtures, equipment and related switches outlets, conduit and wiring which are not a part of the final project in all areas where work of this contract is to be performed.

E. Disposal of demolished materials 1. Remove from the site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition

operations. 2. Transport materials removed from demolished structures and dispose of off the site.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of work, all materials and equipment furnished in this contract shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, grease, rust, and oil. Prepare for finish painting, where painting is specified.


08/10/2018 [26 00 15] - 1 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 26 00 15

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting shop drawings, product data, color samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.

B. This section applies to all sections of Division 26, 27 and 28.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written information that requires the Engineer’s responsive action. Materials and equipment submitted shall meet all the requirements of the Contract Documents. No materials or equipment shall be ordered until the submittal has been reviewed and processed as “Reviewed for Compliance” or “Conform as Noted” by the Contractor, Architect, and Engineer.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require the A/E’s review. Information is submitted for record purposes only and will not be reviewed by the A/E. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to make sure materials and equipment comply with the Contract Documents prior to ordering. If reviewed however, the submittals may be rejected for non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Reviewed for Compliance: The submittal was reviewed for compliance by the Engineer and the submittal was found to generally conform with the design concept and Contract Documents.

D. Conform as Noted: The submittal was reviewed for compliance by the Engineer and the submittal was found to generally conform with the design concept and Contract Documents with the exception of the items noted. The items noted by the Engineer must be changed and/or included, however, the submittal should not be resubmitted.

E. Revise and Resubmit: The submittal was reviewed for compliance by the Engineer and the submittal did not conform with the design concept and Contract Documents. The items noted by the Engineer must be changed or included and the submittal must be resubmitted.

F. Does Not Conform: The submittal was not reviewed because it is incomplete, inadequate for review, or does not meet the submittal requirements listed in the ‘Quality Assurance’ section below. The Contractor shall review the submittal requirements and resubmit.


A. The review of shop drawings by the A/E does not relieve the Contractor from his/her responsibility to comply with the project documents nor does it authorize any additional cost.

08/10/2018 [26 00 15] - 2 SUBMITTALS

The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities, dimensions and weights, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, for performing his/her work in a safe manner and for all coordination of the work with all trades.

B. Contractor assumes complete responsibility for changes required and contract delays, including that of other trades, as a result of his/her chosen materials and equipment.

C. All submittals shall bear the Contractor’s certification that he/she has reviewed, checked, and approved the submittal, that they have been coordinated with the requirements of the project and the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the he/she has verified all field measurements and construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data. Submittals without a Contractor’s approval will not be reviewed, will not be returned, and the Contractor will be notified.

D. Submittals shall identify the manufacturer, specific model number, performance data, electrical characteristics, overall size, features, specified options, wiring diagrams, and any other information necessary to determine if the product or equipment conforms with the contract documents. Contractor shall submit only material applicable for the project, where catalog pages are submitted the contractor shall identify the specific items that apply. Additional equipment specific requirements may be listed in other spec sections.

E. Submittals shall include the complete package of equipment materials, piping, and insulation pertaining to that piece of equipment. A package of equipment requiring long lead times should be submitted as early as possible.

F. Where other specification sections require field quality control reports to be prepared by a Qualified Testing Agency, submit testing agency qualification as part of the Informational Submittals. Testing Agency shall be a member company of NETA or an NRTL.

G. All submittals must be issued individually by specification section.

H. Submittals which do not conform with the requirements above WILL NOT BE REVIEWED; they will be returned to the Contractor marked “Does Not Conform”.

1.4 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Electronic copies of the Contract Documents are available from the A/E for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Contractor shall submit electronic copies of all shop drawings in PDF format. Electronic submittals shall be emailed to [email protected] and the AEC Project Manager. Other means of file transmission such as FTP or other file format types shall be mutually agreed upon.

C. Contractor shall prepare a title page for each submittal containing the following information: 1. Indicate name of firm and individual with contact information for entity that prepared

each submittal. 2. Project name as listed on contract. 3. Specification section number and title. 4. Material or Equipment specified.

08/10/2018 [26 00 15] - 3 SUBMITTALS

5. Date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS REQUIRED

A. Submit information on the materials and equipment items as listed in the following list. 26 00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND METHODS 26 05 19 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 20 MC, AC AND NM CABLE 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 48 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES, 26 28 26 TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 35 53 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE AND BRANCH

PANELS 26 51 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 52 13 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 28 05 13 CONDUCTORS AND CANBLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND

SECURITY 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

2.2 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS

A. Equipment specific information submittals are listed within equipment specification sections. General information submittal requirements are listed below. Information submittals shall be provided when indicated within equipment specifications sections.

1. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency 2. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for equipment, accessories, and components,

from manufacturer. 3. Source quality-control reports. 4. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide all information in bound 3-ring binder as well as digital format. Include the following information:

1. All approved shop drawings. 2. All information submittal information.

08/10/2018 [26 00 15] - 4 SUBMITTALS

3. Contractor’s warranty and any specific equipment warranty provided by equipment manufacturers.

4. Inspection certificates. 5. Routine maintenance requirements and maintenance intervals for installed components as

well as the name and address of qualified service agencies for all major equipment. 6. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting equipment. 7. Spare parts list.

B. Project close-out material: Provide as described in Division 01.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Notify the A/E in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor must boldly note all deviations on the submittal.

B. Make submittals promptly in accordance with the approved schedule and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work of the Contractor or any other Contractor.

C. Correct or change and then resubmit rejected submittals as required until approved. The Contractor must clearly note all revisions on resubmitted submittals. Resubmittals without the revisions noted may be returned without review.

D. Do not begin fabrication or work that requires an Action Submittal until submittal is processed as “Reviewed for Compliance” or “Conform as Noted” by the A/E.


08/10/2018 [26 00 20] - 1 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 26 00 20

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes: 1. Sleeves 2. Seals

a. Watertight Seals b. Fire Rated Seals c. Oil Resistant Service Seals d. Corrosive Service Seals

3. Firestops 4. Concrete 5. Access Panels

B. This Section applies to all sections of Division 26, 27, and 28.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets indicating product characteristics, performance and

limiting criteria 2. Manufacturer's installation instruction for each type of seal or firestop required by the

project 3. Written certification that firestopping systems meet firestopping requirements specified

herein 4. Concrete compression testing reports

B. Informational Submittals 1. None required.

C. To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One copy of each approved submittal


A. Codes and Standards: Perform all work associated with basic electrical materials in compliance with applicable requirements of governing agencies having jurisdiction and in accordance with these plans and as specified herein. Where provisions of the pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more stringent provision shall govern. 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Specifications for the Design,

Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings."


2. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 3. National Electrical Code (NEC).

B. Qualifications 1. Installer Qualifications. Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and

application of joint sealers. 2. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with American Welding

Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code -Steel." a. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for

welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

B. Field verify and coordinate with the General Trades Contractor all locations and dimensions to ensure that the equipment will be properly located, readily accessible, grouped with other trades equipment as needed, and installed in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the contract documents, and the referenced standards.

C. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and where cutting, drilling, etc., of floors, walls, ceilings, or other surfaces is necessary for the proper installation, this work shall be carefully done, and any damage to building, piping, or equipment shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. In the event any discrepancies are discovered, immediately notify the A/E in writing. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Seals

a. Link-Seal by Thunderline Corporation b. CSD Sealing Systems c. O-Z/Gedney Inc.

2. Firestopping Materials a. Hilti b. Tremco Sealants & Coatings c. 3M Fire Protection Products d. Dow Corning e. CSD Sealing Systems f. Insta-Foam Products, Inc. g. The Carborundum Co.


3. Access Panels a. Milcor b. Zurn c. Larsen’s d. Acudor e. JL f. Nystrom g. Karp

2.2 SLEEVES

A. Sleeve material through floors and walls shall be machine cut rigid galvanized steel conduit.

B. Sleeves installed in new construction shall have welded flange at mid-point of sleeve which functions as a water barrier and anchor collar.

C. At the contractor’s option, steel wall sleeves by Link-Seal may be provided.

2.3 SEALS

A. Modular mechanical type 1. Seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the

annular space between conduit and sleeve. 2. Seal assembly shall have steel bolts and nuts and rubber sealing element for service and

environment under which assembly will be used. Seal shall have a pressure resistance rating of 20 psig.

B. Sealing plug type 1. Seals shall consist of two identical piece plugs made of synthetic rubber with one edge

flanged, serrated profile on the outside and a series of ridges on the inside which compress and assures a tight seal. Seal shall have a pressure resistance of 15 psig at the plug base and 30 psig at the flange. Rubber grade shall be suitable for the service and environment under which sealing plug will be used.

2.4 WATERTIGHT SEALS

A. Modular mechanical type watertight seals shall have zinc galvanized bolts and nuts with EPDM rubber sealing element. Seals shall be Link-Seal, Type C.

B. Sealing plug type watertight seals shall be made of EPDM rubber. Seals shall be by CSD Sealing Systems.

2.5 FIRE RATED SEALS

A. Modular mechanical type fire seal shall have zinc galvanized bolts and nuts with silicone rubber sealing element which provides a three hour fire resistance rating. Seals shall be Link-Seal, Pyro-Pac, model FS.


B. Sealing plug type fire rated seals shall be made of FRR rubber for three hour fire resistance rating, Seals shall be by CSD Sealing Systems.

2.6 OIL RESISTANT SERVICE SEALS

A. Modular mechanical type oil resistant service seals have stainless steel bolts and nuts with Nitrile rubber sealing element. Seals shall be Link-Seal, Type O.

B. Sealing plug type oil resistant seals shall be made of Nitrile rubber. Seals shall be by CSD Sealing Systems.

2.7 CORROSIVE SERVICE SEALS

A. Modular mechanical type corrosive service seals have stainless steel bolts and nuts with rubber sealing element having high resistance to most organic compounds, acids, alkalis and related chemicals. Seals shall be Link-Seal, Type S.

B. Sealing plug type corrosive service seals shall be made by Viton rubber. Seals shall be by CSD Sealing Systems.

2.8 FIRESTOPS

A. General 1. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814 tested for specific fire

rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.

2. Cast-in-place firestop devices are installed prior to concrete placement for use with non-combustible and combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems), or electrical cable bundles, penetrating concrete floors.

3. Sealants, foams or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

4. Intumescent sealants, caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe.

5. Foams, intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles.

6. Non-curing, re-penetrable intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles.

7. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes.

8. Materials used for complex penetrations shall be made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways.

9. Non-curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways.

10. Firestopping materials shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) Ratings as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E-814 or UL1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.


a. The F rating shall be a minimum of one (1) hour, but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated.

b. Conduct the fire test with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column.

2.9 CONCRETE

A. All concrete work incidentals to the work of Divisions 26, 27, and 28 is the responsibility of the Division 26 contractor. Conform to the quality standards in Division 3. Such concrete includes, but is not limited to: 1. Encasement of underground raceways where specified in the section "Underground Ducts

and Raceways" 2. Lighting fixture foundations 3. Service transformer pad 4. Primary switch concrete pads unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Coordinate exact

pad requirements and location with the Electric Utility Company if they provide the transformer.

5. Concrete collars around conduit and busway 6. Emergency generator concrete equipment base 7. Housekeeping pads

2.10 ACCESS PANELS

A. Furnish ceiling and wall access panels as necessary for access to pull boxes, junction boxes, remote ballasts, electrical equipment, etc., requiring service, adjustment or maintenance.

B. Access panels are to be turned over to the General Trades Contractor for installation.

C. Ceiling Access Panels 1. Drywall Ceilings: 24” x 24”, Milcor Style DW, 16 gauge steel frame with 14 gauge door

panel, double acting concealed spring hinges, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting with ceiling.

2. Fire-Rated Ceiling: 24” x 24”, Milcor fire-rated access door, UL approved, 16 gauge steel frame with 18 gauge recessed door panel, 20 gauge panel sides and 26 gauge panel hat channel, continuous hinge, self-latching cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting.

3. Plaster Ceilings: 24” x 24”, Milcor Style AP with finish material same as ceiling material or Style K, 16 gauge galvanized steel frame with 18 gauge galvanized steel door panel. 24" x 24" and larger panels shall be reinforced, continuous hinge, cylinder lock, prime painting for finish painting to match ceiling.

4. Acoustical Concealed Spline Ceilings: 24” x 24”, Milcor Style AT, 16 gauge steel frame with an 18-gauge steel recessed door panel. 24" x 24" and larger panels shall be reinforced, continuous hinge, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting.

D. Wall Access Panels 1. Drywall: 24” x 24”, Milcor Style DW, 16 gauge steel frame with 14-gauge door panel,

double acting concealed spring hinges, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting with wall.


2. Masonry and Tile: 24” x 24”, Milcor Style M Standard, 14 gauge steel frame and door panel, concealed spring hinges, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting with wall or Style M stainless.

3. Fire-Rated: 24” x 24”, Milcor fire-rated access door, UL approved, 1-1/2 hour, Class B rating, 16 gauge steel frame, 20 gauge insulated door panel continuous hinge, automatic door closer, cylinder lock, interior release mechanism, prime painted for finish painting with wall.

4. Plaster: 24” x 24”, Milcor Style K, 16 gauge steel frame with 14 gauge door panel and 22 gauge galvanized casing beads, concealed spring hinges, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting with wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Sleeves 1. Furnish and install sleeves for all penetrations through masonry and concrete

construction, smoke or fire rated separations, and equipment room walls and floors. 2. Carefully coordinate and check locations of sleeves immediately before and after each

concrete pour and masonry installation. 3. Give the General Trades Contractor locations and sizes of all openings required for the

installation of sleeves before construction of masonry or concrete walls is started. If it becomes necessary to cut into new work because of the failure of this Contractor to notify the General Trades Contractor, then the General Trades Contractor shall do any necessary cutting and patching required at this Contractor's expense.

4. Cut sleeves through walls flush with each surface. Unused sleeves shall extend beyond wall surface, filled with and surrounded by fire barrier materials, and be provided with caps.

5. Cut sleeves 2 inches above finished floors and 3 inches above floors in equipment rooms and shafts. Bottom of sleeve to be cut flush.

6. Core drill holes for sleeves in existing construction. 7. Patching shall be by the General Trades Contractor at this Contractor's expense. 8. Sleeves must be installed plumb with respect to wall. 9. Pack the space between sleeves and conduits or cables with approved fire barrier sealant

to maintain fire rating of structure. Fill space around all sleeves leading into exposed areas with material compatible with adjacent construction and finish or fire barrier sealant material to maintain fire rating of the structure.

B. Seals and Firestops 1. Clean surfaces and substrates of dirt, oil, loose materials and other foreign materials

which may affect the proper bond or installation of seals and firestops. 2. Do not apply seals and firestops to surfaces previously painted or treated with a sealer

curing compound or similar product. Remove coatings as required in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide primers, as required, which conform to manufacturer's recommendations for various substrates and conditions.

3. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for installation of seals and firestops. 4. Install firestops with sufficient pressure to fill seal holes, voids and openings to ensure an

effective smoke seal and to maintain the fire resistance rating of the assembly.


5. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Remove excess firestop material promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

6. Unused sleeves shall be filled with and surrounded by firestop material. Sleeve ends shall be capped. Blind sealing plugs may be used at Contractor's option.

7. Install watertight seals for all below grade penetrations of conduit into the building. 8. Install fire rated seals in all fire rated walls and floors. 9. Install oil resistant service seals in environment where oils, fuels, solvents and other

petroleum - base products are used. 10. Install corrosive service seals in environments where organic materials, acids, alkalis and

related chemicals are used.

C. Concrete 1. Provide concrete compression testing for light pole foundations and exterior equipment

pads. 2. Do not mount equipment on concrete supports until concrete has had sufficient setting

time (seven days minimum).

D. Access Panels 1. Coordinate locations and installation of panels required to permit convenient access to

electrical equipment requiring adjustment, service or maintenance. Mark locations of access panels on Record Drawings


A. Examine seals and firestops to ensure proper installation and full compliance with this specification. Work shall be accessible until inspection and approval by the applicable code authorities.

B. Correct unacceptable seals and firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this specification at no additional cost to the owner.


08/10/2018 [26 05 19] - 1 - WIRE, CABLES, AND CONNECTORS

SECTION 26 05 19

WIRE, CABLES, AND CONNECTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.

B. The Contractor shall provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to install wires, cables, and connectors in accordance with the plans and as specified herein.


A. Wires, cables and connectors must comply with requirements of UL, NEMA, and NFPA and shall be in accordance with applicable NEC Articles and tables.

B. Wire and cable furnished shall be in accordance with the following standards where applicable: 1. UL Standard 44 for rubber insulated wires and cables 2. UL Standard 83 for thermoplastic insulated wires and cables 3. UL Standard 1569 for Type MC cable 4. UL Standard 817 for flexible cords and cables

C. Wire and cable shall be identified by surface markings indicating manufacturer, size, metal type, voltage rating, UL listing and cable type.

D. Install electrical cables, wires and connectors as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA'S "Standard Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wire and Cable: 1. Cerro Wire 2. Encore Wire 3. Alcan Aluminum Corporation 4. General Cable Corporation 5. Senator Wire & Cable Company

B. Connectors and Splices: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International.


3. Burndy Corporation 4. Hubbell/Anderson. 5. Ideal Industries, Inc. 6. O-Z/Gedney 7. 3M Company 8. Thomas and Betts Corp

2.2 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Provide factory fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials for applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper wire selection as determined by Installer to comply with project’s installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards. All conductors shall be annealed uncoated copper. Aluminum or other conductor material is not permitted unless meets all criteria as stated her for feeders 100A and larger. Select from the following UL types those wires with construction features which fulfill project requirements: 1. 600V, Type XHHW-2, 90 degree C for dry or wet locations. Insulation shall be abrasion,

heat and moisture resistant cross-linked polyethylene (XLP). 2. 600V, Type THHN/THWN, 90 degree C for dry locations or 75 degrees C for wet

locations. Insulation shall be heat and moisture resistant PVC with a nylon jacket. 3. Type MC Cable, 90 deg. C for dry locations only. Green insulated equipment grounding

conductor. Constructed with THHN/THWN conductors (max. #10 AWG), binder tape, and galvanized steel interlocking armor.

B. Conductor stranding, unless otherwise noted, shall be as follows:

AWG StrandsNo. 14 (control) 7No. 12 to No. 10 1No. 8 to No. 2 7No. 1 to No. 4/0 19250 and above 37

C. Type "SOOW" Cord 1. Cord shall be extra hard usage duty with flexible stranded copper conductors with 90

degree C EPDM rubber insulation enclosed by a thermosetting jacket that is resistant to oil, ozone, abrasion, and high temperature. Cord shall have a 600-volt rating.

D. Feeders: 1. Feeders 100A and larger may by Aluminum material. All feeders are designed and noted

on the documents based on copper properties. Aluminum conductors of same or equal capacity may be used in lieu of copper as long as all other properties are met. The raceways shall be increased as required. If the designed raceway is oversized one or two sizes the same or equivalent oversized raceway shall be provided. If aluminum is used, All terminations shall be rated for both copper and aluminum.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


A. Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 1. Provide UL type factory fabricated metal connectors and terminals of sizes, ampacity

ratings, materials, types, and classes indicated. 2. Twist-on Connectors shall consist of a tapered spring with insulated outer covering. 3. Compression Connectors shall be tin plated copper. Configuration shall be tee, in-line,

etc., as required. 4. Terminals shall be tin plated copper, compression locking fork tongue with insulated

barrel. 5. Compression Lugs shall be tin plated copper, standard barrel, one hole or two holes as

required. 6. Heat Shrink Insulation shall be heat shrinkable polyolefin with an internally applied

adhesive watertight sealant. 7. Motor Connection Kit shall consist of compression lugs bolted together, cloth tape cover,

and heat shrink insulation. 8. Splice Kit shall consist of compression connector and heat shrink insulation. 9. All splices located in manholes, handholes, and underground pull boxes shall be

waterproof.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN in raceway.

H. Underground Feeders: Type XHHW in raceway.

I. Underground Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN in raceway.

J. Cord Drops and Equipment make-up connections: Type SOW-A, hard service cord.

K. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

L. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.


M. Type MC cable permitted for final connection to a single device only, 72 inches maximum. No daisy chaining of devices or luminaires on MC Cable.

N. Minimum size for lighting and power branch circuit conductors shall be No. 12 AWG. Control conductors may be No. 14 AWG where circuit amperes and the NEC allow and when length does not pose a voltage drop problem.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Conceal cables raceway finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved, UL listed pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Provide suitable fire stopping and sealing around cables penetrating fire-rated elements.

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

G. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway.

H. No wire may be pulled until masonry and concrete is in place.

I. Free ends and loops at boxes and enclosures are to be pushed back in box and protected by blank covers or other means until the interior painting and decorating work is completed.

J. All circuits shall have dedicated neutral conductors run for each overcurrent protection device.

K. Number of branch circuit conductors including switch legs and travelers shall not exceed nine conductors. Conductors shall be derated in accordance with NEC Article 310 when more than three current carrying conductors are installed in a raceway.

L. Where a feeder or branch circuit exceeds the terminating lug size, the Contractor shall use an appropriate adaption fitting to reduce size. Cutting of conductor strands is not permitted. This will only be permitted if the device does not have an option for the correct size lugs. If the device has lugs available in the size required, the contractor shall provide the deice with the proper lugs and not use any adapter kits.

M. Emergency circuit wiring and ground fault circuit breaker wiring shall be installed in separate conduits from all other wiring.

N. Conductor splices shall be kept to a minimum. No splices are permitted in feeders or branch circuits over 90A.


O. Any equipment having multiple power connections shall have a warning label attached to each source where it connects to the equipment.

P. Electrical contractor shall provide cords and plugs for equipment furnished by Other Trades Contractor which is intended or shown for connection to a receptacle but not furnished with the equipment.

Q. Type "MC" cable shall be supported and secured at intervals not exceeding 6 feet with approved steel or malleable iron cable straps, clamps or hangers. Install "anti-short" bushings on all "MC" cable ends.

R. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

S. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

T. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

U. Connectors use permitted: 1. Install twist-on connectors for lighting, communication, and receptacle branch circuits

and utilization equipment only in size No. 8 AWG and smaller and only in finished areas. 2. Install fork tongue terminals on control and metering conductors which connect to

terminal blocks. 3. Install motor connection kits on all polyphase induction motors. 4. Install bolted-type pressure or compression connectors and lugs for all other connections.

Connectors shall be compatible with the conductor material. Insulate connectors with electrical tape to 150% of the insulating value of the conductor insulation. The tape shall have insulating properties equivalent to the conductor insulation.

V. Service entrance conductors shall be installed without splices. Electrical equipment feeders shall be spliced only where shown or specifically approved. Control and metering conductors shall be installed without splices.

W. All splices shall be made only by specific permission of the A/E. Splices shall occur only in manholes or pullboxes and shall be sealed watertight with heat shrink insulation.


A. The Contractor shall test each electrical circuit after permanent cables are in place with terminators installed, but before cable or wire is connected to equipment or devices to demonstrate that each circuit is free from improper grounds and short circuits.

B. The Contractor shall test by Megger Test, the insulation resistance between phases and from each phase to ground for each of the following feeder and branch circuits: 1. Panelboards 2. Switchboards 3. Switchgear


4. Motors

C. The Megger Testing shall be witnessed by the A/E. The A/E shall be notified at least 1 week and again 48 hours in advance of testing.

D. Measure the insulation resistance at 500 volts dc with a hand cranked or motor driven “Megger” insulation testing instrument.

E. If any insulation resistance measures less than 50 megohms, the cable shall be considered faulty with the cable failing the insulation test, and shall be replaced.

F. Any cable which fails the insulation tests or which fails when tested under full load conditions shall be replaced with new cable for the full length and retested. Corrective action and repeated tests if deemed necessary by the A/E shall be accomplished at Contractor’s expense.

G. Maintain testing report sheets identifying each cable tested, what each feeder or branch circuit will be connected to, and the level of insulation resistance measured. Test reports shall be signed by the tester, initialed by the A/E and sent to the A/E within 48 hours.


08/10/2018 [26 05 20] - 1 - MC AND AC CABLE

SECTION 26 05 20 MC AND AC CABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Amendments to the General Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this and other Sections of Division-26.

B. Attention is called to specific requirements in these Division-26 Sections: 1. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2. Raceways 3. Wires and Cables 4. Grounding

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Metal-Clad Cable (MC) and Armored Cable (AC) assemblies of insulated conductors enclosed in a flexible metal sheath or enclosure for power, lighting, signal, control and related systems rated 600 volts and less.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer’s data as required in Section 26 00 10, “Basic Electrical Requirements.”


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following code: 1. NFPA 70: “National Electrical Code.” 2. UL Compliance: Provide components which are listed and labeled by UL under

the following standards. a. UL Std. 4 Armored Cable. b. UL Std. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. c. UL Std. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use

with Copper Conductors. d. UL Std. 1569 Aluminum Armored Cable.

3. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standards: a. WC-5 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and

Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle materials as required in Section 26 01 00, “Basic Electrical Requirements.”

08/10/2018 [26 05 20] - 2 - MC AND AC CABLE

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate with other work, including walls and ceiling installation, as necessary to interface installation of cable with such work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one or more of the following:

1. AFC/Nortek. 2. Alflex Corp. 3. Cablec. 4. General Cable Co. 5. Southwire Company.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. All conductors shall be copper.

B. Insulation shall be either thermoplastic or thermosetting and shall be rated for 75 degrees or 90 degrees C.

C. Grounding conductors required on the drawings or required by the NEC shall have green color insulation and shall be copper and shall be sized in accordance with the NEC.

D. Refer to the Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for additional requirements.

2.3 METAL-CLAD CABLE (MC)

A. MC cable shall be installed in accordance with the NEC. MC cable shall be understood to mean type MC or type CS (copper sheath) or ALS (aluminum sheath).

B. MC cable may be used with conductor size #12 and larger.

2.4 ARMORED CABLE (AC)

A. AC cable shall be installed in accordance with NEC.

B. AC cable may be used with conductor sizes 12 through #1 AWG only.

C. In addition to the circuit conductors, AC cable shall have an internal bonding strip of copper or aluminum in intimate contact with the armor for its entire length. This bonding strip shall be bent back on the sheath at each termination. This bonding strip shall be included in all armored cable and is not shown on the drawings.

08/10/2018 [26 05 20] - 3 - MC AND AC CABLE

D. Where a ground conductor is shown on the drawings or where it is required by the NEC, such ground conductor shall be in addition to the bonding strip defined in the paragraph above.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. MC and AC cable shall be permitted wherever EMT conduit and wiring are permitted for branch circuit work; it shall be permitted in dry locations only, concealed in suspended ceilings or walls. It may not be used exposed in finished or unfinished spaces, nor where subject to damage or otherwise prohibited by code.

B. Underground: MC and AC cable shall not used underground.

C. Concrete: MC and AC cable shall not be used embedded in concrete.

D. Assembly Areas: AC cable shall not be used in assembly areas as defined in NEC, nor in areas of gathering of greater than 20 people.

E. MC or AC cables shall not be installed horizontally in any type of wall.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF TYPE AC AND MC

A. AC cable shall be secured by approved straps, staples or fittings at intervals not exceeding 4-1/2 feet and within 12 inches from boxes or fittings, except when the cable is fished. MC cable shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 6 feet. Cable shall not be supported by draping on suspended ceiling tiles, pipes, ducts, etc. Cable for branch circuits with #12 or #10 AWG conductors may be secured by nylon ties except where the support may slip (such as along ceiling support wires). Cables for lighting circuit branch wiring may be supported from the ceiling support wires using spring steel clips listed for such application.

B. All bends shall be made so that the type AC cable will not be injured, and the radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than five (5) times the diameter of the cable.

C. Where change is made from type AC or MC cable to raceway wiring methods or to other cable, or a box shall be installed.

D. At all points where the armor of AC and MC cable terminates, a fitting shall be provided to protect wires from abrasion and, in addition, an approved insulating bushing shall be provided between the conductors and the armor. The connector or clamp by which the cable is fastened to boxes or cabinets shall be of such design that the insulating bushing will be visible for inspection.


08/10/2018 [26 05 26] - 1 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems.

B. Provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to furnish and install grounding system in accordance with the plans and as specified herein. Provide all accessories as necessary for a complete system.

C. All components of the electrical system shall be grounded and bonded including: raceways, enclosures, receptacles, motors, controllers, panelboards, contactors, luminaires, emergency generator, transfer switch, telephone/data systems and all other electrical components and subsystems. Metallic conduit systems shall be electrically continuous throughout and be grounded at the service entrance.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: 1. Ground Rods 2. Connectors 3. Connection Materials 4. Grounding Fittings

B. Informational Submittals 1. None Required.

C. To be included in the Record and Information Manuals: 1. Ground resistance testing results certified by the testing organization. 2. Schematic diagram of the grounding system.

D. Product data for ground rods, connectors and connection materials, and grounding fittings.

E. Ground resistance testing results certified by the testing organization.

F. Schematic diagram of grounding system.


A. Reference Standards: 1. All design, material, installation, and testing pertaining to the electrical grounding and

bonding system shall comply with the latest edition of applicable requirements and


standards addressed within the UL, NEMA, IEEE, ANSI Standards, and the National Electric Code (NEC).

2. All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled for their intended usage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include:

1. Anixter Bros., Inc. 2. Bashlin Industries, Inc. 3. Buckingham Mfg. Co. 4. A.B. Chance Co. 5. Dossert Corp. 6. Engineered Products Co. 7. Erico Products, Inc. 8. Galvan Industries, Inc. 9. GB Electrical, Inc. 10. General Machine Products Co., Inc. 11. Harger Lightning & Grounding 12. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. 13. Ideal Industries, Inc. 14. Kearney-National. 15. McGill Mfg. 16. O-Z/Gedney Co. 17. Raco, Inc. 18. Thomas & Betts Corp. 19. W.H. Salisbury & Co. 20. Utilco Co.

B. Exothermic Weld

1. Cadweld 2. Terraweld 3. Ultraweld 4. Therm-O-Weld

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Grounding system components shall be as required to comply with the design and construction of the system indicated. Components shall be as indicated in manufacturer's submittal data.

B. Ground Conductors:

1. Grounding Electrode Conductors shall be insulated and stranded cable. 2. Equipment Grounding Conductors shall be insulated and stranded cable


3. Minimum equipment ground wire size for power circuits shall be #12 AWG, unless noted otherwise.

4. Minimum equipment ground wire size for control circuits shall be #14 AWG, unless noted otherwise.

5. All grounding conductors that originates or terminates below grade or in concrete slab shall be bare, unless noted otherwise.

6. Conductors for grounding loop and connection of equipment or other items to grounding loop shall be #2/0 AWG minimum.

C. Connections: 1. All connection of ground conductors to ground rods, bus bars, structural members, pipes,

or fences and splices of ground conductors shall be made by exothermic welds, except where otherwise noted. a. All connections to bar lugs shall be exothermic weld or compression type. b. Bolted type connection of ground conductors may only be made where terminal

lugs or blocks have been furnished and installed in equipment by the Manufacturer.

D. Ground Rods:

1. Ground rods shall be copper clad steel with high strength steel core and electrolytic grade copper outer sheath, molten welded to core, 3/4 inch minimum diameter, 10 foot length.

E. Grounding Busbar:

1. Where a field-provided ground bus or ground bar is required, use copper bar with 98 percent conductivity.

2. Size the bus for not less than 25 percent of the cross-sectional areas of the related feeder. A minimum size of ¼-inch thick by 4-inch high by 6-inch length (minimum) is required.

a. The ground bar shall be a predrilled copper busbar provided with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for the type of connectors to be used.

b. The ground bar shall be tin-plated for reduced contact resistance. c. The ground bar shall be insulated from its support a minimum of 2 inches.

F. Identification of Ground Conductors 1. Ground conductors shall have conductor identification. 2. Ground conductor identification shall be as called for in the National Electric Code,

where covered. 3. Ground conductors larger than No. 6 AWG may be identified by taped color coding at all

splices and terminations. 4. Ground conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller shall be color coded. 5. Ground conductor color coding shall be green throughout. 6. Wire markers made of paper tape shall not be used.

G. Exothermic Weld 1. Exothermic welds shall be powdered copper oxide and aluminum to form a molded

homogeneous copper joint connection between the copper conductor and the material being bonded to.

H. Miscellaneous Conductors:


1. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided #3/0 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.

2. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide, unless noted otherwise.

2.3 APPLICATIONS

A. Applications of electrical grounding and bonding work in this section include the following: 1. Ground the electrical service system neutral at the service entrance equipment to the

ground rod array. 2. Bond the main domestic water service pipe ahead of any meter, and within of entry into

the building. Provide bonding jumper around water meter. 3. Bond building steel to the main service ground bus. 4. Bond concrete reinforcing bars to the service equipment. 5. Bond the counter-poise ground ring to the main service ground bus. 6. Ground each separately-derived system neutral:

a. Interior mounted separately-derived systems shall be solidly grounded to building steel, a separate ground bus which is solidly connected to the main service ground bus, or the main service ground bus.

b. Exterior mounted separately-derived systems shall be solidly grounded to a driven ground rods array or a counter-poise ground ring, and the main service ground bus. 1) Standby or emergency generators are separately derived systems if the

neutral is bonded to the generator frame and if there is no direct connection of the generator neutral conductor to the service neutral conductor.

B. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, metal cable trays, auxiliary gutters, meter fittings, boxes, cable armor, cable sheath, ground buses in electrical rooms, metal frame of the building or structure, metal roofing and metal veneer siding, ground ring, air ducts and mechanical equipment, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground terminals, and metallic plumbing systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable requirements, referenced standards, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. Where conflicts exist, notify the Engineer of Record of the conflict and follow the most stringent interpretation.

B. All installations shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.

C. Connections 1. General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic

action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. a. Use electroplated or hot tin coated materials to assure high conductivity and make

contact points closer in order of galvanic series.


b. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact. c. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as

red lead paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 2. Exothermic Welded Connections. Use for connections to structural steel and for

underground connections except those at test wells. Install at connections to ground rods. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

3. Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits with pressure type grounding lugs. Where metallic raceways terminate at metallic housings without mechanical and electrical connection to the housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the ground bus in the housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors.

4. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

5. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression type connectors on conductors and make bolted and clamped type connections between conductors and ground rods.

6. Compression Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground conductor.

7. Moisture Protection: Where insulated ground conductors are connected to ground rods or ground buses, insulate the entire area of the connection and seal against moisture penetration of the insulation and cable

D. Install ground system in accordance with the applicable requirements of the NEC. Coordinate installation of grounding with other disciplines so-as to avoid conflict and potential damage to the grounding system components. Route grounding conductors along the shortest and straightest paths possible without obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage, except as indicated.

E. Size: When grounding and bonding conductors are not sized on Drawings or elsewhere in the specifications, size the grounding conductors in accordance with NEC. Where grounding conductor sizes are shown in excess of code requirements, provide conductor sizes as indicated. Size bonding jumper so that minimum cross-sectional area is greater than or equal to that of the equivalent grounding conductor as determined from NEC.

F. All underground grounding conductors shall be a minimum of 2'-6" below grade.

G. Ground rods. Locate a minimum of one rod length from each other and at least the same distance from any other grounding electrode. Interconnect all ground rods with bare conductors buried at least 30 inches below grade. Drive rods until tops are 2'-6" below finished floor or final grade except as otherwise indicated

H. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe, in accordance with NEC. Provide bonding jumper around water meter.


I. Braided Type Bonding Jumpers. Install to connect ground clamps on meter piping to bypass meters electrically. Use elsewhere for flexible bonding and grounding connections.

J. Provide grounding and bonding at Utility Company’s metering equipment in accordance with Utility Company’s requirements.

K. Conduit and raceway systems shall not be considered a ground path. Provide an internal insulated grounding conductor in all conduits and raceways.

L. For service feeder circuits, provide a separate, service-grounding conductor with the circuit conductors. Where parallel runs are made, provide fully rated service-grounding conductor in each conduit. Terminate each end in an approved manner.

M. For feeder and branch circuits, provide a separate, equipment-grounding conductor with the circuit conductors. Where parallel runs are made, provide fully rated equipment-grounding conductor in each conduit. Terminate each end in an approved manner.

N. Ground cabinets, junction boxes, outlet boxes, motors, controllers, raceways, fittings, switchgear, transformer enclosures, other electrical equipment and metallic enclosures. Ground equipment and enclosures to the continuous-grounded metallic raceway system in addition to any other specific grounding as indicated.

O. Provide grounding-type insulated bushings for metal conduits 1-1/2 inches and larger terminating in equipment enclosures containing a ground bus and connect the bushing to the ground bus.

P. Make equipment-grounding conductor approximately 2 inches longer than the ungrounded conductors at both ends.

Q. The Contractor shall not allow or cause any connection or splice for the grounding system to be covered up or enclosed until it has been inspected and approved by the Inspecting Authority.

3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND TESTING

A. Ground system resistance measurements that shall be taken and submitted to the Engineer for approval before energizing equipment. Measurements shall be taken in dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall.

B. Test ground resistance with earth test megger and record results.

C. Document on site plan showing building ground connection and test locations. Provide a minimum of ten data points.

D. Where tests show resistance to ground exceeds 25 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance by driving additional ground rods.



A. System Neutral: Where a system neutral is used, bond the system neutral to the grounding electrode system in accordance with NEC. Ground the system neutral only at the point of service and isolate it from ground at all other points in the system.

B. Separately Derived Systems: Ground neutrals of separately derived systems such as generators, transformers, etc., in accordance with NEC.

C. The neutral of each transformer shall be bonded to system ground at only one point. This point shall be ahead of the first secondary protective device.

1. Where a transformer is feeding a single device or enclosure, the point of the neutral to ground bond shall be made in that first enclosure, ahead of the first secondary protective device.

2. Where a transformer is feeding multiple devices or enclosures, the point of the neutral to ground bond shall be made in that transformer. Each device tapped from that transformer shall permanent label indicating that the neutral-ground bond is in the serving transformer.

D. At minimum, grounding electrode conductors and equipment grounding conductors shall be sized to comply with NEC.

E. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.


08/10/2018 [26 05 29] - 1 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes hangers, supports and concrete inserts as required for the installation of conduits, cabinets, transformers and equipment installed under Divisions 26, 27, and 28.

B. Provide all beam clamps, mechanical anchors, threaded rod, framing steel and hardware as required.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


A. All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of hangers and supports with building structural system and architectural features, and with mechanical, fire-protection, electrical, and other building features in the vicinity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include: 1. Hilti 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc. 4. Erico, Inc. 5. GS Metals Corp. 6. Loos & Company, Inc. 7. Mason Industries, Inc, 8. Powerstrut. 9. Thomas & Betts Corp. 10. Unistrut Corporation 11. Superstrut


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Conduits or raceways shall be securely supported and anchored with proper devices, using approved type device for direct down-pull loads.

B. Minerallac type hanger shall be limited to above ceilings. Holes made in walls or ceilings for use with anchoring devices shall be covered by large steel washers. Include special hangers, as required. Minerallac type fittings shall not be permitted within 8 feet of the floor surface where exposed raceways are installed.

C. Hangers shall be individual ring or clevis type, one-hole straps or multiple trapeze hangers.

2.3 ANCHORAGE AND STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Concrete Anchor Bolts and Studs: Use mechanical anchors that are appropriate for load conditions and meet ICC AC193 criteria for cracked concrete. Hilti Kwik Hus EZ / EZ-I, Kwik Bolt TZ or approved equal.

B. Masonry Anchor Bolts and Studs: Use mechanical anchors that are appropriate for load conditions.

C. Concrete Inserts: Steel-channel type.

D. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

E. Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS SP-69, Type 57.

F. Beam Clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided. Single-sided type is not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Conduits shall be supported to meet the conditions as required using proper type and size straps, clamps, and hangers.

B. Exposed conduits shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to building structure, fastened at least every 8 feet and at both sides of each outlet, except at one side only of conduit terminating outlets. Conduits shall be installed tight to structure and beams/joists. Coordinate exposed conduit routing with Architect prior installation.

C. Conduit risers shall be supported with friction clamps with two-point bearing anchored to building construction and at every floor.

D. The following hanger methods are not permitted: 1. Wood plugs 2. Perforated band iron 3. Hook chain supports 4. Balling wire, etc. 5. Minerallacs where previously mentioned


6. Friction type clamps, such as hammer on clips

E. Whenever possible, use supports, clamps, hangers, etc., designed especially for the equipment to be installed.

F. The maximum permitted load on hanger rod, plain or all-thread, shall be as follows: 1. 1/4-inch size - 750 pounds 2. 3/8-inch size - 1000 pounds 3. 1/2-inch size - 2000 pounds 4. 5/8-inch size - 3000 pounds 5. The minimum size hanger rod permitted is 1/4-inch size.

G. Any supports exposed to weather, shall be cleaned, primed and painted.

3.2 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS

A. Use bolted connections with steel brackets, slotted channel, and slotted-channel fittings to spread structural loads and reduce stresses.

B. Attachments to New Concrete: Bolt to channel-type concrete inserts or use appropriate code compliant mechanical anchors.

C. Attachments to Existing Concrete: Use appropriate code compliant mechanical anchors.

D. Holes for Anchors in Concrete: Drill at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

E. Attachments to Solid Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Use mechanical anchors.

F. Attachments to Hollow Walls: Bolt to slotted steel channels fastened to wall with mechanical anchors.

G. Attachments to Wood Structural Members: Install bolts through members.

H. Attachments to Steel: Bolt to clamps on flanges of beams or on upper truss chords of bar joists.

3.3 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE

A. Anchor panelboards, motor-control centers, motor controls, switchboards, switchgear, transformers, unit substations, fused power-circuit devices, transfer switches, busways, battery racks, static uninterruptible power units, power conditioners, capacitor units, communication system components, and electronic signal processing, control, and distribution units as follows: 1. Size concrete bases so expansion anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from

the edge of the concrete base. 2. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Install to allow for resilient media

between anchor bolt or stud and mounting hole in concrete. 3. Anchor Bolt Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment: Install to allow for

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall. 4. Torque bolts and nuts on studs to values recommended by equipment manufacturer.

08/10/2018 [26 05 33] - 1 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways and fittings for electrical systems. Furnish and install all necessary hangers, supports, solid metal straps, pull boxes, junction boxes and fittings not indicated on the Drawings but which are required for a complete and properly installed conduit system consistent with the National Electrical Code and the Architectural treatment of the Building. Conduits to be supported from the building structure and not from items or supports of other trades.

B. Furnish and install all items of equipment and accessories necessary for a complete, electrically continuous, metallic conduit system as described herein and as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Metal conduit to be installed for all wiring unless noted otherwise.

D. Minimum conduit size to be 3/4” trade size. Larger sizes as necessary and as noted on Drawings or required by code.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

F. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

G. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

H. RGS: Rigid galvanized steel conduit.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittal 1. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings. 2. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways,

wireways and fittings.


B. Informational Submittal 1. None Required.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. All work must comply with the requirements of UL, NEMA, NFPA and ANSI Standards.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, wireways, and suspension system with other construction trades.

1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Store raceway and fittings in a clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect materials from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.


A. Prior to construction or installation of a section of raceway, verify that the site is in suitable condition for installing such raceway. Coordinate in field.

B. During non-work hours and at locations where installation of raceway is temporarily suspended or terminated, close ends with caps or plugs fitted to prevent entry of water or debris. Use caps or plugs designed for that purpose by the raceway manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers are subject to compliance with the requirements on the plans and as specified herein.

B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: 1. AFC 2. Alflex Corp 3. Allied Tube and Conduit 4. Electri-Flex Company 5. Perrna-Cote Industries 6. Robroy Industries 7. Triangle PWC, Inc. 8. VAW of America Inc.


9. Wheatland Tube Co.

C. Nonmetallic Conduit and Tubing 1. AFC 2. Cantex Inc. 3. Carlon 4. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

D. Conduit Fittings and Accessories 1. Adalet/PLM 2. Appleton Electric 3. Carlon Div. of Indian Head 4. Condux International, Inc. 5. Crouse-Hinds 6. Electri-Flex Company 7. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. 8. O.Z. Gedney 9. Perma-Cote Industries 10. Robroy Industries 11. Unistrut Corp.

E. Metal Wireways 1. Hoffman 2. Square D 3. Cooper B-Line

F. Nonmetallic Wireways 1. Hoffman 2. Lamson & Sessions 3. Carlon Electrical Products

G. Surface Metallic Raceways 1. The Wiremold Company 2. Thomas & Betts Corporation 3. Walker Systems, Inc.

H. Surface nonmetallic Raceways 1. Enduro Composite Systems 2. Hubbell, Inc. 3. Lamson & Sessions 4. Panduit Corp 5. The Wiremold Company

2.2 METALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Provide metal conduit of types, grades, sizes, and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by


installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways.

B. All products and installation must comply with the following listing agency requirements: 1. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 2. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5. 3. IMC: ANSI C80.6. 4. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1. 5. Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1. 6. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.

a. Fittings: Compression type. 7. FMC: Aluminum or Zinc-coated steel. 8. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. 9. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Provide non-metallic conduit of types, sizes, and weights for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements which comply with provisions of NEC for raceways.

B. All products and installation must comply with the following listing agency requirements: 1. ENT: NEMA TC 13. 2. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC. 3. ENT and RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 4. LFNC: UL 1660.

2.4 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Provide conduit accessories of types, sizes, and materials, complying with manufacturer's published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing.

B. Provide galvanized cast metal conduit bodies of types, shapes, and sizes as required to fulfill job requirements and NEC requirements. Construct conduit bodies with threaded conduit entrance ends, removable covers, either cast or of galvanized steel, and corrosion resistant screws.

C. Construct locknuts for securing conduit to enclosures with sharp edge for digging into metal and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening.

D. Bushings for terminating conduits smaller than 1-1/4 inches are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent injury to cable insulation. Bushings for terminating conduits 1-1/4 inches and larger shall have flared bottom and ribbed sides and shall have a phenolic insulating ring molded into the bushing. All bushings shall have a screw type grounding terminal.

E. Provide conduit hub assemblies complete with hub, locknut, and bushings.

F. Provide cast malleable iron, galvanized or cadmium-plated fittings. Fittings for use with PVC-coated rigid steel conduit shall also be PVC coated identical to the conduit.


G. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Provide conduit fittings for use with flexible steel conduit of threadless hinged clamp-type. 1. Straight Terminal Connectors. One-piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted

machine screw for securing conduit, and male threaded end provided with locknut. 2. 45-deg. or 90-deg. Terminal Angle Connectors. Two-piece body construction with

removable upper section, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit, and male threaded end provided with locknut.

H. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit Fittings shall mate and match to conduit type and material.

I. Liquidtight Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit Fittings shall be one-piece body with PVC ferrule and neoprene gasket.

J. Sealing Fittings and Products: 1. Provide mechanical pipe seals. 2. Provide joint sealants as specified in Division 26 section, “Basic Electrical Materials and

Methods.” 3. Provide gland-type sealing bushings for interior conduit seals.

2.5 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1 for interior installations, NEMA 3R for outdoor or wet location installations, or as noted otherwise.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

C. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type for indoor installations, Flanged-and-gasketed type for outdoor installations, or as noted otherwise.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.6 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS

A. Fiberglass polyester or PVC, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections are flanged, with stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

B. Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

C. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.


2.7 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish matching architectural finish on surrounding surfaces, coordinating with A/E.

B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte texture and Finish to match architectural finish on surrounding surfaces, coordinate with A/E.

C. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceways.

2.8 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: For raceway and fittings, provide manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

2.9 APPLICATIONS

A. Outdoors: The following is a list of application guidelines to be followed unless noted otherwise on the Contract Documents. 1. Exposed: RGS or IMC. 2. Concealed: RGS, RNC, or IMC. 3. Underground, Single Run: RNC. 4. Underground, Grouped: RNC. 5. Final Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

B. Indoors: The following is a list of application guidelines to be followed unless noted otherwise on the Contract Documents. 1. Exposed: EMT or RGS 2. Concealed: EMT, RGS or RNC 3. Final Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

4. Damp or Wet Locations: RGS.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size indoor, 1-inch trade size outdoor.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise

indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with

that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.


G. Paint all exposed raceway and boxes to match surrounding finish, coordinate with A/E.

H. Surface raceway may only be used as indicated on drawings.

I. Use liquidtight flexible non-metallic conduit for the final 24 inches of connections to motors or control items subject to movement or vibration, and in cells of precast concrete panels for conduits 4 inches and smaller.

J. Use EMT for installations that are concealed or for exposed except in hazardous locations RGS shall be installed below 10’.

K. Use Schedule 80 PVC or rigid metal conduit for conduits located in slabs.

L. Use of MC cable is not permitted in exposed areas. Refer to section 26 05 20 (MC and AC Cable).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install exposed conduits and conduits above suspended ceilings, parallel or perpendicular to walls, ceilings, or structural members. Do not run through structural members. Avoid horizontal runs within partitions or side walls. Avoid ceiling inserts, lights, or ventilation ducts or outlets. Do not run conduits across pipe shafts or ventilation duct openings. Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

B. Finished Areas: Conduits installed in finished areas of new construction shall be concealed in walls, below or in slabs, or above suspended ceilings. 1. Conduits installed in high-bay areas on masonry walls shall be routed vertically on

exposed wall. Coordinate with other trades so all piping including conduits and air drops etc. shall be grouped together. Conduits in high-bay areas routed vertically on gyp walls shall be routed concealed.

2. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, always routed parallel and perpendicular to building lines, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Size conduits to meet the NEC requirements; however, no conduit shall be smaller than 3/4 inch for interior applications or 1 inch for exterior applications.

D. Install underground conduits a minimum of 30 inches below finished grade for circuits 600 volts or less and 42 inches for circuits above 600 volts. All underground conduits shall be concrete-encased, unless specifically shown otherwise. Concrete-encased conduits shall have a minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover for circuits 600 volts and less and a minimum of 4 inches for circuits above 600 volts. Wherever possible, make changes of direction with long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 2.5 feet. Conduits shall slope toward manholes or pullboxes and away from building with a pitch of not less than 3 inches in 100 feet. All trenches under roads, walkways, and drives shall be backfilled with compacted granular material to subbase. Conduits passing through backfilled areas shall be supported. Provide a


metal-backed yellow polyethylene marker tape in the trench overall conduit runs. Provide spacers for multiple conduit runs.

E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from perpendicular and parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

G. All spare raceways shall be capped or plugged and include a pull wire. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

H. All metallic raceways shall be grounded.

I. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

J. Make bends and offsets so the interior diameter is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Install raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible. 1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows

can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.

L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches of concrete cover. The diameter of embedded conduits shall not exceed one-third of the slab or wall thickness. Conduit shall be embedded in slabs only where specifically shown on plan. Conduits in concrete slabs shall be placed between the bottom and top reinforcing steel. Separate conduits by not less than the diameter of the largest conduit to ensure proper concrete bond. 1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete

placement. 2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. 3. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.

Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 4. Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit,

or IMC before rising above the floor.

M. Telecommunications, Control, and Data System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.

N. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.


O. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

P. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.

Q. Seal all floor, wall, and ceiling penetrations. Penetrations in exposed, finished areas shall be painted to match the architectural finish. Conduits penetrating exterior walls of any structure (other than handholes, manholes, or pullboxes) below grade, at grade floors, or below grade floors shall be sealed to prevent moisture migration. The exterior of the conduit shall be sealed with a mechanical pipe seal. The interior conduit seal shall be a gland-type sealing, bushing, or RTV closed-cell silicone foam. Ensure that conduits do not retain water against these seals.

R. Provide fire stopping at all floor, wall and ceiling penetrations as necessary to maintain the ratting of the associated assembly. Fire stopping shall be UL listed for the intended use.

S. Conduits shall penetrate roofs only where specifically shown on the plans and shall be coordinated with other applicable trades and the roof installer/manufacturer to ensure the roof warranty is maintained. Provide all required flashing and sealing necessary.

T. All conduits must be supported with materials specifically made for this purpose. Do not use wire hangers. Do not attach any parts of the conduit system to ventilation ducts. Conduit supports shall be attached independently to the building structure. Support conduits on each side of bends and on a spacing not to exceed the following: 6 feet for conduits smaller than 1-1/4 inches and 8 feet for conduits 1-1/4 inches and larger. Additional support shall be provided as necessary for the associated weight and arrangement. Support riser conduits at each floor level with clamp hangers. Set conduit anchors in waterbearing or waterproofed walls with waterproof cement. All underground conduits shall be securely anchored to prevent movement during placement of concrete or backfill. Use precasted separators and heavy gauge wire ties or other approved fasteners. See Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” for additional requirements.

U. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

V. Install miscellaneous fittings, such as reducers, chase nipples, three-piece unions, split couplings, and plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application. Install grounding-type expansion fittings in raceways every 200 feet of linear run or wherever structural joints are crossed to allow for expansion and contraction. Provide insulating bushings to protect conductors. Draw up couplings and conduit sufficiently tight to ensure water-tightness. Fasten conduit terminations to NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 enclosures with two locknuts, one inside and one outside, and terminate with a bushing. Fasten conduit terminations to NEMA 3R, enclosures and weatherproof equipment enclosures with conduit hub assemblies. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.


W. Terminations: 1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter

squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box.

2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.


A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings and finishes are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.

B. After completing installation of exposed, raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

C. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and wireways, inspect and clean exposed finishes.


08/10/2018 [26 05 43] - 1 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS

SECTION 26 05 43

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Underground Raceways 2. Concrete Ductbanks

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittal 1. None Required



A. All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA, ASTM and ANSI Standard.

B. Concrete work shall conform to the requirements of ACI 301-89


A. Prior to construction or installation of a section of underground raceway or ductwork, verify that the site is in suitable condition for installing such raceway or ductwork. Coordinate in field with Civil Contractor.

B. During non-work hours and at locations where installation of raceway and ducts is temporarily suspended or terminated, close ends of ducts with caps or plugs fitted to prevent entry of water or debris. Use caps or plugs designed for that purpose by the raceway manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS

A. PVC conduit shall be rigid, Schedule 80 heavy wall, UL listed for direct burial.


B. Plastic coated rigid galvanized and rigid galvanized steel conduits and fittings shall be per Section “Raceways for Electrical Systems”.

C. Minimum size conduit to be installed below grade or slab shall be 1 inch.

D. PVC conduit fittings shall be slip joint type with cement as recommended by the Manufacturer.

E. Conduit elbows shall be long radius types.

F. Where allowed, short-radius manufactured bends shall be 18 inches for conduits less than 3 inches in diameter and 36 inches for conduits 3 inches or larger in diameter.

2.2 CONCRETE

A. Concrete used for the encasement of raceways shall have a 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi with 3/4” maximum sized aggregate.

B. Cement color shall be 95% pure mineral oxide (90% pure iron oxide) finely milled to pass a 325 mesh. Carbon added for darker shades shall be wettable and shall not exceed 3% of the weight of portland cement. Color pigments shall be light fast, wettable, weather resistant, alkali resistant, and free of deleterious fillers and extenders.

C. Concrete Color shall be Solomon Colors #140 or equal.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT STEEL FOR DUCTBANKS

A. Provide longitudinal reinforcing steel bars shall be with maximum spacing of 18 inches; minimum of one bar in each corner of ductbank.

B. Provide steel tie bars in the transverse direction enclosing the longitudinal bars; minimum size of No. 3 bars; minimum spacing of 12 inches. Minimum clear concrete cover over reinforcement steel shall be 3 inches where concrete is cast directly against earth, and 1.5 inches where concrete is cast directly against formwork.

C. Where ductbank enters rigid structures, provide reinforcing steel to tie the ductbank to the structure. Provide details indicating method employed to prevent differential settlement from damaging ductbanks.

2.4 APPLICATIONS

A. Underground raceways shall be plastic coated rigid galvanized steel, rigid galvanized steel or PVC. The following exceptions are where plastic coated rigid galvanized steel or rigid galvanized steel shall be used: (unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings) 1. Raceways underneath electric service equipment pads. 2. Raceways interfacing with building construction, including sections through floor slabs

or masonry walls. 3. Terminal pole risers 4. Elbows which terminate above grade or floor slab 5. Metering conduit


6. Bends greater than 10 degrees

B. Underground raceways shall be encased in a concrete envelope for the following installations: 1. Secondary service entrance raceways between service transformer and service entrance

equipment. 2. As noted on the Drawings

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Trenches shall be cut neatly and uniformly. Use extreme care working around existing utilities to avoid damage. Hand excavation shall be performed within a minimum of 5 feet of all existing utilities and underground services.

B. Pitch trenches uniformly towards manholes or both ways from high points between manholes for required duct drainage. Avoid pitching ducts towards buildings and other structures.

C. Trench walls may be used to form side walls of duct bank only when soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions. Forms are required when soil is not self-supporting.

D. After concrete encasement has sufficiently cured, trench shall be backfilled to grade with earth quality as specified per Division 2 specifications.

E. Concrete-encased ductbanks shall have 3 inch minimum cover on all sides.

F. Ducts shall interface with building construction no less than 5 feet outside the building.

G. Ducts shall have a minimum slope of 4 inches to each 100 feet away from buildings and towards manholes, pull boxes, and handholes, and shall run in straight lines between indicated changes in direction.

H. Use of manufactured bends is limited to building entrances and stub-ups to equipment or poles.

I. Seal active raceways entering building and at outdoor terminations for equipment, with a suitable non-hardening compound to prevent entrance of moisture and gases.

J. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, underground raceways systems shall be installed 30 inches below finished grade to top of raceways.

K. Unless encased in concrete, underground raceways shall be installed on a 4-inch minimum sand bedding. Backfill first 4 inches with sand, remainder with excavated materials free of sharp objects.

L. Innerduct placement in communications conduits shall be performed to avoid excessive tension and deformation of the innerduct. Damaged or necked down innerduct shall be replaced. Conform to manufacturer's installation instructions.


M. Each spare raceway including innerducts provided with a minimum 1/8 inch polypropylene pull cord with distance markings, and capped.

N. Identification 1. Location of underground raceways shall be identified with underground warning tape.

Refer to Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for requirements. 2. Concrete encased primary service raceway envelope shall be placed using colored

concrete. Mix color pigment with the concrete at a rate of approximately 4.5 pounds per sack of cement. In no case shall the pigment weight exceed 10% of the weight of cement.

O. Thermoplastic spacers shall be used to provide minimum (uniform) spacing between individual ducts as follows: 1. Between similar services: 3 inches 2. Between power and signal services: 6 inches 3. Between high voltage and below 601 volt services: 3 inches

P. Spacers or space separators shall be placed not more than 6 feet apart, and shall transmit no vertical load to the conduit. A minimum of 3 spacers shall be used per 20 feet lengths of duct installation.

Q. Concrete envelopes shall be installed by monolithic pour method and vibrated in place to insure flow into voids and complete encasement of raceways. Use steel reinforcing rods for alignment side stakes and support bottom of raceways on plastic base spacers. Keep bottom of trench clean of debris and water.

R. Provide tie wires to prevent displacement of ducts during concrete pouring. Tie wires are not to be used as substitutes for spacers.

S. Concrete envelopes shall only cross below gas lines without exception.

T. Raceways shall run up above ceiling at location indicated or as directed by architect if not shown on drawings after entering inside building perimeter unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

U. Underground raceways installed below building footings shall be concrete encased for full width and height of trench, extending two feet beyond each edge of footing.

V. Underground raceways within the building shall be routed within the confines of the building foundation walls. Raceways shall be routed below concrete slabs at all times with a minimum of 8” from top of raceways to the underside of slab.

W. Raceways installed for parallel feeder conductors shall be installed such that each run is the same length as the others.

X. Where new ducts, raceways and concrete envelopes are joined with existing manholes, handholes, ducts, conduits and concrete envelopes, make the joints with the proper fittings and fabricate the concrete envelope to insure smooth, durable transitions.



A. Upon completion of underground raceways and duct bank installation, a standard flexible mandrel shall be pulled through each duct to loosen and remove any debris or foreign materials left in the line. Mandrel shall be minimum 12 inches long and have diameter 1/2 inch less than the inner diameter of the duct. A brush with stiff bristles shall then be pulled through each duct to remove loosened particles. The diameter of the brush shall be slightly larger than, the inner diameter of the duct.


08/10/2018 [26 05 48] - 1 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: C. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: IV.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. b. Component Response Modification Factor: 1.5. c. Component Amplification Factor: 1.0.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second). 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period.

1.2 PRODUCTS

A. Vibration Isolators: 1. Neoprene pads. 2. Spring isolators. 3. Restrained spring isolators.

B. Seismic-Restraint Devices: 1. Channel support systems. 2. Galvanized restraint cables. 3. Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections

hanger rod stiffeners. 4. Bushings for floor-mounted equipment anchors. 5. Bushing assemblies for wall-mounted equipment anchorage. 6. Resilient isolation washers and bushings. 7. Mechanical anchors. 8. Adhesive anchors.

C. Factory Finishes: Standard.


A. Testing: By Contractor.


08/10/2018 [26 05 53] - 1 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. The requirements for electrical identification components includes, but not limited to, the following: 1. Buried electrical line warnings 2. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors 3. Operational instruction signs 4. Warning and caution signs 5. Equipment labels and signs

1.2 SUBMITTALS




A. Reference Standards 1. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless

identified by a specific edition date. 2. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be

applicable to this Project. 3. All design, materials, and installation pertaining to Identification shall comply with the

latest edition of applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following standards: a. ANSI C2 b. NFPA 70 c. ANSI A13.1 and NFPA 70 for color-coding

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. American Labelmark Co. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Cole-Flex Corp. 4. Emed Co., Inc. 5. George-Ingraham Corp. 6. Ideal Industries, Inc. 7. Kraftbilt 8. LEM Products, Inc. 9. Markal Corp. 10. National Band and Tag Co. 11. Panduit Corp. 12. Radar Engineers Div., EPIC Corp. 13. Seton Name Plate Co. 14. Standard Signs, Inc. 15. W. H. Brady, Co.

2.2 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. 1. Color: Black letters on orange field. 2. For lines 100 amps or higher, indicate voltage and service. 3. For lines over 200 volts, indicate voltage and service.

B. Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl with legend over-laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating.

C. Pre-tensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when placed in position.

D. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

E. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend indicating type of underground line.

F. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters.

G. Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch-thick aluminum sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.


H. Plasticized Card-Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends. Orange background, unless otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener.

I. Aluminum-Faced, Card-Stock Tags: Weather-resistant, 18-point minimum card stock faced on both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002 inch thick, laminated with moisture-resistant acrylic adhesive, punched for fasteners, and preprinted with legends to suit each application.

J. Brass or Aluminum Tags: 2 by 2 by 0.05-inch metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener.

K. Mimic Bus: Continuously integrated mimic bus factory applied to front of switchboard(s), switchgear(s), substation(s) or as required on drawings or other sections of specifications. Arrange in single-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved final mimic bus diagram. Coordinate mimic bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which applied. Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components and connections. 1. Factory applied self-adhesive tape ½” wide, 2 mil thickness or greater. Tape shall be in

approved color contrasting with equipment factory-finish background to represent bus and components, complete with graphics and lettered designations.

2. Engraved, laminated plastic ½” wide installed with glue and screws. Laminate shall be in approved color contrasting with equipment factory-finish background to represent bus and components, complete with graphics and lettered designations.

3. Painted ½” wide in approved color contrasting with equipment factory-finish background to represent bus and components, complete with graphics and lettered designations.

2.3 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS

A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.

B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates, Instruction plates, and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, 1/8 inch thick. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

C. Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

D. Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 20 gauge galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for the application. Provide 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

E. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or #10/32, stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.


2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: According to color-coding.

B. Paint: Formulated for the type of surface and intended use. 1. Primer for Galvanized Metal: Single-component acrylic vehicle formulated for

galvanized surfaces. 2. Primer for Concrete Masonry Units: Heavy-duty-resin block filler. 3. Primer for Concrete: Clear, alkali-resistant, binder-type sealer. 4. Enamel: Silicone-alkyd or alkyd urethane as recommended by primer manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those required by codes and standards. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C. Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.

E. Circuits with More Than 600 V: Identify raceway and cable with "DANGER--HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters 2 inches high, stenciled with paint at 10-foot intervals over a continuous, painted orange background. Identify the following: 1. Entire floor area directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a

basement or ground floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.

2. Wall surfaces directly external to conduits concealed within wall. 3. All accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around conduits in vertical shafts, exposed

in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings. 4. Entire surface of exposed conduits.

F. Install painted identification according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. 2. Prime surfaces using type of primer specified for surface. 3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of enamel.

G. Color Banding Raceways and Exposed Cables: Band exposed and accessible raceways of the systems listed below:


1. Bands: Pre-tensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or a combination of both. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

3. Apply the following colors to the systems listed below: a. Fire Alarm System: Red. b. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. c. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. d. Security System: Blue and yellow. e. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. f. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.

H. Caution Labels for Indoor Boxes and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Install pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive labels identifying system voltage with black letters on orange background. Install on exterior of door or cover.

I. Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Install labels externally. 1. Exposed Boxes: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover. 2. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card-stock tags. 3. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or

equivalent.

J. Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground line warning tape located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall, use a line marker for every 16 inches, and fraction thereof, of width. 1. Install warning tape for underground wiring, both direct buried and in a raceway.

K. Color-Coding of Secondary Phase Conductors: Use the following colors for secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors: 1. 208Y/120-V Conductors:

a. Phase A: Black b. Phase B: Red c. Phase C: Blue d. Neutral: White e. Ground: Green

2. 480Y/277-V Conductors: a. Phase A: Brown b. Phase B: Orange c. Phase C: Yellow d. Neutral: White e. Ground: Green

3. 240/120-V Conductors: a. Phase A: Black b. Phase B: Red c. Neutral: White d. Ground: Green


4. Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following field-applied, color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than #10 AWG: a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6

inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch wide tape in colors specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings.

b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal and spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten to a snug fit, and cut off excess length.

L. Power-Circuit Identification: Metal tags or aluminum, wraparound marker bands for cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms. 1. Legend: 1/4-inch - 3/8-inch steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend

corresponding to indicated circuit designations. 2. Tag Fasteners: Nylon cable ties. 3. Band Fasteners: Integral ears.

M. Apply identification to conductors as follows: 1. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers. 2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with

source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color-coding to identify circuits' voltage and phase.

3. Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent system of tags, color-coding, or cable marking tape.

N. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows: 1. Warnings, Cautions, and Instructions: Install to ensure safe operation and maintenance of

electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

2. Emergency Operation: Install engraved laminated signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.

O. Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high lettering on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Use white lettering on black field. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of equipment using mechanical fasteners: 1. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. 2. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. 3. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. 4. Electrical substations. 5. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.


6. Motor-control centers. 7. Disconnect switches. 8. Enclosed circuit breakers. 9. Motor starters. 10. Power transfer equipment. 11. Contactors. 12. Transformers. 13. Inverters. 14. Rectifiers. 15. Frequency converters. 16. Battery racks. 17. Power-generating units. 18. Telephone switching equipment. 19. Clock/program master equipment. 20. Call system master station. 21. TV/audio-monitoring master station. 22. Fire alarm master station or control panel. 23. Security-monitoring master station or control panel. 24. Provide single line of text with 1/4 inch high lettering on a 5/8 inch label (1 inch high

where two lines are required) on the following: a. Push-button stations. b. Remote-controlled switches. c. Dimmers. d. Control devices. e. Light switches.

25. Each switchboard, major control panel shall, in addition to individual compartment nameplates, have a 4" x 5" master engraved nameplate indicating equipment designation, voltage, phase, ampacity, Available Fault Current per the Utility, and year installed. Color coding shall be same as above.

26. Where more than one service exists in a building, a nameplate shall be installed at each service entrance equipment location denoting existence of the other service. Refer to NEC Article 230.


08/10/2018 [26 09 23] - 1 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

SECTION 26 09 23

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Time Clock. 2. Photoelectric switches. 3. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching controls. 4. Indoor occupancy sensors. 5. Outdoor motion sensors. 6. Lighting contactors. 7. Emergency shunt relays.

1.2 SUBMITTAL

A. Refer to and follow Submittal Section 26 00 15

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME CLOCK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Intermatic, Inc. 2. Paragon Time Controls 3. Emersion Network Power; ASCO Lighting Control 4. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.

B. Electronic Time Clock: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Contact Configuration: single pole, single throw (SPST) or as indicated on the drawings. 3. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac. Provide inductive load rated contact

where shown on drawings to control motor loads. 4. Programs: Minimum, two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set

points for each day of the week. 5. Automatic daylight savings time changeover. 6. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.


2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Intermatic, Inc. 2. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 3. Leviton 4. Sunrise Technologies

B. Description: Solid state, with dry contact rated for 1800-VA, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.


2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of the photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off.

3. Time Delay: Fifteen second minimum, to prevent false operation. 4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor. 5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or

stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.

2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc.; Greengate 2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Sensor Switch, Inc. 5. Watt Stopper.

B. Devices Types: Devices located in stairwells shall be ultrasonic type. All other locations shall be dual-technology (PIR and Ultrasonic) type, unless otherwise noted on drawings or in this specification.

C. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.


2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast/driver load at 120- and 277-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.


5. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 8. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of

the space and help eliminate false "off" switching. 9. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected

lighting level is present.

D. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.


2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 3. Switch Rating:

a. Line Voltage Units: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent or LED at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent or LED at 277 V.

b. Low Voltage Units: Suitable for use with relay-based lighting control system. Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack relay.

4. Onboard 0-10V dimming control (sinking) with integral rocker switch for adjusting light levels up/down.

E. General Requirements for Sensors: High-bay occupancy sensor, solid-state unit. The unit is designed to operate with the luminaires indicated.


2. Operation: Turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and to half-power when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights to half-power that is adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 16 minutes.

3. Continuous Lamp Monitoring: When lamps are dimmed continuously for 24 hours, automatically turn lamps on to full power for 15 minutes for every 24 hours of continuous dimming.

4. Operating Ambient Conditions: 32 to 149 deg F. 5. Mounting: Threaded pipe. 6. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 7. Detector Technology: PIR. 8. Detector Coverage: User selectable by interchangeable PIR lenses, suitable for mounting

heights from 12 to 50 feet. 9. Accessories: Obtain manufacturer's installation and maintenance kit with laser alignment

tool for sensor positioning and power port connectors.


2.4 LIGHTING CONTACTORS


1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. 2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP. 3. Eaton Corporation. 4. General Electric Company; 5. Square D. 6. Siemens

B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination-type lighting contactors complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served. 2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the

point of installation. 3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250, hinged enclosure with HOA switch installed in the

door. All control wiring shall be wired through the automatic control position.

2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 22 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.


3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

C. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and perform tests and inspections.


1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.


C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within twelve (12) months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two (2) visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.


2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations.

3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in Section 260943.13 "Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls" and Section 260943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls."

B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.


08/10/2018 [26 24 15] - 1 - DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

SECTION 26 24 15

DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Distribution Panelboards

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, accessory, and component indicated. Include

dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. a. Panelboard data sheets. b. Bus configuration and current ratings c. Enclosure type with details other than NEMA type 1 d. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including location of the

main, branches, and solid neutral. Tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings

e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

f. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

B. Informational Submittals 1. None required.


A. Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC to the installation, and construction of electrical panelboards and enclosures.

B. All Panelboards shall be UL listed and manufactured in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.

C. The Panelboard manufacturer shall also be the manufacturer of the circuit breakers and fusible switches and accessories included within the panelboard.

D. Provide panelboards with minimum AIC ratings as shown on schedules.

E. Provide UL listed service entrance rated Distribution Panelboard as shown on the drawings.

1.4 COORDINATION


A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction trades, including locations of conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Distribution Panelboards 1. Square D Co. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. General Electric Co. 4. Eaton Corp.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. ENCLOSURE 1. Enclosures shall be dead front panel with concealed self adjusting trim clamps, and gray-

baked enamel finish. Unpainted steel is not acceptable. 2. Enclosures shall have removable end walls with knockouts. 3. Enclosures shall have ample wire bending space to accommodate conductor sizes as

shown on the drawings. 4. Provide panelboard with NEMA 3R enclosure for wet locations. Enclosure shall have

welded endwalls and gasketed doors with keyed vault handle. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike, provide two (2) keys per lock.

B. INTERIOR 1. Bus material shall be plated copper. Bus bar plating shall run the entire length of the bus

bar. The bussing shall be fully rated allowing high ampacity switches to be mounted in any position throughout the interior.

2. Provide with continuous main and short circuit current ratings as shown on the drawings, 3. Provide 100% neutral bus and rated ground bus. Equipment ground bus shall be bonded

to enclosure. 4. Main lugs and solid neutral shall be mounted in the mains compartment. Branch mounted

main lug kits will not be acceptable. 5. Provide with 200% neutral bar and isolated ground bar as noted on the drawings. 6. Distribution panelboards used as service equipment shall be provided with single phase

protection. Overcurrent protection device shall open when the voltage on any one phase leg drops below 70%.

C. FUSIBLE SWITCHES 1. Switch operating mechanism shall be spring driven, with quick-make, quick-break action.

Operating handles shall be flange mounted and switch contact shall be knife-blade and jaw construction. Switch shall include visual verification of blade position.

2. Switches shall be secured to the bus with spring reinforced jaw assemblies. 3. Fusible switch units shall be equipped with all required mounting brackets and guides. 4. Switch shall have mechanical cover interlocks to prevent the opening of the cover when

the switch is in the ON position. The cover interlock shall also prevent the switch from


being turned ON with the cover open. Switch cover shall be lockable in the “OFF” position.

5. Switch shall have dual-color operating handle and an ON/OFF nameplate. The nameplate shall be readable regardless of the switch orientation. Each nameplate shall include an easily removable circuit directory card.

6. Switch fuse clips shall be Class R rejection type. Fusible switches shall have built-in fuse pullers to disengage the line side of fuse.

7. Switches sized 30 amp, 60 amp or 100 amp, shall be twin units. Where an odd number of switches of a given size are required, extra switch shall be labeled as spare.

8. Main switches shall be mounted at top of the bus. Backfed devices not permitted. 9. Refer to Section “Fuses” for additional requirements.

D. CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1. Circuit breaker(s) shall be arranged in a front accessible group mounted assembly only. 2. Main circuit breaker shall be mounted at top of the bus. Backfed devices not permitted. 3. All unused spaces provided, unless otherwise specified, shall be fully equipped for future

devices, including all appropriate connectors and mounting hardware. 4. Refer to Section “Circuit Breakers” for additional requirements

E. SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD) 1. Provide external SPD to panelboard as shown on the drawings. 2. Refer to Section “Surge Protective Devices” for additional requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and requirements of NEMA PB 1.1 and NEC 110.26 standards.

B. Securely install panelboards plumb, level and completely secured to building walls.

C. Install panelboard enclosure at a height such that highest disconnect handle does not exceed 6'-6" above finished floor.

D. Provide panelboard nameplates and safety labels on front cover.

E. Deliver keys and touch-up paint to Owner's Representative.

F. Inspect complete installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding.



A. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where values are not available, comply with torques specified in UL Standard 486A.

B. Clean interior and exterior of equipment and touch-up scratched finishes. Clear out all debris in enclosure before energizing.

C. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20% of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

3.4 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty for equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for one (1) year from date of initial operation or eighteen (18) months from date of delivery.


08/10/2018 [26 24 16] - 1 - PANELBOARDS

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, accessory, and component indicated. Include

dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. a. Panelboard data sheets. b. Bus configuration and current ratings c. Enclosure type with details other than NEMA type 1 d. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including location of the

main, branches, and solid neutral. Tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings

e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

f. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.



A. Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC to the installation, and construction of electrical panelboards and enclosures.

B. All Panelboards shall be UL listed and manufactured in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.

C. The Panelboard manufacturer shall also be the manufacturer of the circuit breakers and fusible switches and accessories included within the panelboard.

D. Provide panelboards with minimum AIC ratings as shown on schedules.

1.4 COORDINATION

08/10/2018 [26 24 16] - 2 - PANELBOARDS

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction trades, including locations of conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards 1. Square D Co. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. General Electric Co. 4. Eaton Corp.

2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS

A. ENCLOSURES 1. Enclosures shall be of galvanized steel construction. Unpainted steel is not acceptable,

surface or flush mounted as shown on the drawings. 2. Enclosures shall have removable end walls with knockouts. 3. Enclosures for panelboards shall be sized to provide code required gutters but to have

minimum width of 20 inches and a maximum depth of 5-3/4 inches. 4. Enclosures used for double tub panels shall be same in dimensions. 5. Enclosures shall have ample wire bending space to accommodate conductor sizes as

shown on the drawings. 6. Panelboards shall have flat front hinged door-n-door fronts with baked enamel finish in

ANSI gray color, concealed door hinges and trim screws located behind lockable door. Front cover shall have rounded corners and edges shall be free of burrs.

7. Front shall have flushed lock with catch and spring-loaded door pull. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike. Two (2) key shall be provided with each lock. A clear plastic directory cardholder shall be mounted on the inside of door.

B. INTERIOR 1. Bus bars shall be continuous plated copper. Each bus bar shall have sequentially phased

branch circuit connectors suitable for bolt-on branch circuit breakers. The bussing shall be fully rated. Panelboard bus current ratings shall be determined by heat-rise tests conducted in accordance with UL 67. Bus bar plating shall run the entire length of the bus bar.

2. Provide 100% rated split neutral bus with quantity of lugs for each available branch provided in panelboard.

3. Provide 200% rated neutral bus in panelboards for non-linear applications and where shown on the drawings and Schedules. Panelboards shall be marked for non-linear load applications.

4. Equipment ground bus shall be provided in each panelboard in addition to any neutral bus requirements. Bus to have the same number, size, and type of lugs as the neutral assembly. Ground bus to be factory bonded to panelboard tub.

5. All current-carrying parts shall be insulated from ground and phase-to-phase by high dielectric strength thermoplastic.

08/10/2018 [26 24 16] - 3 - PANELBOARDS

6. Provide thru-feed lugs for panelboards where shown on drawings or Schedules. 7. Interiors shall be field convertible for top or bottom incoming feed. 8. Interior trim shall be of dead-front construction to shield user from energized parts.

Dead-front trim shall have filler plates covering unused mounting spaces.

C. MAINS 1. Main circuit breaker shall be molded case, thermal magnetic trip, and bus connected.

Refer to Section “Circuit Breakers” for additional circuit breaker requirements. 2. Panelboards with main lugs only shall be suitable for solid or stranded copper or

aluminum conductors. Lugs shall be suitable for wire sizes as shown on drawings. Lug body shall be bolted in place.

D. BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1. Circuit breakers shall be provided with amperage ratings, interrupting ratings, and

number of poles as shown on the drawings and Schedules. 2. Molded case branch circuit breakers shall have bolt-on type bus connectors. 3. Refer to Section “Circuit Breakers” for additional circuit breaker requirements. 4. Circuit breakers shall thermal magnetic, trip-free, quick-make, quick-break contact action

type. Two- and three-pole circuit breakers shall have common tripping of all poles 5. There shall be visible trip indication. The breaker handle shall reside in a position

between ON and OFF in tripped condition. 6. Provide circuit breaker handle locks for all circuit breakers that supply exit and

emergency lighting, fire alarm equipment, and where indicated on plan or schedule. 7. Branch circuits shall be connected for sequenced phasing, i.e., circuits No. 1 and 2

connected to Phase A; circuits No. 3 and 4 connected to Phase B; etc. to conform with the branch circuit numbering system on the drawings. "Polarity" or "Block" phasing will not be acceptable.

8. Circuit breaker handle accessories shall provide provisions for locking handle in the ON or OFF position.

9. Branch circuit breakers serving lighting branches shall be “SWD” rated and serving HVAC equipment shall be "HACR" rated.

10. Provide arc fault interrupter, ground-fault interrupter or shunt trip type circuit breakers as shown on the drawings and Schedules.

E. SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD) 1. Provide external SPD to panelboard. Provide 3P breaker to serve SPD as recommended

by manufacture. 2. Refer to Section “Surge Protective Devices” for additional requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


08/10/2018 [26 24 16] - 4 - PANELBOARDS

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and requirements of NEMA PB 1.1 and NEC 110.26 standards.

B. Bond all metallic conduits entering or leaving panelboard to panelboard ground bus.

C. Securely install panelboards plumb, level and completely secured to building walls.

D. Install panelboard cabinets (box) at a height such that highest circuit breaker does not exceed 6'-6" above finished floor.

E. Panelboards mounted on outside walls shall be spaced 1/2-inch from wall with unistruts or washers to permit back ventilation.

F. Furnish directory frames inside the door of each panel which shall contain a correct as-built type-written directory card, properly filled out to correspond to the circuit numbers on the drawings, load descriptions, and the room numbers of loads served. If room numbers assigned by the Owner do not match the room numbers on the drawings, both sets of room numbers must be cross-referenced and identified in the panel directory.

G. All flush panelboards shall have a 3/4-inch spare conduit rising and turning out of the wall above the ceiling line for every three spares and spaces in the panelboard.

H. The exposed faceplates of all branch circuit breakers shall be flush with one another.

I. Clean interior and exterior of equipment and touch-up scratched finishes. Clear out all debris in enclosure before energizing.

J. Provide panelboard nameplates and safety labels on front cover.

K. Deliver keys and touch-up enamel to Owner's Representative.

L. Inspect complete installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding.

M. Provide spare breakers in available space. Nine 1P-20A and one 1P-30A.


A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20% of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

3.4 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty for equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for one (1) year from date of initial operation or eighteen (18) months from date of delivery.


08/10/2018 [26 27 16] - 1 - BOXES AND ENCLOSURES

SECTION 26 27 16

BOXES AND ENCLOSURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Outlet boxes 2. Junction boxes 3. Pull boxes 4. Enclosures 5. Cabinets

B. Outlet boxes shall be provided for devices, luminaires, motors and equipment connections, special systems and as otherwise required.

C. Outlet boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide free space for all conductors enclosed in the box. Boxes shall be not less than the minimum size required by NEC Article 314 for the number and size of conductors contained within.

D. Pull and junction boxes shall be provided in all raceway systems where required to avoid excessive bends to facilitate wire pulling and allow access to the wiring.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: 1. For shop fabricated junction and pullboxes, show accurately scaled views and spatial

relationships to adjacent equipment. Show box types, dimensions, and finishes.

B. Informational Submittals 1. Furnish manufacturer's product data, test reports, and material certifications.


A. Codes and Standards: Perform all work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing agencies having jurisdiction and in accordance with these plans and as specified herein. 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) Compliance. Comply with NEC as applicable to

construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. 2. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) Compliance. Comply with applicable requirements of

UL 50, UL 514 Series, and UL 886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide electrical boxes, fittings and enclosures which are UL listed and labeled.

3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Compliance. Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standard Publication Nos. OS1, OS2, and 250 pertaining to outlet and device boxes, covers, and box supports.


1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

A. Store cabinets, boxes and fittings in clean dry space; protect products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes 1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds 2. Hubbell 3. Appleton 4. OZ/Gedney 5. Pass and Seymour, Inc. 6. Thomas & Betts

B. Cabinets and Enclosures 1. Cooper B-Line 2. Hoffman 3. Thomas & Betts 4. Hammond Manufacturing

2.2 GENERAL

A. Electrical cabinets, boxes and fittings of indicated types, sizes, and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not indicated, provide units of types, sizes, and classes appropriate for the use and location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories required for the intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. Provide corrosion resistant box knockout closures to suit respective installation requirements and applications.

2.3 OUTLET BOXES

A. METALLIC OUTLET BOXES 1. Boxes shall be of type, shape, size, and depth to suit each location and application. 2. Steel Boxes: Boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded screw holes,

and accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps, cable clamps, exterior rings, and fixture studs.

3. Cast Aluminum Boxes: Copper free aluminum threaded raceway entries and features and accessories suitable for each location including mounting ears, threaded screw holes for devices, and closure plugs.

B. NONMETALLIC OUTLET BOXES 1. Boxes shall be molded PVC units of type, shape, size, and depth to suit location and

application. 2. Boxes shall be UV stabilized, nonconductive, high impact resistant boxes with integrally

molded raceway entrance hubs and removable mounting flanges. Boxes shall be equipped


with threaded screw holes for device and cover plate mounting. Each box shall have molded cover of matching polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material suitable for the application.

2.4 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Boxes shall have screwed or bolted-on covers of same material as box and shall be of size and shape to suit application. All boxes 6" x 6" or larger shall have hinged doors. All boxes used for distribution of emergency power shall be painted blue.

B. Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural steel bracing. Hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Cover shall be gasketed.

C. Cast Aluminum Boxes: Molded of copper free aluminum, with gasketed cover and integral threaded conduit entrances.

D. Cast Nonmetallic Boxes: UV stabilized, nonconductive, high impact resistant PVC boxes with gasketed cover and integral mounting flanges.

2.5 CABINETS/ENCLOSURES

A. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.

B. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

C. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards.

2.6 APPLICATIONS

A. Outlet Boxes and Fittings: Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of materials and NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with the following requirements: 1. Use galvanized flat rolled sheet steel boxes where shown concealed in finished areas with

framed construction. 2. Use standard 4” octagonal outlet box, 1-1/2 inch deep for lighting. 3. Use nonmetallic boxes in corrosive areas as designated on the plans. 4. Use masonry type box in masonry walls, 4” square with raised covers. 5. Use cast metal boxes in all other locations. Each box with associated covers and fittings

shall have a NEMA rating suitable for each location installed.

B. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with the following: 1. Use hot dipped galvanized steel boxes in finished areas with framed construction.


2. Use nonmetallic boxes in corrosive areas as designated on the plans. 3. Use cast metal boxes in all other locations. Each box with associated covers and fittings

shall have a NEMA rating suitable for each location installed.

C. Enclosures with Hinged Doors: Install enclosures and associated materials and NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA’s "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Install items where indicated and where required to suit code requirements and installation conditions. Cap unused knockout hole where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs so as to maintain the NEMA rating of the box. Install boxes in locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring. Fasten boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Do not install aluminum products in concrete.

C. Pull and Junction Boxes shall be located in utility areas or above accessible ceiling system wherever possible. Boxes located in other areas shall be brought to the attention of the A/E prior to installation.

D. Boxes not otherwise accessible in ceilings and walls shall be made accessible by providing an 18 inch x 18 inch or larger hinged door access panel. Access panels shall be approved by the A/E and furnished and installed by this Contractor.

E. Boxes shall not be installed back to back. Boxes installed on opposite walls within a stud cavity shall be spaced at least 6” apart.

F. Outlet boxes for luminaires shall be equipped with 3/8 inch fixture studs.

G. All outlet boxes shall be installed vertically plumb within 3 degrees.

H. Outlet and device boxes for flush mounted installation shall be a minimum of 4 inch square or octagonal and positioned accurately to allow for surface finish thickness. Outlet box shall not project beyond finished surface.

I. Junction boxes, pullboxes, and enclosures with hinged doors which are surface mounted shall utilize spacers to maintain 1/4 inch clearance from the wall.

J. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in difficult and secure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surfaces.

K. Outlet boxes installed on opposite sides of a fire rated wall shall have a minimum of 24" spacing between adjacent boxes.


L. All outlet boxes installed in interior stud walls shall use box brackets with far side supports.

M. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes.

N. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.

3.2 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect components, remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions, and weld marks. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.


08/10/2018 [26 27 26] - 1 - WIRING DEVICES

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Toggle switches 2. Receptacles 3. Occupancy sensors 4. Covers 5. Plates

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter

B. LED: Light Emitting Diode

C. PIR: Passive Infrared Red

D. N/O: Normally Opened

E. N/C: Normally Closed

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittal 1. Product data sheets for each type of wiring device, cover and plate.



A. Wiring devices shall be UL listed and comply with applicable NEMA standards.

B. Receptacles, switches, covers and plates shall be furnished by one of the manufacturers listed. No mixing of manufacturer's products shall be permitted unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08/10/2018 [26 27 26] - 2 - WIRING DEVICES

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Receptacles and plates 1. Hubbell/Bryant 2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand 3. Leviton 4. Cooper/Arrow Hart

B. Switches and plates 1. Hubbell/Bryant 2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand 3. Leviton 4. Cooper/Arrow Hart

C. Covers 1. Hubbell/Bryant 2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand 3. Leviton 4. Cooper/Arrow Hart

D. Timer Switch, Occupancy Sensors, Power Packs 1. Wattstopper 2. Lutron 3. Leviton 4. Hubbell 5. Schneider Electric

E. Low Voltage Switches 1. Wattstopper 2. Schneider Electric 3. Hubbell 4. Cooper/Greengate

2.2 SWITCHES

A. Toggle switches shall be Heavy Duty specification grade, AC quiet type, 20 ampere, 120-277 volt, back and side wired. Switches on emergency power shall have red handles.

B. Key type switches shall be 20 ampere, 120-277 volt, back and side wired Corbin lock type. Furnish two keys for each switch type. All locks to be keyed alike.

C. Pilot light switches shall be Heavy Duty specification grade, AC quiet type, 20 ampere, 120-277 volt, back and side wired with clear handle, light on with load on.

D. Momentary contact switches shall be 3-position, 2 circuit, center off, 20 ampere, 120-277 volt, side wired.

E. Devices and plates shall match in color unless specifically stated otherwise. Color of devices shall be of standard colors and selected by the architect.

08/10/2018 [26 27 26] - 3 - WIRING DEVICES

2.3 TIMER SWITCHES

A. Timer switch shall be a completely digital, programmable, self-contained control system with electroluminescent backlit LCD display, and five (5) year manufacturer’s warranty..

B. Switching mechanism shall be a latching air gap relay.

C. Time scroll feature shall allow manual overriding of the preset time-out period.

D. Timer switches shall have an option for a one second flash warning of the loads operated at five minutes before the timer runs out and twice when the countdown reaches one minute (when used to control lighting loads).

E. Time switch shall have a beep warning option that shall sound every five seconds once the time switch countdown reaches one minute.

F. Time-out period shall be adjustable in increments of 5 minutes from 5 minutes to 1 hour, and in increments of 15 minutes from 1 hour to 12 hours.

2.4 RECEPTACLES

A. All convenience and power receptacles shall be Heavy Duty Specification grade, grounding, tamper resistant type.

B. Convenience duplex receptacles shall be 20 ampere, 125 volt, back and side wired, 3 wire grounding, and NEMA 5-20R configuration.

C. GFCI duplex receptacles shall be 20 ampere, 125 volt, back and side wired, feed-through type, and NEMA 5-20R configuration. Feed through option shall not be used unless specifically noted to do so on the drawings for specific installation.

D. Tamper Resistant duplex receptacles shall be 20 ampere, 125 volt, back and side wired, NEMA 5-20R configuration, with UL listed safety shutter system that prevents insertion of foreign objects into receptacle.

E. Weather resistant Receptacle shall be UV, corrosion and impact resistant, with UL approved “WR” marking on face.

F. Clock hanger receptacle shall single receptacle, 15 ampere, 125 volt, on recessed thermoplastic wallplate with integral hook.

G. Devices and plates shall match in color unless specifically stated otherwise. Color of devices shall be of standard colors and selected by the architect, unless on emergency power, where receptacles shall be red.

H. Specialty receptacles shall be as specified on Drawings.

2.5 COMBINATION USB CHARGER TR RECEPTACLES

08/10/2018 [26 27 26] - 4 - WIRING DEVICES

A. Standard AC Duplex tamper resistant receptacle with two USB charging ports rated at 2.1 A, UL listed to UL 498 and UL 1310.

1. Basis-of-Design product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Cooper; TR7745 (15 A), TR7746 (20 A) or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Hubbell; USB15X2 (15A only).

2. Device shall have an LED indicator to notify a user that a device is connected to the USB port for charging.

3. Device shall have auto grounding feature. 4. Device shall have triple wipe blade contacts (Hot-Neutral) and double wipe ground

contacts to insure long-term blade retention. 5. Device shall have two AC outlets and two USB charging ports (2.1 A @ 5 V DC).

2.6 PLATES

A. Plates for flushed devices in interior partitions shall be: 1. Stainless steel for all installations in the high bay areas and utility non-public areas. 2. High impact Thermoplastic (non-image transfer) and matching device color in all non-

high bay area except as noted above.

B. Plates for flush devices on concrete block walls shall be “Jumbo" plates, matching other plates.

C. Plates for devices in surface mounted boxes shall be stainless steel surface type. Plate shall fit without overlap and have round corners.

D. Plates for specialty switches and outlets required for auxiliary systems shall be stainless steel and be supplied with the device.

E. Stainless steel plates shall be non-magnetic, satin, corrosion and finger print resistant and installed with matching stainless steel screws.

2.7 COVERS

A. Covers for devices in exterior damp or wet locations shall be UL listed “while-in-use” type, die cast metal, powder coated gray, NEMA 3R rating, gasketed, lockable, with mounting hardware and plate to match device type.

2.8 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Ceiling mounted occupancy sensors shall be low voltage 24 VDC, dual (PIR and ultrasonic) technologies, low profile with 360o coverage, LED indicator, auto and adjustable time delays (5-30 minutes), integral adjustable light sensor (10 – 300 fc), available manual on/off input, 1 isolated relay N/O and N/C output, coverage up to 1,000 sqft, white color, and five (5) year manufacturer’s warranty.

B. Wall mounted occupancy sensors shall be line voltage, multi-volt, PIR technology, 180o coverage, LED indicator, auto and adjustable time delays (5-30 minutes), adjustable sensitivity,

08/10/2018 [26 27 26] - 5 - WIRING DEVICES

auto or manual ON operation, coverage up to 1,000 sqft, white color, and five (5) year manufacturer’s warranty.

C. Power pack shall have a self-contained transformer, universal 120/277 input volts, 24VDC secondary output, dry contacts with 20 ampere load rating, LED indicator, plenum rated, field selectable auto / manual ON modes, and five (5) year manufacturer’s warranty.

D. Slave pack shall be similar to power packs except without transformer.

2.9 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHES (note to designer: specific LV switch with auto/manual-on power pack above to control bi-level lighting with occ sensors)

A. Low voltage switch shall be momentary, 24VDC, on/off operation, LED indicator, 3-wire, white color. Wattstopper DCC2 or equal by Hubbell, ILC or Cooper/Greengate.

2.10 APPLICATIONS

A. Unless noted otherwise, all 15 or 20 ampere, 125 volt receptacles shall comply with the following: 1. GFCI, when located in damp or wet locations. 2. GFCI, weather resistant type in damp or wet exterior locations. 3. GFCI type when located within 6’ of the outside edge of a sink 4. GFCI type when serving cord-and-plug connected vending machines or electric drinking

fountains. 5. GFCI type when located in a kitchen and serving areas.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with the manufacturer's written instructions and applicable requirements of NEC.

B. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, mount devices flush, with long dimension vertical.

D. Wiring devices shall be grounded per requirements of section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”

E. Mount receptacles with grounding terminal of receptacles on top.

F. All devices shall be ganged together where shown grouped on the Drawings.

G. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess building materials, dirt and debris.

08/10/2018 [26 27 26] - 6 - WIRING DEVICES

H. Installation of wiring devices and plates shall be performed only after paintwork is completed. Wiring devices may be installed prior to painting if protective plastic covers are used.

I. Grouped devices shall be installed in single multi-gang wall plates.

J. Install engraved flush switch plates at all locations indicated by note on the Drawings indicating function of switches for special applications.

K. Provide permanent barriers between switches ganged in outlet boxes where the voltage between adjacent switches exceeds 300 volts.

L. Switches located at doors adjacent to glass walls or windows shall be located on door frame, unless otherwise noted.

M. Unused outlet boxes shall be provided with blank plates.

N. Ceiling mounted occupancy sensors shall installed no less than 6’ of HVAC diffusers.

O. Occupancy sensor initial setting shall be maximum sensitivity and 15 minutes time delay.

P. Occupancy sensor power/slave packs shall be located above accessible ceiling adjacent to room entry.

Q. Provide #18 AWG stranded conductors for wiring between occupancy sensors and power/slave packs.


A. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.

B. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Occupancy sensors shall be provided with factory startup, test each sensor with HVAC system in operation.

D. Defective units shall be replaced, at Contractor’s cost with new and retested as described above.

3.3 SPARE PARTS AND ALLOWANCE

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Occupancy Sensors: Quantity of 5% of total (of each type) used, minimum of 2 for each

type. 2. Power packs: Quantity of 5% of total (of each type) used, minimum of 2 for each type.

B. Contractor shall include a bid allowance for furnishing and installing three (3) additional occupancy sensors of each type (with average length of conduit and wire) in the project as

08/10/2018 [26 27 26] - 7 - WIRING DEVICES

directed by A/E. If not completely used, provide credit for devices and labor of remainder back to Owner under a deduct change order.


08/10/2018 [26 28 03] - 1 - CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SECTION 26 28 03

CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMMRY

A. Thermal Magnetic Molded Case Circuit Breakers - Furnish as specified herein and where shown on the associated drawing. Provide all accessories as noted and as necessary.

B. Electronic Trip Molded Case Circuit Breakers - Furnish as specified herein and where shown on the associated drawing. Provide all accessories as noted and as necessary.

C. Furnish and install circuit breakers as specified herein and as shown on the drawings.

D. All circuit breakers furnished shall be by the same manufacturer.

E. Provide devices that are fully rated at the minimum short circuit ratings identified on the drawings. Use of series combinations of devices to meet these minimum ratings is not acceptable.

F. All circuit breakers referenced herein shall be designed and manufactured according to the latest version of the following standards: 1. NEMA AB 1 1993 - (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) Molded Case

Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches 2. UL 489 - (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit

Breaker Enclosures 3. UL 1053 – Ground Fault Standard for equipment protection 4. CSA C22.2 No. 5.1 - M91 - (Canadian Standard Association) Molded Case Circuit

Breakers 5. Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit

and Service 6. National Fire Protection Association NFPA - 70 (National Electrical Code)

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of circuit breaker, include dimensions and manufacturers'

technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings. 2. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information. If ratings of circuit breakers have been

adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of devices adjusted. a. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment

calculations are based.

B. Informational Submittals: 1. None required.


C. To be included in the Record and Information Manuals: 1. Final breaker settings, for any device that has adjustable settings. 2. One copy of each approved submittal 3. Manufacturer’s Certification 4. One copy of materials receipt and spare parts list


A. All fuses shall be UL listed and manufactured in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.

B. Items furnished under this specification section shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. All circuit breaker products furnished shall comply with NFPA 70.


A. Deliver circuit breakers and components in factory fabricated containers and wrappings designed to properly protect devices from damage.

B. Handle circuit breakers carefully to prevent physical damage. Do not install damaged devices. Remove damaged devices from the site and replace with new.

C. Store circuit breakers on site in original packaging and protect from weather and from damage from the work of this contractor and the work of other trades. Wherever possible, store indoors. Where necessary to store items outdoors, store above grade and enclose in watertight wrapping.


A. Where ambient conditions to which circuit breakers are directly exposed are less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturers ambient temperature adjustment factors to circuit breaker ratings.

B. Where the project site altitude is greater than 6600ft above sea level, apply manufacturers adjustment factors to circuit breaker ratings as recommended to maintain the ratings as shown on the drawings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Where circuit breakers supplied under this specification section protect equipment, coordinate circuit breaker size with nameplate data of protected equipment. Circuit breakers protecting equipment shall not exceed maximum circuit breaker size indicated on nameplate of equipment.

B. Coordinate lug sizes for breakers with wiring sizes as shown on drawings. Where needed, provide lug kits and/or increase the frame of circuit breaker as required to accommodate wire sizes as shown on the drawings.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Circuit Breakers:

a. Square D Co. b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. c. General Electric Co. d. Eaton Corp.

2.2 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General Circuit Breaker Characteristics 1. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass reinforced insulating material. Current

carrying components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area.

2. Circuit breakers shall have an over center, trip free, toggle operating mechanism which will provide quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit breaker shall have common tripping of all poles.

3. The circuit breaker handle shall reside in a tripped position between ON and OFF to provide local trip indication. Circuit breaker escutcheon shall be clearly marked ON and OFF in addition to providing International I/O markings.

4. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit breaker.

5. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with a push-to-trip button, located on the face of the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit breaker tripping mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes.

6. Circuit breakers shall be factory sealed with a hologram quality mark and shall have date code on face of circuit breaker.

7. Manufacturer shall provide electronic and hard copy time/current characteristic trip curves (and Ip & I²t let through curves for current limiting circuit breakers) for each type of circuit breaker.

8. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with factory installed UL Listed electrical accessories as noted on the drawing or they may be field-installable.

9. Circuit breaker handle accessories shall provide provisions for locking handle in the ON and OFF position.

10. All circuit breakers with permanent trip units shall be UL Listed for reverse connection without restrictive line and load markings and be suitable for mounting in any position.

11. All circuit breakers shall be capable of accepting bus connections.

B. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers 1. Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and

magnetic trip elements in each pole. 2. Thermal trip elements shall be factory preset and sealed. Circuit breakers shall be true

RMS sensing and thermally responsive to protect circuit conductor(s) in a 40° C ambient temperature.


3. Standard two- and three-pole circuit breakers up to 250 amperes at 600 VAC shall be UL Listed as HACR type.

C. Equipment Ground-Fault Protection (with Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers) 1. Circuit breakers noted on drawings shall be equipped with a Ground Fault Module

(GFM) with 20-200A sensitivity level or Earth Leakage Module (ELM) with sensitivity ranges between 30mA and 3A.

2. Ground fault sensing system shall be modified zero sequence (GFM) or zero sequence (ELM) sensing type.

3. The ground fault system shall require no external power to trip the circuit breaker. 4. Companion circuit breaker shall be equipped with a ground-fault shunt trip. 5. The ground fault sensing system shall be suitable for use on solidly grounded systems.

The ground fault sensing system shall be suitable for use on three-phase, three-wire circuits where the system neutral is grounded but not carried through the system or on three-phase, four-wire systems. ELM shall be suitable for use on three-phase, three wire circuits only.

6. Ground fault pickup current setting and time delay shall be field adjustable. A switch shall be provided for setting ground fault pickup point. A means to seal the pickup and delay adjustments shall be provided.

7. The ground fault sensing system shall include a ground fault memory circuit to sum the time increments of intermittent arcing ground faults above the pickup point.

8. A means of testing the ground fault system to meet the on-site testing requirements of NEC Section 230-95(c) shall be provided.

9. Local visual ground fault trip indication shall be provided. 10. The ground fault sensing system shall be provided with Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI)

communication capabilities compatible with other thermal magnetic circuit breakers equipped with ground fault sensing, electronic trip circuit breakers with integral ground fault sensing and external ground fault sensing systems as noted on drawings. ELM shall not be provided with ZSI capabilities.

11. The companion circuit breaker shall be capable of being group mounted. 12. The ground fault sensing system shall not affect interrupting rating of the companion

circuit breaker.

D. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers (Basis of Design – Square D STR Trip System) 1. The circuit breaker trip system shall be a microprocessor-based true rms sensing design.

Sensor ampere ratings shall be as indicated on the associated drawings. 2. The integral trip system shall be independent of any external power source and shall

contain no less than industrial grade electronic components 3. All trip units shall be removable to allow for field upgrades. 4. The trip unit functions shall consist of adjustable long-time pickup and adjustable delay,

short-time pickup and adjustable delay, optional ground-fault pickup and delay. 5. Adjustable rating plug shall allow for six long-time (Io) pickup settings from 0.5 to 1

times the sensor plug (In) and fine adjustment (Ir) with eight settings ranging from 0.8 to 1 times Io. Adjustable long-time delay shall be available in bands from 0.5 to 8 seconds at six times Ir.

6. Short-time pickup shall allow for seven settings a. From 2 to 9 times Ir.

7. Optional ground-fault settings shall be available to provide residual type ground fault protection. Ground fault pickup shall be in 8 settings from 0.2 to 1 times In. The adjustable delays shall be in 4 settings 0.1 to 0.4 I2t ON and 0.1 to 0.4 I2t OFF


8. All trip units shall have the capability for the adjustments to be set and read locally by a rotating switch.

9. Trip unit shall provide local trip indications 10. An ammeter (a digital display) shall be provided to indicate the current of the phase with

the greatest load. By pressing a scroll button, it shall also be possible to display successively the readings of the I1, I2, I3, and I Neutral. LEDs shall indicate the phase for which the current is displayed.

E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers (Basis of Design – Square D ET1.0 Trip System) 1. The circuit breaker trip system shall be a microprocessor-based true rms sensing design.

Sensor ampere ratings shall be as indicated on the associated drawings. 2. The integral trip system shall be independent of any external power source and shall

contain no less than industrial grade electronic components 3. Trip Unit shall not be field-replaced. 4. ET 1.0 Trip unit functions shall consist of adjustable instantaneous pick-up with no

intentional time delay. 5. The long time trip point setting shall be fixed and cannot be adjusted. 6. The Instantaneous settings on the trip unit shall allow 2 to 10 times the sensor rating (In).

The trip unit shall have the capability for the adjustment to be set and read locally by a rotating switch.

7. Ground-fault protection shall not be provided.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install circuit breakers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, the National Electrical Code and applicable local codes.

B. Service entrance breakers shall be adjustable electronic trip.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Circuit breaker pick-up level and time delay settings shall be adjusted to values indicated on the drawings.


08/10/2018 [26 28 13] 1 FUSES

SECTION 26 28 13

FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes cartridge fuses, rated 600V and below, for use in switches, panelboards, switchboards, controllers, motor control centers, and spare fuse cabinets.

B. Furnish and install fuses as specified herein and as shown on the drawings.

C. All fuses furnished by this contractor shall be by the same manufacturer.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittal 1. Product Data: Not Required.

B. Informational Submittal 1. Spare Parts List

a. Submit spare parts inventory indicating each type of fuse furnished on the project, quantity of each type to be installed, and the quantity of each type to be supplied as spare.

b. Submit product data on fuse storage cabinet. Submittal shall include data on the following features: 1) Physical dimensions 2) Locking features

C. To be included in the Operations and Maintenance Manuals: 1. One copy of each approved submittal 2. Manufacturer’s Certification 3. One copy of materials receipt and spare parts list


A. All fuses shall comply with UL 248 and NEMA FU1 standards.

B. Items furnished under this specification section shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

08/10/2018 [26 28 13] 2 FUSES

A. The fuse manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years experience in producing electrical distribution fuses.


A. Deliver fuses and components in factory fabricated containers and wrappings designed to properly protect devices from damage.

B. Handle fuses carefully to prevent physical damage. Do not install damaged devices. Remove damaged devices from the site and replace with new.

C. Store fuses on site in original packaging and protect from weather and from damage from the work of this contractor and the work of other trades. Wherever possible, store indoors. Where necessary to store items outdoors, store above grade and enclose in watertight wrapping.


A. Where ambient conditions, to which fuses are directly exposed, are less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturers ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Where fuses supplied under this specification section protect equipment, coordinate supplied fuse size with nameplate data of protected equipment. Fuse sizes shall not exceed maximum fuse size indicated on nameplate of equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fuses:

a. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. b. Littelfuse c. Mersen

2.2 CONSTUCTION AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fuses, Above 600 amps 1. Circuits shall be protected by current-limiting Time-Delay Fuses KRP-C-(amp)SP, or

100% equal from listed approved manufacturers, as listed on the drawings. 2. Fuses shall employ “O” rings as positive seals between the end bells and the glass

melamine fuse barrel. 3. Fuse links shall be pure silver (99.9% pure).

08/10/2018 [26 28 13] 3 FUSES

4. Fuses shall be time-delay and shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds, clear 20 times rated current in .01 seconds or less, with an interrupting rating of 300,000 amperes RMS symmetrical, and be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

5. Peak let-through currents and I2t let-through energies shall not exceed the values established by UL for Class L fuses.

B. Fuses, Below 600 amps 1. Circuits shall be protected by current-limiting Dual-Element, Time-Delay Fuses LPN-

RK-(amp)SP/LPS-RK-(amp)SP, LPJ-(amp)SP or LP-CC-(amp), or 100% equal from listed approved manufacturers, as listed on the drawings.

2. All fuses shall have separate overload and short-circuit elements. Fuses shall incorporate a spring activated thermal overload element that has a 284 degrees Fahrenheit melting point alloy.

3. The fuses shall have time-delay capabilities in accordance with UL standards for Class RK1, J, or CC fuses and an interrupting rating of 300,000 amperes (200,000 for Class CC) RMS symmetrical, listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

4. Peak let-through currents and I2t let-through energies shall not exceed the values established by UL for Class RK1 or J fuses.

5. For 480V systems provide 600V rated fuses. 6. For 208/120V and 240V systems provide 250V fuses.

2.3 FUSES FOR CONTROL APPLICATIONS

A. Control circuit fuses shall be 600V, Class CC, current limiting, time-delay – minimum 12 seconds at 200% rated amps, 200,000A minimum interrupting rating. Bussmann KTK-R series.

B. Where fuseholders are not furnished with equipment, provide dead-front finger-safe type fuseholders. Fuseholders shall indicate fuse status via a neon or LED type indicator on the front of the fuseholder. Bussmann CHCC Series.

2.4 FUSES FOR MOTOR CIRCUITS

A. All individual motor circuits shall be protected by Dual-Element, Time-Delay Fuses LPN-RK(amp)SP/LPS-RK(amp)SP, LPJ(amp)SP), KRP-C(amp)SP, or LP-CC-(amp), or 100% equal from listed approved manufacturers, as indicated on the drawings.

B. The fuses shall be applied for all motors protected by properly sized overload relays: 1. LPN-RK-(amp)SP/LPS-RK-(amp)SP fuses shall be installed in ratings of 130%, or 150%

for LPJ-(amp)SP fuses, of motor full-load current (or next size larger if this does not correspond to a fuse size), except where high ambient temperatures prevail, or where the motor drives a heavy revolving part which cannot be brought up to full speed quickly, such as large fans. Under such conditions the fuses may be sized at 175% of the motor full-load current, or the next standard size larger if 175% does not correspond to a standard fuse size.

2. KRP-C-(amp)SP fuses shall be installed in ratings of 175% of motor full-load current (or next size larger if this does not correspond to a fuse size), except where high ambient temperatures prevail, or where the motor drives a heavy revolving part which cannot be

08/10/2018 [26 28 13] 4 FUSES

brought up to full speed quickly, such as large fans. Under such conditions the fuses may be sized be sized up to 300% (or next size smaller).

3. LP-CC-(amp)SP fuses shall be installed in ratings of 200% of motor full-load current (or next size larger if this does not correspond to a fuse size), except where high ambient temperatures prevail, or where the motor drives a heavy revolving part which cannot be brought up to full speed quickly, such as large fans. Under such conditions the fuses may be sized up to 400% (or next size smaller).

4. Fuses shall be tested and have documentation verifying compliance of Type 2 protection requirements for motor starters per UL508E or IEC 60947-4 for motor controllers.

2.5 FUSES FOR SWITCHBOARDS, PANELBOARDS, DISCONNECT SWITCHES, BUSWAY/BUS PLUGS

A. Fuses shall be Dual-Element, Time-Delay Fuses LPN-RK(amp)SP/LPS-RK(amp)SP, LPJ(amp)SP, or KRP-C(amp)SP, or 100% equal from listed approved manufacturers, as shown on the drawings. Size fuses in accordance with NEC requirements based upon load supplied.

B. Series rated combinations are not acceptable.

2.6 FUSES FOR LUMINAIRES

A. Fluorescent and LED luminaires shall be protected by GLR or GMF Fuses in HLR Holders, or 100% equal from listed approved manufacturers. These luminaires shall have individual protection on the line side of the ballast. A fuse and holder shall be mounted within, or as part of, the luminaire. Size and type of fuse to be recommended by the luminaire manufacturer.

B. All other ballast-controlled luminaires shall be protected by KTK or FNQ Fuses in HEB HEX, HEY, HPF, or HPS Holders, or 100% equal from listed approved manufacturers. These luminaires shall have individual protection on the line side of the ballast. Fuse and holder shall be mounted in a location convenient for changing fuses. Holder shall be mounted in protected location or be an in-line waterproof holder (HEB, HEX, or HEY). Size and type of fuse to be recommended by the luminaire manufacturer or as indicated on plans.

2.7 FUSE REDUCERS

A. Provide 600V or 250V fuse reducer from same manufacturer as required.

2.8 SPARE FUSE CABINET

A. Spare fuse cabinet shall be of heavy gauge steel construction with baked enamel ANSI gray finish. Door with locking handle and 2 keys, internal shelf, minimum dimensions shall be 30”H x 24”W x 12”D or as needed to contain the spare fuse inventory plus 15% spare capacity.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

08/10/2018 [26 28 13] 5 FUSES

A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Ensure fuses to be installed for all utilization equipment are comprised of the characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

B. Examine elements and surfaces to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in all fusible devices, in accordance manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with the NEC, and NEMA Standards.

B. Install fuses in holders with fuse size label facing out.

C. Spare fuse cabinet shall be installed in main electrical room. Provide inventory list of spare fuses provided (include sizes, types and quantities) attached on inside cover of cabinet door.


A. Verify installation of proper fuse types and ratings in fusible devices prior to energizing equipment.

3.4 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide components as follows: 1. Above 600 Amps: 3 fuses per current rating 2. 600 Amps and below: 10% of total installed fuses (minimum 3) per voltage, current

rating and UL Class 3. Fuse pullers for each size of fuse furnished.


08/10/2018 [26 28 16] 1 SAFETY SWITCHES

SECTION 26 28 16

SAFETY SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section include fused and non-fussed disconnect switches.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittal 1. General: Furnish samples, manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials

certifications as required. 2. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1

specification sections: a. Product data for each type of product specified.



A. Codes and Standards: Perform all work associated with circuit and motor disconnects in compliance with applicable requirements of governing agencies having jurisdiction and in accordance with these plans and as specified herein. 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) Compliance. Comply with NEC requirements pertaining

to construction and installation of electrical circuit and motor disconnect devices. 2. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Compliance. Comply with requirements of UL 98

"Enclosed and Dead Front Switches." Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches which have been UL listed and labeled.

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Compliance. Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standards Pub No. KS 1 "Enclosed Switches" and 250 "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)."


A. Deliver circuit and motor disconnect switches properly packaged in factory fabricated type containers or wrappings, which properly protect devices from damage.

B. Store circuit and motor disconnect switches in original packaging and protect from weather and construction traffic. Wherever possible, store indoors, where necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with watertight wrapping.

C. Handle circuit and motor disconnect switches carefully to prevent physical damage. Do not install damaged disconnect switches, remove from site and replace damaged devices with new.

08/10/2018 [26 28 16] 2 SAFETY SWITCHES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide circuit and motor disconnects of one of the following (for each type of switch): 1. Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse 2. GE 3. Siemens 4. Square D Company

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Heavy-duty enclosed switches, fusible or non-fused, weatherproof or non-weatherproof, as indicated on the drawings.

B. Switch assemblies shall be quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle to be lockable in OFF position and fuse clips to be for Class R fuses.

C. Enclosures to be NEMA 1 for indoor type, NEMA 3R for outdoor type.

D. Safety switches to be horsepower rated 600 volt horsepower rated.

E. Fuses: Provide fuses for safety switches, as noted on plans and as described in Section 16475, Overcurrent Protection Devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA) "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

B. Coordinate circuit and motor disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work, as necessary for proper interface.

C. Install disconnect switches for use with motor driven equipment, motors and controllers within sight of the motor position unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide suitable means for mounting disconnect switches. Where disconnect switches cannot be mounted to rigid structures, furnish and install fabricated galvanized steel 2-inch angle floor stand for mounting.

3.2 GROUNDING

08/10/2018 [26 28 16] 3 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Provide equipment grounding connections, tightened to assure a permanent and effective ground, for electrical disconnect switches where indicated.


A. Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at project site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units and retest.


08/10/2018 [26 28 26] - 1 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

SECTION 26 28 26 TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL



B. Specification Section 26 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following: 1. Automatic transfer switches

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified. 1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, switch, power

sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems”, and per IBC 2009 seismic standards. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on

actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term “withstand” means “the unit will remain in place without

separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified”.



D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Certification of compliance with the Buy American Act.


F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 “Operation and Maintenance Data”, include the following: 1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration

instructions, including software, where applicable.


A. Comply with the Buy American Act (41 U.S.C. 10).

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

C. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

G. Comply with NFPA 99.

H. Comply with NFPA 110.

I. UL 891 Suitable for use as service entrance equipment.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and form work requirements are specified in Section 033000 “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.


A. Interruption of existing electrical service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service. 1. Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of

electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner’s written

permission.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following 1. ASCO/Emerson Network Power 2. Ruselectric

B. Basis of design is ASCO 7000 Series transfer switch. Any alternate shall be submitted for approval to the consulting engineer at least 10 days prior to bid, and shall be submitted with a list of any deviations from this specification.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008. 1. The combination of the rating of the transfer switch and circuit breaker trip unit

feeding the switch shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location. This series or specific breaker rating of the switch shall be acceptable for protection against instantaneous bolted type faults.

2. The automatic transfer switch shall be provided with a time based fault rating of 0.025 seconds for switches 230 amps and less and 0.05 seconds for switches 260 amps and larger. The amperage of this rating shall be larger than the amount of fault current available to the transfer switch and shall be verified by the coordination study.

3. Automatic transfer switches rated 800 amps and larger shall be provided with a minimum short time rating of 36kA for a period of no less than 0.5 seconds.

4. Any automatic transfer switch that is fed by a breaker having a short time rating shall also have a short time rating to meet the criteria of UL1008 7th edition. No exceptions shall be taken from this requirement.

C. Microprocessor Controller: The controller’s sensing and logic shall be provided by a single built-in microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and the ability to communicate serially through an optional serial communication module. 1. A single controller shall provide twelve selectable nominal voltages for

maximum application flexibility and minimal spare part requirements. Voltage sensing shall be true RMS type and shall be accurate to 1% of nominal voltage. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to 0.2%. The panel shall be capable of operating over a temperature range of -20 to +60 degrees C and storage from -55 to +85 degrees C.

2. The controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the controller to be disconnected from the transfer switch for routine maintenance.


Sensing and control logic shall be provided on multi-layer printed circuit boards. Interfacing relays shall be industrial grade plug-in type with dust covers. The panel shall be enclosed with a protective cover and be mounted separately from the transfer switch unit for safety and ease of maintenance. The protective cover shall include a built-in pocket for storage of the operator’s manuals.

3. All customer connections that interface with the control shall be wired to a common terminal block to simplify field-wiring connections.

4. Data Logging – The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 99 events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a non-volatile memory: a. Event Logging b. Data and time and reason for transfer normal to emergency. c. Data and time and reason for transfer emergency to normal. d. Data and time and reason for engine start. e. Data and time engine stopped. f. Data and time emergency source available. g. Data and time emergency source not available.

5. statistical Data a. Total number of transfers. b. Total number of transfers due to source failure. c. Total number of days controller is energized. d. Total number of hours both normal and emergency sources are available.

6. Self -Diagnostics - The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the

purpose of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide information on the status input signals to the controller which may be preventing load transfer commands from being completed.

7. The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) as follows: a. EN 55011:1991 Emission standard - Group 1, Class A b. EN 50082-2:1995 Generic immunity standard, from which: c. EN 61000-4-2:1995 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) immunity d. ENV 50140:1993 Radiated Electro-Magnetic field immunity e. EN 61000-4-4:1995 Electrical fast transient (EFT) immunity f. EN 61000-4-5:1995 Surge transient immunity

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a non-fused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer to full-rated current between active power sources. 1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or

insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.


2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching.

Conventional automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts. Transfer switches using tin plated contacts are not acceptable.

G. Neutral Terminal: Switched and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated. Transfer switches shall be 4 pole unless specifically noted or scheduled otherwise.

H. Oversize Neutral: Where indicated on the drawings, Ampacity and switch rating of neutral path through units indicated for oversize neutral shall be double the nominal rating of circuit in which switch is installed.

I. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or annunciator and control panels shall have communication capability matched with remote device.

J. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Section 260553 “Identification for Electrical Systems.” 1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring

indicated. 2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or

bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated. 3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

K. Enclosures: General-purpose Type 1 enclosure, unless otherwise indicated on plans.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Controller(s) Display and Keypad: A four line, 20 character LCD display and keypad shall be an integral part of the controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters. Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and limited control through the serial communications input port. The following parameters shall only be adjustable via DIP switches on the controller:

1. Nominal line voltage and frequency 2. Single or three phase sensing. 3. Operating parameter protection.

D. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded for maintenance purposes only.


E. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator or annunciator and control panel. Capable of Modbus communication (Ethernet and RS-485).

F. All transfer switches shall be closed transition. Include the following functions and characteristics for automatic closed transition transfer switches: 1. Fully automatic make before break. 2. Load transfer without interruption, through momentary interconnection of both

power sources not exceeding 100ms. 3. Initiation of No-Interruption Transfer: Controlled by in-phase monitor and

sensors confirming both sources are present and acceptable. a. Initiation occurs without active control of generator. b. Controls ensure that closed-transition load transfer closure occurs only

when the 2 sources are within plus or minus 5 electrical degrees maximum, and plus or minus 5 percent maximum voltage difference.

4. Failure of power sources serving load initiates automatic break-before-make transfer.

5. The transfer switch controls shall also be provided with a “Failure Recovery” circuit, designed to prevent the Normal and Emergency contacts from remaining closed at the same time for more than 100 milliseconds during closed transition mode. During the process of transferring between sources, if one of the two single-solenoid operators fails to open its main contact, the ATS control panel will recognize the condition and send a signal to re-open the last operator that successfully closed. Following the Failure Recovery operation, the “Extended Parallel” light will be illuminated and the ATS controls will be locked out. The Failure Recovery Circuit will be operational whether the controls are transferring in both directions. As a second level of protection, the ATS controls are provided with (2) sets of Form-C contacts that can be used to shunt trip one of the two source breakers to actively separate the utility and generator sources, in the event that “Failure Recovery” was not successful. In addition, a programmable “Extended Overlap Timer” shall be provided with a factory time delay setting of 0.5 seconds, to allow the internal automatic controls to clear the parallel condition prior to signaling the remote breaker to trip.”

G. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage.

H. Terminal provisions for a remote contact which opens to signal, the transfer witch to transfer to emergency and for remote contacts which open to inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal. Both of these inhibit signals can be activated through the keypad or serial port.

I. System LCD controller/display shall include the following features: 1. System status screen which shall be readily accessible from any point in the

menu by depressing the “ESC” key a maximum of two times. This screen shall


display a clear description of the active operating sequence and switch position. For example: a. Normal Failed b. Load on Normal c. TD Normal to Emergency (X min X seconds)

Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or display “coded” system status messages, which must be explained by references in an operators manual, are not acceptable. 2. Self Diagnostics: The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the purpose

of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide information on the status input signals to the controller which may be preventing load transfer commends from being complete.

3. Data Logging: The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 99 events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in non-volatile memory: a. Event Logging b. Data and time and reason for transfer normal to emergency c. Data and time and reason for transfer emergency to normal d. Data and time and reason for engine start e. Data and time engine stopped f. Data and time emergency source available. g. Data and time emergency source not available.

4. Statistical Data: a. Total number of transfers. b. Total number of transfers due to sources failure. c. Total number of days controller is energized d. Total number of hours both normal and emergency sources are available.

J. One set of double pole, double throw contacts that operate when normal source voltage is available and one set of double pole, double throw contacts that operate when emergency source voltage is available.

K. Include the following for digital power monitoring: 1. Furnish Power Meters at locations shown to monitor all functions specified

below. 2. The Power Meters shall be listed to UL 3111-1, CSA, CE Mark, and industrially

rated for an operating temperature range of -20C to 60C. 3. The Power Meter shall be accurate to 1% measured, 2% computed values and

display resolution to .1%. Voltage and current for all phases shall be sampled simultaneously to assure high accuracy in conditions of low power factor or large waveform distortions (harmonics).

4. The Power Meter shall be capable of operating without modification at nominal frequencies of 45 to 66 Hz and over a control power input range of 20 – 32VDC.

5. Each Power Meter shall be capable of interfacing with an optional communications module to permit information to be sent to central location for display, analysis, and logging.


6. The Power Meter shall accept inputs from industry standard instrument trans-formers (120 VAC secondary PTs and 5A secondary CTs.) Direct phase voltage connections, 600 VAC and under, shall be possible without the use of PTs.

7. The Power Meter shall be applied in single, 3-phase, or three & four wire circuits. A fourth CT input shall be provided to measure neutral current.

8. All setup parameters required by the Power Meter shall be stored in non-volatile memory and retained in the event of a control power interruption.

9. The meter shall record, store and display locally via the meter screen, the maximum power demands on the switch. The recorded power demands shall be stored for the following time periods: Last 15 min, last 60 min, last 24hrs, last 30 days, last 12 months, and shall be provided with a comparison screen that shows the comparison of monthly load demand for this year, listed monthly to last year listed monthly. These stored values are vitally important and allow the facility to plan for load increases on the emergency system without additional metering services. Meters that do not allow for historical load demands to be stored and reviewed from the ATS are not acceptable.

10. The following metered readings shall be communicated by the Power Meter, via serial communication, when equipped with optional serial communications module: a. Current, per phase RMS and neutral b. Current Unbalance % c. Voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral d. Voltage Unbalance % e. Real power (KW), per phase and 3-phase total f. Apparent power (KVA), per phase and 3-phase total g. Reactive power (KVAR), per phase and 3-phase total h. Power factor, 3-phase total & per phase i. Frequency j. Accumulated Energy, (MWH, MVAH, and MVARH)

11. The following energy readings shall be communicated by the Power Meter: a. Current, per phase RMS and neutral (if applicable) b. Current Unbalance % c. Voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral d. Voltage Unbalance % e. Real power (KW), per phase and 3-phase total f. Apparent power (KVA), per phase and 3-phase total g. Reactive power (KVAR), per phase and 3-phase total h. Power factor, 3-phase total & per phase i. Frequency j. Accumulated Energy, (MWH, MVAH, and MVARH)

12. The following energy readings shall be communicated by the Power Meter: a. Accumulated real energy KWH b. Accumulated reactive energy KVAH c. Accumulated apparent energy KVARH

13. The Power Meter shall flush mounted to the front of the switch enclosure. a. The Power Meters shall be equipped with a continuous duty, long-life, 4

line x 20 character LCD backlit display to provide local access to the following metered quantities:


b. Current, per phase RMS and neutral (if applicable) c. Current Unbalance % d. Voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral e. Voltage Unbalance % f. Real power, per phase and 3-phase total g. Apparent power, per phase and 3-phase total h. Reactive power, per phase and 3-phase total i. Power factor, 3-phase total & per phase j. Frequency k. Accumulated Energy, (MWH, MVAH, and MVARH) l. Displaying each of the Power Meter quantities shall be accomplished

through the use of menu scroll buttons. m. For ease in operator viewing, the display shall remain on continuously,

with no detrimental effect on the life of the Power Meter. n. Setup for system requirements shall be allowed from the front of the

Power Meter. Setup provisions shall include: 1) CT rating (xxxxx:5) 2) PT rating (xxxxxxx:120) (if applicable; 24000V maximum) 3) System type (single; three phase; 3 and 4 wire) 4) Communication parameters

o. Reset of the following electrical parameters shall also be allowed from the front of the Power Meter: 1) Real energy (MWH), apparent energy (MVAH) and reactive

energy (MVARH) p. All reset and setup functions shall have a means for protection against

unauthorized/accidental changes.

L. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources (as noted below) shall be continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout and trip setting capabilities (values shown as % of nominal unless otherwise specified):

Parameter Sources Dropout / Trip Pickup / Reset Undervoltage N&E,3 Phase 70 to 98% 85 to 100% Overvoltage N&E,3 Phase 102 to 115% 2% below trip Underfrequency N&E 85 to 98% 90 to 100% Overfrequency N&E 102 to 110% 2% below trip Voltage unbalance N&E 5 to 20% 1% below dropout

a. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within ± 0.5% over an

operating temperature range of -20 degree C to 60 degree C. b. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments

either locally with the display and keypad or remotely via serial communications port access.

c. The controller shall be capable (when activated by the keypad or through the serial port) of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and


emergency sources. The source shall be considered unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or CBA).

d. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to pro-vide digital readout of voltage on all 3 phases, frequency, and phase rotation.

e. The controller shall include a user selectable algorithm to prevent repeated transfer cycling to a source on an installation which experiences primary side, single phase failures on a Grounded Wye – Grounded Wye transformer which regenerates voltage when unloaded. The algorithm shall also inhibit retransfer to the normal (utility) source upon detection of a single phasing condition until a dedicated timer expires, the alternate source fails, or the normal source fails completely and is restored during this time delay period. The time delays associated with this feature shall be adjustable by the user through the controller keypad and LCD.

2. 3. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay

transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.

4. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

5. The controller shall include a user selectable algorithm to prevent repeated transfer cycling to a source on an installation which experiences primary side, single phase failures on a transformer which regenerates voltage when unloaded. The algorithm shall also inhibit retransfer to the normal (utility) sources upon detection of a single phasing condition until a dedicated timer expires, the alternate source fails, or the normal source fails completely and is restored during this time delay period. The time delays associated with this feature shall be adjustable by the user through the controller keypad and LCD.

6. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Two time delay modes (which are independently adjustable) shall be provided on re-transfer to normal. One time delay shall be for actual normal power failures and the other for the normal monthly test mode function. The time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable.

7. All time delays shall be adjustable by using the LCD display and keypad or with a remote device connected to the serial communications port. Adjusting time delays shall not require a factory technician to change.

8. Test Switch: A three position momentary-type test switch shall be provided for the test / automatic / reset modes. The test position will simulate a normal source failure. The reset position shall bypass the time delays on either transfer to emergency or retransfer to normal.

9. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 10. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch

normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits. a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved

“Normal Source Available.”


b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved “Emergency Source Available.”

11. All standard and optional door-mounted switches and pilot lights shall be 16-mm industrial grade type 12 or equivalent for easy viewing & replacement. Door controls shall be provided on a separate removable plate. a.

12. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

13. The controller shall be capable of accepting a normally open contact that will allow the transfer switch to function in a non-automatic mode using an external control device

14. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 5 A at 30-V dc minimum.

15. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

16. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 30-day exercise cycle, 20-minut running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. The control panel shall allow up to seven different testing routines to be programmed into the controller. Exerciser features include the following: a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with

and without load transfer. b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings. c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is

not available.

M. ATS SS shall include the following functions and characteristics for bypass / isolation switches: 1. Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110. 2. Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power

directly to load, isolating the transfer switch from load and from both power sources. Include the following features for each combined automatic transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch: a. Means to lock bypass/isolation switch in the position that isolates

transfer switch with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of transfer switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks prevent transfer-switch operation, except for testing or maintenance.

b. Draw-out Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provide physical separation from live parts and accessibility for testing and maintenance operations.

c. Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and Short-Circuit Withstand Ratings: Equal to or greater than those of associated automatic transfer switch, and with same phase arrangement and number of poles.

d. Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches shall not exceed those of automatic transfer-switch contacts when they are carrying rated load.


e. Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer-switch isolation can be performed by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less. Separate bypass and isolation handles shall be utilized to provide clear distinction between the functions. Handles shall be permanently affixed and operable without opening the enclosure door. Designs requiring insertion of loose operating handles or opening of the enclosure door to operate are not acceptable.

f. Bypass operation to the load-carrying source shall be accomplished with no interruption of power to the load (make before break contacts). Designs which disconnect the load when bypassing are not acceptable and will not be allowed.

g. When the isolation switch is in the "Test" or "Open" mode, the bypass switch shall function as a manual transfer switch.

h. Designs requiring operation of key interlocks for bypass isolation or ATSs which cannot be completely withdrawn when isolated are not acceptable.

i. Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs shall describe operating instructions.

j. Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components from front without removing other parts or main power conductors.

3. Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches: Factory-installed silver-plated copper bus bars; plated at connection points and braced for the indicated available short-circuit current. The only field installed power connections shall be at the service and load terminals of the bypass-isolation switch. All control inter-wiring between the removable automatic contactor and bypass isolation switch shall be provided with automatic disconnect plugs, that when isolating the switch, become disconnected without operator intervention. Designs that use standard type plugs that require an operator to manually separate disconnect plugs when removing the automatic contactor are not acceptable.

N. ATS EQ, the service entrance transfer switch as shown on the plans shall be furnished in a multi-section switchboard as follows: 1. A service equipment section containing the service (utility) disconnect circuit

breaker, with instantaneous, long delay, short delay, and ground fault trip functions.

2. A second non-service section containing the power transfer switch and controls as required by the rest of the specification.

3. Grounding and bonding provisions. 4. Pressure disconnect links for normal, emergency, and load neutrals. 5. Listed as a UL891 service entrance device.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay


settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS1.

2.5 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM

A. Functional Description: Remote annunciator panels shall annunciate conditions for indicated transfer switches. Annunciation shall include the following: 1. Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transfer

switch controls. 2. Switch position. 3. Switch in test mode. 4. Failure of communication link.

B. Annunciator Panel: LED-lamp type with audible signal and silencing switch: 1. Indicating Lights: Grouped for each transfer switch monitored. 2. Label each group, indicating transfer switch it monitors, location of switch, and

identity of load it serves. 3. Label each group, indicating transfer switch it monitors, location of switch, and

identity of load it serves. 4. Mounting: flush. 5. Lamp Test: Push to test or lamp test switch on front panel. 6. Key operator with lockout function. 7. The Annunciator shall be wall mounted either surface or recessed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according to seismic-restraint details. See Section 260548 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems”.

B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting. 1. Concrete Bases: 6 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base

no more than 6 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases according to Section 260529 “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems”.

C. Identify components according to Section 260553 “Identification for Electrical Systems”.

D. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by


manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 “Grounding and Bonding for electrical Systems”.

C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”.


A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. 1. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer’s specified minimum resistance. a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and

integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches

and of emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal

source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of

control settings. e. Test transfer-switch operations. f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values

exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool down and shutdown.

6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources. a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.


7. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches

and of emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal

source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of

control settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic

transfer-switch operations. f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values

exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct time of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shut down.

B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or

to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide Calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that described scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Section 017900 “Demonstration and Training”.

Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.

PART 4 EXECUTION

4.1 WITHSTAND AND CLOSE ON RATINGS


A. The transfer switch shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS symmetrical short circuit current at the transfer switch terminals with the type of overcurrent protection as shown as calculated.

B. Any transfer switch shown on the plans rated 800 amps and above shall be rated to withstand fault currents for durations of up to 18 cycles.


08/10/2018 [26 32 13] - 1 - ENGINE GENERATORS

SECTION 26 32 13

ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. Emergency Standby Power (ESP): Per ISO 8528: The maximum power available during a variable electrical power sequence, under the stated operating conditions, for which a generating set is capable of delivering in the event of a utility power outage or under test conditions for up to 200 hours of operation per year with the maintenance intervals and procedures being carried out as prescribed by the manufacturers. The permissible average power output (Ppp) over 24 hours of operation shall not exceed 70 percent of the ESP unless otherwise agreed by the RIC engine manufacturer.

B. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.


A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following: 1. Thermal damage curve for generator. 2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device. 3. Sound test data, based on a free field requirement.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other

components specified. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Control interconnection, Customer connections.

C. Certifications: 1. Submit statement of compliance which states the proposed product(s) is certified to the

emissions standards required by the location for EPA, stationary non-emergency application.


A. Source quality-control test reports. 1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. See requirements in Part 2 "Source

Quality Control" Article Part A. Include statement indicating torsional compatibility of components.

2. Certified Test Report: Provide certified test report documenting factory test per the requirements of this specification, as well as certified factory test of generator set sensors per NFPA110 level 1.

3. List of factory tests to be performed on units to be shipped for this Project.


4. Report of exhaust emissions and compliance statement certifying compliance with applicable regulations.

B. Warranty: 1. Submit manufacturer’s warranty statement to be provided for this Project.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer within local representation in Indianapolis, IN or within 50 miles of the project site with a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Comply with NFPA 37 (Standard For the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines).

E. Comply with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance to Article 700, 701, and 702).

F. Comply with NFPA 110 (Emergency and Standby Power Systems) requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.

G. Comply with UL 2200.


A. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 1. Ambient Temperature: 0.0 deg C (32.0 deg F) to 48.89 deg C (120.0 deg F). 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 900.0 feet (274.32 m).

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Base Warranty: Manufacturer shall provide base warranty coverage on the material and workmanship of the generator set for a minimum of twenty-four (24) months for Standby product from registered commissioning and start-up.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


A. Manufacturers: The basis for this specification is Kohler equipment, approved equals may be considered if equipment performance is shown to meet the requirements herein. Approved manufacturers include: 1. Caterpillar 2. Cummins 3. Generac

2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments. 1. Rigging Information: Indicate location of each lifting attachment, generator-set center of

gravity, and total package weight in submittal drawings.

C. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Power Output Ratings: See one-line diagram. 80 percent lagging power factor, Parallel

Wye Configuration, Three phase, 4-wire, 60 hertz. 2. Alternator shall be capable of recovering to a minimum of 90% of rated no load voltage

following the application of specified kVA load at near zero power factor applied to the generator set.

3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of component. The engine-generator nameplate shall include information of the power output rating of the equipment.

D. Generator-Set Performance: 1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1.0 percent of rated output voltage from no

load to full load. 2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 100 percent step-

load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 5 seconds. On application of a 100% load step the generator set shall recover to stable voltage within 10 seconds.

3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

5. Transient Frequency Performance: Not more than 15 percent variation for 100 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 5 seconds. On application of a 100% load step the generator set shall recover to stable frequency within 10 seconds.

6. Output Waveform: At full load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for any single harmonic. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50.

7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 8 seconds without damage to generator system components. For a 1-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall regulate both voltage and current to prevent over-voltage conditions on the non-faulted phases.

8. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1, Type 10, system requirements. 9. Ambient Condition Performance: Engine generator shall be designed to allow operation

at full rated load in an ambient temperature under site conditions, based on highest ambient condition. Ambient temperature shall be as measured at the air inlet to the


engine generator for enclosed units, and at the control of the engine generator for machines installed in equipment rooms.

2.3 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Diesel

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800RPM.

C. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid: 1. Lube oil pump: shall be positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure pump. 2. Filter and Strainer: Provided by the engine manufacturer of record to provide adequate

filtration for the prime mover to be used. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable

container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

D. Engine Fuel System: The engine fuel system shall be installed in strict compliance to the engine manufacturer’s instructions

E. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity and performance. 1. Designed for operation on a single 120 VAC, Single phase, 60Hz power connection.

Heater voltage shall be shown on the project drawings. 2. Installed with isolation valves to isolate the heater for replacement of the element without

draining the engine cooling system or significant coolant loss. 3. Provided with a 24VDC thermostat, installed at the engine thermostat housing

F. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing. The governing system dynamic capabilities shall be controlled as a function of engine coolant temperature to provide fast, stable operation at varying engine operating temperature conditions. The control system shall actively control the fuel rate as appropriate to the state of the engine generator. Fuel rate shall be regulated as a function of starting, accelerating to start disconnect speed, accelerating to rated speed, and operating in various isochronous states.

G. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled 1. The generator set manufacturer shall provide prototype test data for the specific

hardware proposed demonstrating that the machine will operate at rated standby load in an outdoor ambient condition of 40 deg C.

2. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

3. Size of Radiator overflow tank: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition.

4. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.

5. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

6. Duct Flange: Generator sets installed indoors shall be provided with a flexible radiator duct adapter flange.


H. Muffler/Silencer: Selected with performance as required to meet sound requirements of the application, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements. For generator sets with outdoor enclosures the silencer shall be inside the enclosure.

I. Air-Intake Filter: Engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and restriction indicator.

J. Starting System: 12 or 24V, as recommended by the engine manufacturer; electric, with negative ground. 1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with

ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. 2. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for level 1 systems. 3. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length as

required. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 4. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish. 5. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage

regulation. The battery charging alternator shall have sufficient capacity to recharge the batteries with all parasitic loads connected within 4 hours after a normal engine starting sequence.

6. Battery Chargers: Unit shall comply with UL 1236, provide fully regulated, constant voltage, current limited, battery charger for each battery bank. It will include the following features: a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate based on generator set manufacturer’s

recommendations shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 20 deg C to plus 40 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel.

e. Provide LED indication of general charger condition, including charging, faults, and modes. Provide a LCD display to indicate charge rate and battery voltage. Charger shall provide relay contacts for fault conditions as required by NFPA110.

f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.

K. Load Center: Generator shall come with a factory mounted load center, 60amp MCB (min), 120/208V single phase, with output breakers to feed all accessories. All accessories shall be factory wired from the load center.

L. Lights: Each access door shall be LED light controlled by a local switch. Lights shall be rated for wet location and produce a minimum of 1,000 lumens.

M. Convenience Outlet: Provide with a factory mounted 120v, 20 amp, weather resistant, GFCI outlet.

2.4 CONTROL AND MONITORING


A. Engine generator control shall be microprocessor based and provide automatic starting, monitoring, protection and control functions for the unit utilizing a Kohler APM402 controller.

B. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. (Switches with different configurations but equal functions are acceptable.) When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of the local (generator set-mounted) and/or remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

C. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of the local (generator set-mounted) and/or remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

D. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, system controls, engine gages and associated equipment shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration. AC output power circuit breakers and other output power equipment shall not be mounted in the control enclosure.

E. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, and the following: 1. AC voltmeter (3-phase, line to line and line to neutral values). 2. AC ammeter (3-phases). 3. AC frequency meter. 4. AC kVA output (total and for each phase). Display shall indicate power flow direction. 5. Ammeter-voltmeter displays shall simultaneously display conditions for all three phases. 6. Emergency Stop Switch: Switch shall be a red “mushroom head” pushbutton device

complete with lock-out/tag-out provisions. Depressing switch shall cause the generator set to immediately stop the generator set and prevent it from operating.

7. Fault Reset Switch: Supply a dedicated control switch to reset/clear fault conditions. 8. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 9. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 10. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 11. Running-time meter. 12. Generator-voltage and frequency digital raise/lower switches. Rheostats for these

functions are not acceptable. The control shall adjustment of these parameters in a range of plus or minus 5% of the voltage and frequency operating set point (not nominal voltage and frequency values.)

13. AC Protective Equipment: The control system shall include over/under voltage, over current, short circuit, loss of voltage reference, and over excitation shut down protection. There shall be an overload warning, and overcurrent warning alarm.

14. Status LED indicating lamps to indicate remote start signal present at the control, existing alarm condition, not in auto, and generator set running.

15. A graphical display panel with appropriate navigation devices shall be provided to view all information noted above, as well as all engine status and alarm/shutdown conditions (including those from an integrated engine emission control system). The display shall also include integrated provisions for adjustment of the gain and stability settings for the governing and voltage regulation systems.


16. Panel lighting system to allow viewing and operation of the control when the generator room or enclosure is not lighted.

17. DC control Power Monitoring: The control system shall continuously monitor DC power supply to the control, and annunciate low or high voltage conditions. It shall also provide an alarm indicating imminent failure of the battery bank based on degraded voltage recover on loading (engine cranking).

F. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel. 1. Overcrank shutdown. 2. Coolant low-temperature alarm.

1. Control switch not in auto position.

2. Battery-charger malfunction alarm.

3. Battery low-voltage alarm.

G. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 110. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition.

2.5 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Overcurrent Protection: The generator set shall be provided with a UL Listed/CSA Certified protective device that is coordinated with the alternator provided to prevent damage to the generator set on any possible overload or overcurrent condition external to the machine. The protective device shall be listed as a utility grade protective device under UL category NRGU. The control system shall be subject to UL follow-up service at the manufacturing location to verify that the protective system is fully operational as manufactured. Protector shall perform the following functions: 1. Initiates a generator kW overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload

equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms.

2. Under single phase or multiple phase fault conditions, or on overload conditions, indicates an alarm conditions when the current flow is in excess of 110% of rated current for more than 10 seconds.

3. Under single phase or multiple phase fault conditions, operates to switch off alternator excitation at the appropriate time to prevent damage to the alternator.

4. The operator panel shall indicate the nature of the fault condition as either a short circuit or an overload.

5. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot greater than 120% of nominal voltage.

6. The protective system provided shall not include an instantaneous trip function. 7. The generator shall be provided with a factory installed, 100% rated line circuit breaker

that is UL489 listed and sized for the rated ampacity of the loads served by the breaker per the NEC.

2.6 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.


B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H

D. Temperature Rise: 120 / Class H environment.

E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, over speed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

F. Enclosure: Drip-proof.

G. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified. The voltage regulation system shall be microprocessor-controlled, 3-phase true RMS sensing, full wave rectified, and provide a pulse-width modulated signal to the exciter. No exceptions or deviations to these requirements will be permitted.

H. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

I. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent maximum, based on the rating of the engine generator set.

2.7 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Level 1, Weather Steel housing. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Instruments, control, and battery system shall be mounted within enclosure.

B. Construction: 1. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen to permit air circulation when engine is not running

while excluding birds and rodents. 2. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions. Restraint/Hold back hardware to prevent door

to keep door open at 180 degrees during maintenance. Rain lips over all doors. 3. Exhaust System: 4. Muffler Location: Within enclosure. 5. Hardware: All hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel. 6. Mounting Base: Suitable for mounting on sub-base fuel tank or housekeeping pad. 7. A weather protective enclosure shall be provided which allows the generator set to

operate at full rated load with a static pressure drop equal to or less than 0.5 inches of water.

8. Inlet ducts shall include rain hoods

C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Housing shall provide ample airflow for engine generator operation at rated load in an ambient temperature of 40 deg C.

D. Sound Performance: Reduce the sound level of the engine generator while operating at full rated load to a maximum of 82 dBA measured at any location 7 m from the engine generator in a free field environment.

E. Site Provisions: 1. Lifting: Complete assembly of engine generator, enclosure shall be designed to be lifted

into place as a single unit, using spreader bars.

2.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES


A. Vibration Isolation: Generators installed on grade shall be provided with elastomeric isolator pads integral to the generator, unless the engine manufacturer requires use of spring isolation.

2.9 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Powder-coated and baked over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. Manufacturer’s standard color or as directed on the drawings.


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. 1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters. In addition, the equipment

engine, skid, cooling system, and alternator shall have been subjected to actual prototype tests to validate the capability of the design under the abnormal conditions noted in NFPA110. Calculations and testing on similar equipment which are allowed under NFPA110 are not sufficient to meet this requirement.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests: 1. Test engine generator set manufactured for this Project to demonstrate compatibility and

functionality. 2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Simulated safety shutdowns. 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by

Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation, application, and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Equipment shall be installed by the contractor in accordance with final submittals and contract documents. Installation shall comply with applicable state and local codes as required by the authority having jurisdiction. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and instructions included in the listing or labeling of UL listed products.

C. Installation of equipment shall include furnishing and installing all interconnecting wiring between all major equipment provided for the on-site power system. The contractor shall also perform interconnecting wiring between equipment sections (when required), under the supervision of the equipment supplier.


D. Equipment shall be installed on concrete housekeeping pads. Equipment shall be permanently fastened to the pad in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and seismic requirements of the site.

E. Equipment shall be initially started and operated by representatives of the manufacturer. All protective settings shall be adjusted as instructed by the consulting engineer.

F. All equipment shall be physically inspected for damage. Scratches and other installation damage shall be repaired prior to final system testing. Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dirt and construction debris prior to initial operation and final testing of the system.

G. On completion of the installation by the electrical contractor, the generator set supplier shall conduct a site evaluation to verify that the equipment is installed per manufacturer’s recommended practice.

3.2 ON-SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. The complete installation shall be tested to verify compliance with the performance requirements of this specification following completion of all site work. Testing shall be conducted by representatives of the manufacturer, with required fuel supplied by Contractor. The Engineer shall be notified in advance and shall have the option to witness the tests. The generator set manufacturer shall provide a site test specification covering the entire system. Tests shall include:

B. Prior to start of active testing, all field connections for wiring, power conductors, and bus bar connections shall be checked for proper tightening torque.

C. Installation acceptance tests to be conducted on site shall include a "cold start" test, a two hour full load (resistive) test, and a one-step rated load pickup test in accordance with NFPA 110. Provide a resistive load bank and make temporary connections for full load test, if necessary.

D. Perform a power failure test on the entire installed system. This test shall be conducted by opening the power supply from the utility service, and observing proper operation of the system for at least 2 hours. Coordinate timing and obtain approval for start of test with site personnel.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

3.4 SERVICE AND SUPPORT

A. The generator set supplier shall maintain service parts inventory for the entire power system at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The inventory shall have a commercial value of $3 million or more. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain a central parts inventory to support the supplier, covering all the major components of the power system, including engines, alternators, control systems, paralleling electronics, and power transfer equipment.

B. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical power


system replacement parts in the local service location. Service vehicles shall be stocked with critical replacement parts. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The service organization shall be physically located in Indianapolis or within 50 miles of the site.

C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each generator set provided for at least 20 years.

END OF SECTION

08/10/2018 [26 43 00] - 1 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

SECTION 26 43 00

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for Surge Protective Devices, for the protection of AC electrical circuits.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. SPD – Surge Protective Device

B. SCCR – Short Circuit Current Rating

C. MCOV – Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage

D. In – Nominal Discharge Current

E. Mode(s), also Modes of Protection – The pair of electrical conductors required to be surge protected.

F. MOV – Metal Oxide Varistor

G. OCPD – Overcurrent protective device

H. VPR – Voltage Protection Rating.

1.3 LISTING REQUIREMENTS

A. SPD shall bear the UL Mark and shall be listed to most recent editions of UL 1449 and UL 1283. “Manufactured in accordance with” is not equivalent to UL listing and does not meet the intent of this specification.

B. SPD and performance parameters shall be posted at www.UL.com under Category Code: VZCA. Products or parameters without posting at UL.com shall not be approved. (To access UL Category Code VZCA click on Certifications on the upper right of UL’s home page. Type VZCA into the Category Code search box and click Search.)

1.4 SUBMITTALS


Product Data: For each type of product.


1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

2. Submittals shall include UL 1449 Listing documentation verifying:

a. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)b. Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) all modesc. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage rating (MCOV)d. I-nominal rating (I-n)e. Type 1 or Type 2 Device Listing

3. Submittals shall include shop drawings including the manufacturer installation instruc-tion manual and line drawings detailing dimensions and weight of enclosure, internal wiring diagram illustrating all modes of protection in each type of SPD required, wiring diagram showing all field connections and manufacturer’s recommended wire and breaker sizes.


A. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.

B. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of ten (10) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.

C. The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. SPDs: 1. Advanced Protection Technologies (APT) 2. Thor Systems, Inc. 3. Square D Co. 4. Siemens 5. General Electric Co. 6. Eaton Corp.

2.2 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. SPD shall be UL listed with 200kA SCCR and 20kA In.

B. SPDs shall consist of an engineered system to achieve suppression using one or more of the following components: 1. Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varisters (TPMOV). 2. Suppression components shall be heavy duty ‘large block’ MOVs, minimum 30mm

diameter.


C. SPD shall include a serviceable, replaceable module or modules (excluding Distribution and Branch panelboard locations).

D. SPD shall provide surge current paths for all 10 modes of protection: L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G for Wye systems; L-L, L-G in Delta and impedance grounded Wye systems.

E. SPD used with Service Entrance equipment shall be UL 1449 listed Type 1 (intended for use without external overcurrent protective devices. Every suppression component of every mode, shall be protected by internal overcurrent devices.)

F. SPD used with Distribution and Branch panelboards shall be UL 1449 listed Type 1 (see above) or Type 2 (external overcurrent protective devices allowed)

G. SPD shall consist of parallel connections only and shall not require disconnection of power to customer equipment for testing and/or maintenance.

H. Minimum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase shall be: 1. Service Entrance or Transfer Switch: 300kA (150kA per mode) 2. Distribution and Branch Panelboards: 100kA (50kA per mode)

I. UL 1449 Listed Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) shall not exceed the following:

VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G208Y/120V 700V 700V 700V480Y/277V 1200V 1200V 1200V

J. UL 1449 Listed Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) for L-N, L-G, and N-G modes of protection (verifiable at UL.com):

System Voltage Allowable System Voltage

Fluctuation (%)MCOV

208Y/120 25% 150V 480Y/277V 20% 320V

K. SPD shall be provided with high frequency noise filtering of up to -50 dB attenuation, at frequencies of 10 kHz to 100 Mhz.

L. SPD shall have Form C summary output contacts for remote monitoring capability.

M. Service Entrance SPD shall be provided with LCD surge event counter with backup power source.

N. SPD shall include visual LED diagnostics with electrically isolated diagnostic circuitry. Diagnostics shall including a minimum of one green LED indicator per phase, and one red service LED, phase loss monitoring, audible alarm with on/off silence function and diagnostic test function.

O. No scheduled parts replacement or preventive maintenance shall be required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


A. Externally mounted SPDs shall be installed close to the equipment to be protected with twisted leads in lengths as short (less than 24”) and routed as straight as possible. Contractor shall exercise care when twisting conductors together.

B. If a dedicated breaker for the SPD is not provided in the switchboard, the service entrance SPD shall include an integral UL Recognized disconnect switch. A dedicated breaker shall serve as a means of disconnect for distribution SPD’s.

C. Type 1 Service Entrance SPD shall be installed on the line or load side of the main service disconnect.

D. At Service Entrance or Transfer Switch, a UL approved disconnect switch shall be provided as a means of servicing disconnect if a 60A breaker is not available.

E. At Distribution and branch panels, SPD shall have an independent means of servicing disconnect such that the protected panel remains energized. A 30A breaker (or larger) may serve this function.

F. Copper conductors used shall be sized per manufacturer's recommendations with a minimum size of #10 AWG.

G. Before energizing, installer shall verify service and separately derived system Neutral to Ground bonding jumpers per NEC.


A. Upon completion of installation, the unit shall undergo complete testing to verify operation. A built-in high voltage test circuit with meter indication of steady state voltage and dielectric integrity or the suppression elements shall be provided for all equipment. Testing shall not interfere with normal power to load.

3.3 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING

A. Remove debris from SPD and wipe dust and dirt from all components.

B. Repaint marred and scratched surfaces with touch up paint to match original finish.

C. Check tightness of all accessible mechanical and electrical connections to assure they are torqued to the minimum acceptable manufacture’s recommendations.

D. Check all installed panels for proper grounding, fastening, and alignment.

3.4 WARRANTY

A. Provide a ten (10) year manufacturer’s warranty.


08/10/2018 [26 51 19] - 1 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 26 51 19

LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for LED luminaires indicated in the Luminaire Schedule on the drawings.

B. Luminaire supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.



1. Refer to and follow Submittals Section 26 00 15 2. Arrange in order of luminaire designation 3. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 4. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 5. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 6. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 7. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests IES LM-79 and IES

LM-80.

a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

8. LED driver or power supply product data sheets for each luminaire.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Where specifically indicated on plans, include photometric PxP drawings for areas where

alternate fixtures are supplied.

C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal.

2. Certificate of Material Receipt.



1. Drivers: TEN percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Diffusers and Lenses: ONE percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one

of each type. 3. Globes and Guards: ONE percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of

each type.



A. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

B. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires.

C. Mockups: For interior luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections.

1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires in mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: FIVE year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant.

The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event."

A. Provide Luminaires as scheduled on the Drawings.

B. Provide luminaires with integral thermal protection.

C. LED luminaire shall be modular in design with the ability to replace individual components (LED Modules, drivers, etc.) without having to replace the entire luminaire.

D. All LED luminaire shall have a minimum CRI of 80.

E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise per the luminaire schedule, all LED lamp CCT shall be 3500K.


F. LED/LED Module and driver shall be rated for a minimum of 50,000 hours of life at 80% output (LM-80).

G. For each type Luminaire, the LED/LED Module shall originate from a common manufactured batch source.

H. All LED/LED Module shall adhere to LED package manufacturer guidelines, certification programs, and test procedures for thermal management.

I. Driver shall be FCC Part 15 compliant, UL 8750.

J. Driver shall meet ANSI C62.41 category A surge protection standards up to 4kV.

K. All LED drivers shall have a power factor greater than 0.90.

L. Emergency LED battery pack shall be integral mounted, ninety (90) minute capacity, sealed maintenance free nickel cadmium battery and integral charger, operate at rated lumen output of fixture or next highest lumen output available providing no less than 50% of the standard lumen output, and have remote mountable charging indicator light and test switch. LED drivers shall feature a self-diagnostic circuit that automatically tests unit and reports failure with an audible and visual alarm.

M. Ambient Temperature: Indoor Luminaires, 41 to 104 deg F.; Outdoor Luminaires, 5 to 104 deg F.

1. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent.

2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS


B. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating. c. CCT and CRI.

C. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.

D. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.

E. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

F. California Title 24 compliant.


2.3 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.4 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch minimum diameter steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 14 AWG. Min.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation.


3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.


D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Flush-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around

circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Where recommended by luminaire manufacturer, attach to structural members in walls. Otherwise mount fixture to back box.

2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

G. Suspended Luminaires:

1. Ceiling Mount: a. Provide quantity of stems or adjustable aircraft cable to support suspended fixtures

as described in the luminaire schedule and manufactures installation instructions.

2. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 3. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

4. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use stems, rod, or aircraft cable support as indicated in luminaire schedule, for suspension of each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. Maximum span shall not exceed 12’.

5. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four

locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. 3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid in a

minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. 4. Support with aircraft cable or similar wire from building structure from a minimum of

TWO locations, independent of the ceiling system.

I. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.


3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.


3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260943.16 "Addressable-Luminaire Lighting Controls."

B. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls."

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within TWELVE months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to TWO visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.

1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are defective.

2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.


Owen County EMS

08/10/2018 [26 52 13] - 1 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

SECTION 26 52 13 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Emergency lighting units. 2. Exit signs. 3. Luminaire supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS



C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with internal or external emergency battery powered supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.

D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting support.

1. Refer to and Follow Submittals Section 26 00 15 2. Include data on features, accessories and finishes 3. Include physical description of the unit and dimensions. 4. Battery and charger for light units. 5. Include life, output of luminaire (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 6. Include photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying

with IES LM-45, for each luminaire type. a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's

laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Product Schedule:

1. For all luminaires and exit signs; use same designations indicated on Drawings.

Owen County EMS



A. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




4. Provide seismic qualification certificate for each piece of equipment.

B. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.



1. Lamps: TEN percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Luminaire-mounted, emergency battery pack: FIVE percent emergency lighting units.

Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Diffusers and Lenses: ONE percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one

of each type. 4. Globes and Guards: ONE percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of

each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

C. Mockups: For interior luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections.

1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires and signs in mockups before starting installations.

Owen County EMS


2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


1.8 WARRANTY


1. Warranty Period: TWO year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Power Unit Batteries: FIVE years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for the entire warranty period.

2. Warranty Period for Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: FIVE years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for the entire warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event."

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING


B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to comply with UL 924.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.

Owen County EMS


E. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within luminaire body.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one lamp or an equivalent number of LED’s continuously at an output of no less than 50% of total lumen output upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire.

2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

3. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Indoor Luminaires, 41 to 104 deg F.; Outdoor Luminaires,

5 to 104 deg F. b. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140

deg F. c. Humidity: More than 95 percent (condensing).

4. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire or entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

5. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 6. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay. 7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

F. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more lamps, remote mounted from luminaire.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one lamp or an equivalent number of LED’s continuously at an output of no less than 50% of total lumen output upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire.

2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. 5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure listed for installation inside, on top of, or remote

from luminaire. Remote assembly shall be located no less than half the distance recommended by the emergency power unit manufacturer, whichever is less.

Owen County EMS


6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

8. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

9. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units.

B. Emergency Luminaires: 1. Emergency Luminaires: Drawing designation as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule on

Drawings, with the following additional features: a. Rated for installation in damp locations, and for sealed and gasketed luminaires in

wet locations. Indoor and outdoor applications as shown on plans. b. UL 94 flame rating.

C. Emergency Lighting Unit: 1. Emergency Lighting Unit: as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule on Drawings. 2. Operating at nominal voltage matching lighting system. 3. Wall, ceiling, or stem mounted with universal junction box adaptor. 4. UV stable thermoplastic housing. 5. Two LED lamp heads. 6. Internal emergency power unit.

D. Remote Emergency Lighting Units: 1. Emergency Lighting Unit: as indicated on Drawings. 2. Operating at nominal voltage matching lighting system. 3. Wall, ceiling, or stem mounted with universal junction box adaptor. 4. UV stable thermoplastic housing, provide wet location listing where shown outdoors. 5. LED lamp heads. 6. External emergency power unit.

2.4 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Operating at nominal voltage as shown on plans. 2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

Owen County EMS


a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs. Provide additional battery capacity for power connection to remote units where shown.

C. Self-Luminous Signs: 1. Powered by tritium gas, with universal bracket for flush-ceiling, wall, or end mounting.

Signs shall be guaranteed by manufacturer to maintain the minimum brightness requirements in UL 924 for 20 years.

2. Use strontium oxide aluminate compound to store ambient light and release the stored energy when the light is removed. Include universal bracket for flush-ceiling, wall, or end mounting.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

2.6 METAL FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS


B. Support Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of luminaires.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation.


Owen County EMS


3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire and emergency power unit weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit. 3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of

ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Where recommended by luminaire manufacturer, attach to structural members in walls.

Otherwise mount fixture to back box. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

F. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

G. Ceiling Grid Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure emergency power unit using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations,

spaced near corners of emergency power unit. 3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and

building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION




Owen County EMS


1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.


3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service: 1. Charge batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour discharge test.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjustments: Within 12months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site visit to do the following:

1. Inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps, batteries or luminaires that are defective.

a. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

2. Conduct short-duration tests on all emergency lighting.


08/10/2018 [26 56 19] - 1 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 26 56 19

LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for LED luminaires indicated in the Luminaire Schedule on the drawings.

B. Luminaire supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS



C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.



1. Refer to and follow Submittals Section 26 00 15. 2. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 3. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 4. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 5. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 6. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 7. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests IES LM-79 and IES

LM-80.

a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

8. LED driver or power supply product data sheets for each luminaire.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Where specifically indicated on plans, include photometric PxP drawings for areas where

alternate fixtures are supplied.

C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




C. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal.

2. Certificate of Material Receipt.



1. Drivers: TEN percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Diffusers and Lenses: ONE percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one

of each type.


3. Globes and Guards: ONE percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.


A. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

B. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires.

C. Mockups: For exterior luminaires, complete with power and control connections.

1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires in mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


1.8 WARRANTY


B. Warranty Period: FIVE year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant.

1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event."

2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Luminaire Schedule on drawings for Luminaire types and construction requirements.



C. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.

D. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location.

F. LED lamps and driver shall have a rated life of minimum 50,000 hours.

G. LED driver shall meet ANSI C62.41 Category. A surge protection standard up to 4 kV.

H. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 4000K unless otherwise noted.

I. Ambient Temperature: LED Luminaire shall be rated from 5 deg F to +104 deg F.

J. In-line Fusing: Separate in-line fuse for each luminaire.

K. LED Lamp Module Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use.

L. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer.

M. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of luminaire from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from causing false turnoff.

1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with ANSI C136.10. 2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.

2.4 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Provide types as indicated in Luminaire Schedule and as indicated on drawings.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

B. Metal Components: As indicated in Luminaire Schedule. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.


C. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

B. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

C. Finish Color: Unless otherwise noted, color shall be selected by the architect. Provide color chip samples or selection sheet with shop drawings.

2.7 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire electrical conduit to verify actual locations of conduit connections before luminaire installation.




B. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Fasten luminaire to structural support.

D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.


3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Where recommended by luminaire manufacturer, attach to structural members in walls. Otherwise mount fixture to back box.

F. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.

G. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.

H. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.

I. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" and Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring connections and wiring methods.

3.3 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION:

A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.

1. Install on concrete base. Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTED LUMINAIRES

A. Aim as indicated on Drawings.

B. Refer to details on drawings for mounting orientation and requirements.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION



A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.




2. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IES testing guide(s):

a. IES LM-5. b. IES LM-50. c. IES LM-52. d. IES LM-64. e. IES LM-72.


D. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train, Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaires and any photocell relays.

B. All training shall be video recorded in format as requested by owner and on media as preferred by owner. All video recordings shall be performed by the presenter. Recording shall be approved by the owner and engineer prior to being accepted. If found to not be satisfactorily done by either reviewer, the recording shall be redone until approved. Re-recordings shall be scheduled for the next business day if the owner / owner’s rep is available that day.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within the warranty period, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to TWO visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.

1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace LED module, driver or luminaires that are defective.

2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.


08/10/2018 [28 05 13] - 1 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 28 05 13

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. UTP cabling. 2. RS-232 cabling. 3. RS-485 cabling. 4. Low-voltage control cabling. 5. Control-circuit conductors. 6. Fire alarm wire and cable. 7. Identification products.




A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Source quality-control reports.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.


A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.


1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP cable and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.


2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry."

2.3 UTP CABLE


1. ADC. 2. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 5. CommScope, Inc. 6. Draka Cableteq USA. 7. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 8. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 9. Superior Essex Inc. 10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 11. 3M; Communication Markets Division.

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.


1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666. d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX. e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG. f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.

2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE


1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation. 4. Belden Inc. 5. Dynacom Inc. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Premise Wiring. 7. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 8. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 9. Panduit Corp. 10. Siemon.

B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

2.5 RS-232 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. Polypropylene insulation. 3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain

wire. 6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.


1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. Plastic insulation. 3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. 4. Plastic jacket. 5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain

wire. 6. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

2.6 RS-485 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

2.7 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.

1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) and No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) and No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.


2.8 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway.

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF, complying with UL 83.

2.9 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE


1. Comtran Corporation. 2. Draka Cableteq USA. 3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 4. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp. 5. West Penn Wire.

B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not smaller than No. 18 AWG nor not smaller than size as recommended by system manufacturer.

1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors,

Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

2.10 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS


1. Brady Worldwide, Inc. 2. HellermannTyton North America. 3. Kroy LLC.


4. Panduit Corp.

B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for installation of supports for cables.

3.2 WIRING METHOD

A. Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways.

1. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

2. Comply with requirements in Section 28 05 28 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security."

3. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 36 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems." 4. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 20 "MC and AC cable."

B. Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures:

1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by

manufacturer. 4. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. 5. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure

associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks.


6. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. 7. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal

blocks, or plug connectors.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

C. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches

and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

D. UTP Cable Installation: Install using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain

cable geometry.

E. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

F. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:


1. Install plenum-rated cable only. 2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas. 3. Coil cable 72 inches long shall be neatly coiled not less than 12 inches in diameter below

each feed point.

G. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

4. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

3.4 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum and non- plenum ceilings.

2. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

C. Wiring Method:


1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour, fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and CI, is not permitted.

3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables may be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones.

3.5 POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated.

B. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 28 13 00 "Access Control" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 28 23 00 "Video Surveillance" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 28 46 19 "PLC Electronic Detention Monitoring and Control Systems" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.


D. Comply with requirements in Section 28 31 00 "Fire Detection and Alarm for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping" Annex A.

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.8 GROUNDING

A. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

B. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



08/10/2018 [28 05 26]GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 28 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Grounding conductors. 2. Grounding connectors. 3. Grounding busbars.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Signal Ground: The ground reference point designated by manufacturer of the system that is considered to have zero voltage.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS


1. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Comply with UL 486A-486B.

C. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation, insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83.

1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19-strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire.

D. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.


3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, and 1/4 inch in

diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two-hole

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply with UL 486A-486B.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 3. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 4. Panduit Corp. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

C. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467.

1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped.

D. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression or exothermic-type mechanical connector; with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch centers for a two-bolt connection to the busbar.

E. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING BUSBARS


1. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 2. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 3. Panduit Corp.

B. Grounding Busbars: Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be for wall mounting, shall be NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and shall comply with J-STD-607-A.

1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-inch clearance to access

the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel.


3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600 V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.

C. Rack and Cabinet Grounding Busbars: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and complying with J-STD-607-A. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.

1. Cabinet-Mounted Busbar: Terminal block, with stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the cabinet.

2. Rack-Mounted Horizontal Busbar: Designed for mounting in 19- or 23-inch equipment racks. Include a copper splice bar for transitioning to an adjoining rack, and stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack.

3. Rack-Mounted Vertical Busbar: 36 inches stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment."

1. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

2. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.

B. Signal Ground:

1. For each system, establish the signal ground and label that location as such. 2. Bond the signal ground to the alternating-current (ac) power system service by

connecting to one of the following listed locations, using insulated No. 6 AWG, stranded, Type THHN wire:

a. Grounding bar in an electrical power panelboard if located in the same room or space as the signal ground.

b. Telecommunications grounding busbar.

C. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:


1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point, and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees.

2. Install without splices. 3. Support at not more than 36-inch intervals.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars.

B. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector. 2. Pretwist the conductor. 3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections.

C. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the signal ground. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 when grounding screened, balanced, twisted-pair cables.

D. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a supplement to bonding requirements in this Section.




1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



08/10/2018 [28 31 00] - 1 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

SECTION 28 31 00

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fire alarm systems for the following: 1. Complete operational system for new construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.

B. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

D. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Noncoded, addressable system; multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only. 1. Standalone reporting fire alarm system.


A. Comply with NFPA 72.

B. Premises protection includes new building construction.

C. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors. 5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 6. Fire standpipe system.


D. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously and in sync. 2. Identify alarm at the FACP and remote annunciators. 3. De-energize electromagnetic door holders. 4. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 5. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 6. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 7. Activate voice/alarm communication system. 8. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm mode. 9. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was initiated. 10. Record events in the system memory.

E. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions: 1. Operation of a fire-protection system valve tamper.

F. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and

notification-appliance circuits. 2. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices. 3. Loss of primary power at the FACP. 4. Ground or a single break in FACP internal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP. 6. A break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP or annunciator. 9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition. 10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.

G. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the FACP and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design. b. Fire alarm certified by NICET, minimum Level III.

2. Product Data: For each type of product indicated 3. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of

operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

4. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. 5. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types and

sizes. 6. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment

and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color code.

7. Batteries: Size calculations.


8. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

9. Ductwork Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations of ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating the installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, the detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

10. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

11. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recommendations for Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the FACP.

E. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review.

F. Documentation: 1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to

NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to

NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. Format of the written sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix. a. Hard copies on paper to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. b. Electronic media may be provided to Architect.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Work of this Section be performed by a UL-listed company.

C. Installer Qualifications: Personnel certified by NICET as Fire Alarm Level II.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.



A. Interruption of Existing Fire Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than Five days in advance of proposed testing of fire alarm

service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. FACP and Equipment:

a. EST b. Siemens c. NOTIFIER d. Gamewell FCI

2. Wire and Cable: a. Draka Cabletaq b. Tyco Raychem c. West Penn Wire d. Delco Wire and Cable e. Rockbestos-Surprenant Cable

3. Audible and Visual Signals: a. EST b. Siemens c. NOTIFIER d. Gamewell FCI e. System Sensor f. Cooper Wheellock g. Gentex Corporation.

2.2 FACP

A. General Description: 1. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed. 2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at the FACP.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.


B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. 1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, two line(s) of 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands; and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

C. Circuits: 1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B, Style.

a. System Layout: Install no more than 40 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B, Style . 3. Actuation of alarm notification appliances, annunciation, shall occur upon activation of

an initiating device. 4. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the FACP for mechanical

equipment shutdown and magnetic door-holding circuits is not required, provided a break in the circuit will cause doors to close and mechanical equipment to shut down.

D. Smoke-Alarm Verification: 1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP. 2. Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the

detector. 3. Record events by the system printer. 4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. 5. Cancel FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

E. Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern, complying with ANSI S3.41.

F. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the dc component shall be from the ac supply.

G. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP / annunciators, after initiating devices are restored to normal. 1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates

an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained. 2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances

until silencing switch is operated again. 3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated,

notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.

H. Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of initiating devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The FACP and annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If testing ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall automatically return to normal.

I. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled,


and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and make a print-out of the final adjusted values on the system printer.

J. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a digital alarm communicator transmitter and telephone lines.

K. Service Modem: Ports shall be RS-232 for system printer and for connection to a dial-in terminal unit. 1. The dial-in port shall allow remote access to the FACP for programming changes and

system diagnostic routines. Access by a remote terminal shall be by encrypted password algorithm.

L. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory signal shall be powered by the 24-V dc source. 1. The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the

power-supply module rating. 2. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at the service

entrance equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM POWER."

M. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger and an automatic transfer switch. 1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium. 2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.

N. Surge Protection: 1. Install surge protection on normal ac power for the FACP and its accessories. Comply

with Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" for auxiliary panel suppressors.

2. Install surge protectors recommended by FACP manufacturer. Install on all system wiring external to the building housing the FACP.

O. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.3 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES

A. Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on recessed outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type.

With integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.


2.4 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Description: 1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to the FACP. 3. Multipurpose type, containing the following:

a. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

b. Piezoelectric sounder rated at 88 dBA at 10 feet according to UL 464. c. Heat sensor, combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature.

4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection of building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating and power-on status. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,

individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP. a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at the FACP for 15 or 20

deg F per minute. b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be

settable at the FACP to operate at 135 or 155 deg F. c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested

according to UL 268A.

C. Ionization Smoke Detector: 1. Sensor: Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. Self-

compensating for changes in environmental conditions. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.5 and 1.7 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested

according to UL 268A.

D. Remote Air-Sampling Detector System: Includes air-sampling pipe network, a laser-based photoelectric detector, a sample transport fan, and a control unit. 1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Pipe Network: Electrical metallic tubing connects control unit with designated sampling

holes. 3. Smoke Detector: Particle-counting type with continuous laser beam. Sensitivity

adjustable to a minimum of three preset values. 4. Sample Transport Fan: Centrifugal type, creating a minimum static pressure of 0.05-inch

wg (12.5 Pa) at all sampling ports. 5. Control Unit: Single or multizone unit as indicated. Provides same system power

supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for the central FACP plus separate trouble indication for airflow and detector problems.


6. Signals to the Central FACP: Any type of local system trouble is reported to the central FACP as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each system zone are individually reported to the central FACP as separately identified zones.

E. Duct Smoke Detectors: 1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when

tested according to UL 268A. 2. UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to the FACP. 4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted

in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied

detector. The enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X. 5. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating and power-on status. Provide

remote status and alarm indicator and test station where indicated. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,

individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.

8. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 9. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the

specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 10. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-

mounting assembly.

B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94 dBA, measured 10 feet from the bell. 10-inch size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are weatherproof where indicated.

C. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.

D. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.

E. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn.


F. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens. 1. Rated Light Output: adjustable 75 & 110 candela. 2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

2.6 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REMOTE INDICATORS

A. Remote status and alarm indicator and test stations, with LED indicating lights. Light is connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch.

2.7 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching door plate. 1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force. 2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc. 4. Rating: 120-V ac.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.8 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing. 1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP. Controls with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.

2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a system address for listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

2.10 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Listed and labeled according to UL 632.


B. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the FACP, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising 2 lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated.

C. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery capacity is adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements.

D. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.11 GUARDS FOR PHYSICAL PROTECTION

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection. 1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of the device. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

2.12 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, No. 18 AWG minimum size as recommended by system manufacturer. 1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70 Article 760, Classification CI,

for power-limited fire alarm signal service. UL listed as Type FPL, and complying with requirements in UL 1424 and in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation. 1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70 Type MC, copper conductors, TFN/THHN

conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, UL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

2.13 ADDITIONAL INSTALLED DEVICES

A. Electrical Contractor shall include in his base bid an allowance for the installation of 2 additional audio/visual signaling devices, 1 manual pull stations with covers, 1 additional smoke detectors, and 1 additional duct smoke detector. The contractor shall include 60 foot length of conduit and wire for each device, and shall assume that the devices will be installed at the completion of the project or during final inspections as directed by the A/E. If not all devices


are used, the remaining devices shall be turned over to the owner. The unused device items labor, conduit and wire shall be credited to the owner in a deduct change order.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing: 1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet maximum or the rating of the detector. 2. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for

high ceiling areas, shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72. 3. Spacing of heat detectors shall be determined based on guidelines and recommendations

in NFPA 72.

B. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct.

D. Access Control and Security systems: Provide interface modules to provide contact closure and signal to these systems. Provide relay or modules, four #14 AWG in conduit to each system’s headend when system is part of building’s system new or existing.

E. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

F. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

G. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

H. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. Location of branch circuit serving panel shall be permanently identified on unit.

I. A dedicated circuit breaker shall serve FACP, and be painted red per NEC 760.121.B.

J. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring according to the following: 1. NECA 1. 2. TIA/EIA 568-A.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."


1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

C. Wiring Method: 1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated

with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable. 2. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables may be installed in the same

cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum 1-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones.

H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the FACP and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.

C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to the FACP.



A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation. Report results in writing.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using the

form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72. 2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72.

Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted under the direct supervision of a NICET technician certified under the Fire Alarm Systems program at Level III.

3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly located, damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests.

4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFPA 72. a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.

5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demonstration of sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm system complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for three monthly, and one quarterly, periods.

C. Semiannual Test and Inspection: Six months after date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

D. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices. Refer to Division 1 Section Demonstration and Training.

3.8 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide spare parts as follows: 1. Audio/Visual Appliances 2 2. Visual Appliances 1 3. Area Smoke Detectors 1 4. Duct Smoke Detectors 1 5. Pullstations 1

B. Furnish six (6) matching keys to open panels, pull stations and annunciators.

C. Furnish two (2) specialty screwdrivers for tamper resistant screws.

3.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide full 2-year parts, labor and programming warranty for the complete fire alarm system, including batteries.


07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [31 05 13] - 1 - Soils for Earthwork Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 31 05 13

SOILS FOR EARTHWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Subsoil materials. 2. Topsoil materials.

1.2 UNIT PRICES - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. Subsoil: 1. Basis of Measurement: By cubic yard. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes excavating existing subsoil, supplying subsoil

materials, stockpiling.

B. Topsoil: 1. Basis of Measurement: By cubic yard. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes excavating existing topsoil, supplying topsoil

materials, stockpiling.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials: 1. AASHTO T180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils

Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics

of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). 2. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).

3. ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. None required.


A. Perform Work in accordance with local standards.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSOIL MATERIALS

A. Subsoil Type S1: Conforming to local standard.

B. Subsoil Type S2: 1. Excavated and re-used material. 2. Graded. 3. Free of lumps larger than 3inches, rocks larger than 2inches, and debris. 4. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL.

2.2 TOPSOIL MATERIALS

A. Topsoil Type S3: Conforming to local standard.

B. Topsoil Type S4: 1. Excavated and reused material. 2. Graded. 3. Free of roots, rocks larger than ½ inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign

matter. a. Screening: Single screened.

C. Topsoil Type S5: 1. Imported borrow. 2. Friable loam. 3. Reasonably free of roots, rocks larger than ½ inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds,

and foreign matter. a. Screening: Single screened.

4. Acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5. 5. Containing minimum of 4 percent and maximum of 25 percent inorganic matter.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services Testing and analysis of soil material.

B. Testing and Analysis of Subsoil Material: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557.

C. Testing and Analysis of Topsoil Material: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557.

D. When tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

E. Furnish materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate subsoil and topsoil from areas designated. Strip topsoil to full depth of topsoil in designated areas.

B. Stockpile excavated material meeting requirements for subsoil materials and topsoil materials.

C. Remove excess excavated subsoil and topsoil not intended for reuse, from site.

D. Remove excavated materials not meeting requirements for subsoil materials and topsoil materials from site.

3.2 STOCKPILING

A. Stockpile materials on site as directed by Contractor.

B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements.

C. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing.

D. Stockpile topsoil 8 feet high maximum.

E. Prevent intermixing of soil types or contamination.

F. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials.

G. Stockpile unsuitable materials on impervious material and cover to prevent erosion and leaching, until disposed of.

3.3 STOCKPILE CLEANUP

A. Remove stockpile, leave area in clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing surface water.

B. When borrow area is indicated, leave area in clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing surface water.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [31 05 16] - 1 - Aggregates for Earthwork Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 31 05 16

AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Coarse aggregate materials. 2. Fine aggregate materials.

1.2 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. Aggregate: 1. Basis of Measurement: By cubic yard. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes supplying aggregate materials, stockpiling.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials: 1. AASHTO M147 - Standard Specification for Materials for Aggregate and Soil-

Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses. 2. AASHTO T180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils


B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates. 2. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics



4. ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System).

5. ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. None required.


A. Furnish each aggregate material from single source throughout the Work.

B. Perform Work in accordance with local standard.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COARSE AGGREGATE MATERIALS

A. Coarse Aggregate Type A1: Conforming to local standard.

B. Coarse Aggregate Type A2 (Gravel): AASHTO M147, Grade 2; passing No. 2 sieve with liquid limit of not more than 25; plasticity index of not more than five in accordance with ASTM D4318.

C. Coarse Aggregate Type A3 (Gravel): Crushed: natural washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris; graded in accordance with ASTM C136, Group Symbol GW; within the following limits:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

2 inches (50 mm) 100

1 inch (25 mm) 95

3/4 inch (19 mm) 95 to 100

5/8 inches (16 mm) 75 to 100

3/8 inches (10 mm) 55 to 85

No. 4 (4.75 mm) 35 to 60

No. 16 (1.18 mm) 15 to 35

No. 40 (425 micro m) 10 to 25

No. 200 (75 micro m) 5 to 10

D. Aggregate Type A4 (Pea Gravel): Natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter; graded in accordance with ASTM C136 ; to the following limits: 1. Minimum Size: ¼ inch. 2. Maximum Size: 5/8 inch.

2.2 FINE AGGREGATE MATERIALS

A. Fine Aggregate Type A5: Conforming to local standard.

B. Fine Aggregate Type A6 (Sand): Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter; graded in accordance with ASTM C136; within the following limits:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

No. 4 (4.75 mm) 100

No. 14 (1.4 mm) 10-100

No. 50 (300 micro m) 5 to 90

No. 100 (150 micro m)\ 4 to 30


No. 200 (75 micro m) 0


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services.

B. Coarse Aggregate Material - Testing and Analysis: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557.

C. Fine Aggregate Material - Testing and Analysis: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557.

D. When tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate aggregate materials from on-site locations indicated designated by Contractor.

B. Stockpile excavated material meeting requirements for coarse aggregate materials and fine aggregate materials.

C. Remove excess excavated coarse aggregate materials and fine aggregate materials not intended for reuse, from site.

D. Remove excavated materials not meeting requirements for coarse aggregate materials and fine aggregate materials from site.

3.2 STOCKPILING

A. Stockpile materials on site at locations as directed by Contractor.

B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements.

C. Separate different aggregate materials with dividers or stockpile individually to prevent mixing.

D. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials.

E. Stockpile unsuitable materials on impervious material and cover to prevent erosion and leaching, until disposed of.


3.3 STOCKPILE CLEANUP

A. Remove stockpile, leave area in clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing surface water.

B. When borrow area is indicated, leave area in clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing surface water.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [31 10 00] - 1 - Site Clearing Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 31 10 00

SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Removing surface debris. 2. Removing designated paving and curbs. 3. Removing designated trees, shrubs, and other plant life. 4. Removing abandoned utilities. 5. Excavating topsoil.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit data for herbicide. Indicate compliance with applicable codes for environmental protection.


A. Conform to applicable code for environmental requirements, disposal of debris, and use of herbicides.

B. Perform Work in accordance with local standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify existing plant life designated to remain is tagged or identified.

C. Identify waste area and/or salvage area for placing removed materials.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Call Local Utility Line Information service not less than three working days before performing Work.


1. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding

construction areas.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities indicated to remain, from damage.

B. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain, as final landscaping as specified in Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, and existing structures from damage or displacement.

3.4 CLEARING

A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work.

B. Remove trees and shrubs indicated. Remove stumps, main root ball, root system to depth of 24 inches, and surface rock.

C. Clear undergrowth and deadwood, without disturbing subsoil.

D. Apply herbicide to remaining stumps to inhibit growth.

3.5 REMOVAL

A. Remove debris, rock, and extracted plant life from site.

B. Remove paving and curbs.

C. Neatly saw cut edges at right angle to surface any paving to remain.

D. Remove abandoned utilities. Indicated removal termination point for underground utilities on Record Documents.

E. Continuously clean-up and remove waste materials from site. Do not allow materials to accumulate on site.

F. Do not burn or bury materials on site. Leave site in clean condition.

3.6 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, relandscaped, or regraded, without mixing with foreign materials for use in finish grading.

B. Do not excavate wet topsoil.

C. Stockpile in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet and protect from erosion. Stockpile material on impervious material and cover over with same material, until disposal.


D. Remove excess topsoil not intended for reuse, from site.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [31 20 00] - 1 - Earthwork Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 31 20 00

EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Excavation, hauling, embankment construction and compaction not covered by other items. The construction shall be in accordance with the Specifications and in close conformance with the lines, grades, and consideration of all pavement thicknesses shown on the Drawings or established by the Owner. All excavation will be classified as hereafter described.

1.2 CLASSIFICATION

A. Uniformity Coefficient: Used in this Specification as defined by ASTM D2487.

B. Plasticity Index: Used in this Specification as defined by ASTM D4318.

C. Zone of Influence: Used in this Specification to delineate the boundaries of a soil mass beneath a soil supported element that contributes to the support of the element. The Zone of influence is defined by imaginary lines extending outward and downward on a one (vertical) to one (horizontal) slope from a line five feet outside the base perimeter of the supported element.

D. Topsoil Excavation: Excavation of sandy loam, sandy clay loam or clay loam from within the topsoil stripping limits that is suitable for use as topsoil.

E. Unsuitable Material Excavation: Mass excavation of unsuitable materials from within the zone of influence that is not suitable for the support of foundations, floor slabs and other elements.

F. Common Excavation: Common excavation shall consist of all excavation not included as rock excavation or excavation which is otherwise classified and paid for, including flexible type pavement and all rippable materials.

G. Rock Excavation: Rock excavation shall consist of igneous, metamorphic, and sedimentary rock which cannot be excavated without blasting; the use of a modern power shovel of no less than one cubic yard (.84 cubic meter) capacity, properly used, having adequate power and in good running condition; or the use of other equivalent powered equipment. It shall also include all boulders or other detached stones each having a volume of 1/2 or a cubic yard (0.38 of a cubic meter) or more.

H. Unclassified Excavation: Unclassified excavation shall consist of the excavation and disposal of all materials to whatever character encountered in the work.


I. Structural Fill: Approved borrow material obtained from on-site stockpile and/or excavations required for backfilling and embankment construction within the zone of influence and meeting the specified material requirement.

J. General Fill: Approved material obtained from common excavation, unsuitable material excavation, and off-site borrows locations if necessary for backfilling and embankment construction in all areas not within the zone of influence and meeting the specified material requirements.


A. Testing and inspection services to be provided by the Owner.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications: 1. ASTM C977 Quicklime and Hydrated Line for Soil

Stabilization 2. ASTM D422 Particle Size Analysis of Soils 3. ASTM D1556 Density and Unit Weight of Soil In Place by the

Sand Cone Method 4. ASTM D1557 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil

Using Modified Effort 5. ASTM D854 Specific Gravity of Soil Solid by Water

Pycnometer 6. ASTM D2167 Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the

Rubber Balloon Method 7. ASTM D2216 Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by

Mass 8. ASTM D2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 9. ASTM D3017 Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

B. Indiana Department of Transportation (INDOT) Publication: Standard Specifications latest edition.

1.5 DUST CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of 326 IAC 6-4 for fugitive dust.

B. The Contractor shall take adequate measures to control dust on the site. The Contractor shall have on the site an adequate number of watering vehicles to control dust by his operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1 EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE NOTED HEREIN, THE FOLLOWING MATERIALS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION.

A. Structural backfill material shall be:

1. Sand and gravel or crushed stone with two (2) inch maximum particle

size and containing no more than eight (8) percent by weight passing a No. 200 sieve. In addition, the uniformity coefficient shall be greater than four (4). The liquid limit shall not be greater than 25 and the plasticity index not more than 6.

2. Lime stabilized material. 3. On-site clays and silts or mixtures thereof, free of organic matter when

dried to moisture contents compatible with required compaction levels.

B. General fill material is defined as a soil material that conforms to the following: 1. Contains no more than five (5) percent organic material and is free of

trash, rubble, or other man-made objects. 2. On-site clays, silts and sands that contain less than 2% organic material.

C. "B" borrow shall be clean granular material complying with Section 211.02 of the INDOT Standard Specifications latest edition.

D. Quicklime and hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C977.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Excavations and embankments shall be finished to reasonably smooth and uniform surfaces. No materials shall be wasted without permission. Excavation operations shall be conducted so that material outside the limits of slopes will not be disturbed. Prior to beginning excavation, grading, embankment operations in any area, all necessary clearing, and grubbing and topsoil removal in that area shall have been performed. 1. All spongy and yielding material which will not readily compact when

approximately dry and all vegetation shall be removed from within clearing limits and to such depths as ordered. None of this removed material shall be used in embankments.

B. When the Contractor performs grading operations after daylight hours, he shall provide and maintain at his expense sufficient artificial lighting to permit proper construction and inspection.

C. Grading operations shall be kept well in advance of paving operations in order to take advantage of maximum time for settlement.

D. The roadway and embankments shall be kept well drained at all times by keeping


the center higher than the sides and uniformly graded. If necessary, temporary drainage ditches shall be provided as directed.

E. The Contractor shall employ one or a combination of the following for subgrade preparation for pavement: 1. Compaction of subgrade and embankments to 95% Modified Proctor

(ASTM D1557). 2. Compaction of lime stabilized subgrade and embankments to 95%

Modified Proctor (ASTM D1557).

F. The Contractor shall employ one or a combination of the following options for subgrade preparation under buildings in embankment areas only. 1. Compaction of subgrade and embankments to 95% Modified Proctor five

feet beyond the proposed outside of the building. Compaction shall extend to subgrade at 0.5 horizontal to 1.0 vertical.

2. Compaction of lime stabilized subgrade and embankments to 95% modified proctor five feet beyond the proposed outside of the building. Compaction shall extend to subgrade at 0.5 horizontal to 1.0 vertical.

3.2 DEWATERING AND SURFACE WATER CONTROL

A. Where the excavation extends below the groundwater level, the Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain dewatering equipment necessary to maintain a dry excavation unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. The dewatering method shall be activated to lower the water level below the established excavation level before the excavation reaches that level. The dewatering method shall not disturb the density of the subgrade soils. Dewatering shall be continued until all work below the groundwater table is completed and it is assured that the cession of dewatering will have no detrimental effect on any aspect of the project or until upon the written request of the Contractor, the Engineer gives written consent to cease dewatering operations. Dewatering shall then be discontinued gradually at a rate not to exceed 25 percent of the pumping capacity every three days or equivalent until all dewatering has ceased unless otherwise allowed in writing by the Engineer.

B. The Contractor shall keep the site free of standing water. The Contractor shall construct all necessary temporary ditches, swales and other means to keep stormwater away from work. When the permanent storm drainage system or portions thereof are constructed, stormwater shall be directed to the permanent stormwater collection systems. Upon completion of the work and anytime necessary during construction operations, the permanent stormwater collection system shall be cleaned of all sediment or debris which may enter the system.

C. The Contractor shall provide sufficient pumps to dewater all areas of the site where excavations are made or fills are placed in such a manner that creates a sump or depression that may hold water.

3.3 EXCAVATION


A. Excavation slopes shall be maintained in a stable condition at all times and shall not be steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical unless proper precautions, as stipulated by OSHA, are taken.

B. The base of the excavation shall be protected against any damage, which affects the strength and compressibility characteristics of the exposed soil. Factors, which may damage the exposed excavation, are freezing, groundwater seepage inflow, equipment traffic, etc.

C. Surplus common excavation material shall be disposed of at locations as directed by the Owner.

3.4 EMBANKMENT AND COMPACTION

A. Embankment construction shall consist of constructing all embankments, including preparation of the areas upon which they are to be placed; the placing and compacting of approved material within embankment areas; and the placing and compacting of embankment material in holes, pits, and other depressions within the embankment area. Only approved materials shall be used in the construction of embankment backfill.

B. After the embankment area has been cleared and before embankment is placed, the building areas and areas to be paved shall be proofrolled prior to compaction of the subgrade and placement of any structural fills. All pronounced depressions left in the original ground surface by removal of objectionable material from within embankment limits shall be refilled with suitable material well compacted to the same density as required for the above embankment. Isolated soft pockets that are located during the proofrolling phase of this project shall be excavated and replaced with structural backfill. The material removed from the soft pockets shall be disposed of off site or re-used as fill material in yard areas only. The Contractor shall identify such replacement of soft pockets. Replacement shall proceed only when authorized prior to proceeding with the work. The upper 6 inches of the original ground shall be compacted with a 3-wheel roller weighing no less than 10 tons, or with other approved compacting equipment to the same density as required for the above embankment, unless otherwise directed by the Architect/Engineer. Subgrade compaction requirements shall be as follows: 1. Underneath and five feet out from the limits of:

a. All buildings. b. All areas to receive paving 95% Modified Proctor (ASTM D1557)

2. All other areas: 95% Modified Proctor (ASTM D1557)

C. Frozen materials, stumps, roots, all or parts of trees, brush, weeds, or other perishable materials shall not be placed in any embankment. Stones greater than 4 inches in any dimension shall not be left within 6 inches of the finished subgrade. The original ground surface or the surface of any lift in place shall not be frozen and shall be free from objectionable quantities of snow, ice or mud.

D. The embankment material shall be placed in uniform level layers, left properly


shaped as set out above, and compacted with approved compacting equipment.

E. Each lift shall be disked or treated by some other mechanical means that will insure the breaking up on any existing lumps and clods.

F. The loose depth of each lift shall be such that the required compaction can be obtained, but in no case shall it exceed 8 inches. Where a tamping roller is used, the loose depth of lift shall not exceed the length of the tamper feet. The surface area of the end of each foot of the tamping roller shall be no less than 5-1/2 square inches.

G. In places inaccessible to motorized compacting equipment the required compaction shall be obtained with approved mechanical tamps or vibrators, in which case the depth of lifts, loose measurement, shall not exceed 6 inches.

H. If the embankment material is too wet and the compaction is not satisfactory, the material shall be aerated to remove excess moisture. Excess moisture shall be that which is above optimum moisture. When the material is too wet, the Owner shall make sufficient moisture tests to determine the amount of excess moisture to be removed by aeration and to further determine that the excess moisture has been removed. In addition to the density requirements set out herein, all embankments shall be constructed satisfactorily.

I. Only structural backfill material shall be used beneath footings, floor slabs and other foundations and shall extend outward away from the base of the foundation element at a 1:1 slope. Structural backfill material shall be placed adjacent to all structural walls for a minimum horizontal distance of two feet from the exterior of the walls and shall be placed to an elevation eighteen inches below finished grade. A clay cap shall then be placed above the structural backfill placed adjacent to the walls. Structural backfill material shall also be placed to a minimum depth of twelve inches beneath footings, floor slabs and other foundation elements.

J. General fill material can be used in areas not defined in Item I above unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

K. No fill shall be placed against any structure until placed concrete has been allowed to cure for at least 3 days. Backfill shall be placed in such a manner that the structure will not be damaged by shock from falling earth. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent wedging action of filling material against structures. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting shall not operate closer to foundation walls than set forth as follows: 1. Fill placed adjacent to vertical or near vertical walls (within a zone

defined by imaginary lines extending horizontally away from the base of the wall for a distance of 3 feet and thence upward and outward on a 1 to 1 slope to the elevation of the top of the wall) shall be compacted to the specified density with light equipment not exceeding 1500 pounds in static weight or dynamic rated impact.

L. All fill shall be of an approved material starting on an approved subgrade. Each


lift shall be compacted to a dry density not less than the following percentage of maximum dry density determined by the Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D1557):

USAGE COMPACTION %

Beneath footings, foundation slabs (limit based upon 5 feet from footing or foundation slab and extruding outward at a 45 degree angle to natural ground surface) 95

Beneath future building slabs on grade 95

Beneath piping 95

Unreinforced subgrade and embankment beneath pavements and sidewalks 95

Adjacent to and over piping except in paved areas 95

Adjacent to (or behind) vertical walls 95

Landscaping fill 90

3.5 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. General: Subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade, and cross section, and compacted as specified. This operation shall include plowing, disking, and any moistening, aeration, or other operation required to obtain specified compaction. Soft or otherwise unsatisfactory material shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory excavated material or other approved material as directed. Low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory material shall be brought up to required grade with satisfactory materials, and the entire subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade, and cross section and compacted as specified. After rolling, the surface of the subgrade for the roadways shall not show deviation greater than 3/8-inch when tested with a 10 foot straightedge applied both parallel and at right angles to the centerline of the area. The elevation of the finished subgrade shall not vary more than 0.05 foot from the established grade and cross section.

B. Compaction: Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment well suited to the type of material being compacted.

C. Granular Fill Material Installation: 1. The aggregate subbase and base shall be properly installed before the

Contractor may apply dual wheel loads of 9,000 pounds or above.


3.6 SINKHOLE TREATMENT

A. When evidence of a sinkhole feature is found, the debris and soft material present in the hole should be excavated. The excavation should proceed down to the rock surface, and the rock surface should be explored to identify any signs of a “throat” or significant void in the rock. If such a feature is encountered, the void should be covered with rocks large enough to span the opening. If a distinct throat is not found, the bottom of the excavation should be covered with rip-rap or similarly sized rock.

The sides of the excavation should be lined with a non-woven needlepunched

filter fabric to cover the exposed soil faces. After the fabric is in place, a graded filter should be constructed over the large stone at the bottom of the hole. The filter should consist of a layer of No. 3 stone or similar material, overlain by No. 57 stone, with a top layer of dense graded aggregate. The thickness and placement of the aggregate layers should be determined at the time of treatment, based on the size of the excavation and various other factors. The filter fabric should be draped over to cover the dense-graded aggregate layer. A layer of clay, at least 3 feet thick, placed in lifts of no more than 8 inches, and compacted to at least 98 percent of the maximum dry density of the material, should be constructed over the filter to seal the hole.

3.7 STAGING PREPARATION

A. A Type "O" compacted aggregate base with a minimum depth of 6 inches shall be constructed over compacted subgrade for all roads and parking lots to be used for construction staging and beneath the floor slabs of the proposed buildings in this contract. The Type "O" compacted aggregate base placed beyond the building face shall be removed and disposed of on-site at an area set aside for this purpose by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Compacted aggregate base under the building shall have a minimum depth of 6 inches and a maximum depth of 8 inches and shall slope at 0.5 percent northeast southwest to drain. The construction of the Type “O” compacted aggregate base shall be in compliance with all applicable provisions of Section 303.05 through 303.12 and 303.14 of the INDOT Standard Specifications latest edition.

3.8 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE

A. General: Protect newly graded areas from the actions of the elements. Any settlement or washing that occurs prior to acceptance of the work shall be repaired, and grades re-established to the required elevations and slopes. Fill to required subgrade levels in areas where settlement occurs.

B. Protect drive and parking area pavements from truck equipment or other vehicular traffic until base course of paving has been installed.

C. Maintain all of the work of this section as needed until the Owner has accepted the work.


D. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to comply with all state and local pollution control ordinances and the requirements set out in these Specifications.

E. At the completion of the project all areas outside the work limits, disturbed by the Contractor during the execution of his work, shall be returned to as near its original condition as possible

3.9 LIME STABILIZATION

A. Where determined necessary by the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer, the top 12" of subgrade shall be lime stabilized and shall be disked or otherwise scarified. Lime shall then be thoroughly blended into the scarified subgrade material at the rate determined by the Contractor based upon the in-situ soils characteristics. The scarified material shall then be compacted using appropriate compaction equipment to the density specified.

B. It may be determined necessary by the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer to lime stabilize any new fill material that is too wet to otherwise compact. The Contractor shall spread the fill material in a uniform loose lift no thicker than 8 inches. The Contractor shall spread at the necessary rate lime uniformly over the fill surface and blend the lime with the wet fill material. The Contractor shall blend the lime and fill using a disk, a rotovator or other devices approved by the Owner’s Representative. The material shall then be compacted to the specified density.

C. The Contractor may elect to stabilize wet fill material on an independent mixing pad situated away from the area being filled. Should this technique be used, the Contractor shall spread the new fill and lime, and thoroughly mix the lime and fill material as described above. The blended fill shall then be picked up and moved to the area being filled, and compacted to the specified dry density. The Contractor shall be responsible for moving and compacting the blended fill material while the material is still workable. Fill mixed with lime and permitted to cure too long to be compacted to the specified dry density, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. If lime stabilization methods are employed, the Contractor shall have on-site, at all times, a water truck with suitable spreader system to aid in the lime stabilization process.

3.10 EMBANKMENT RECONSTRUCTION

A. Embankment improperly compacted shall be excavated to the depth directed by the Architect/Engineer and then refilled and compacted to the density specified at no additional cost to the Owner. Field in-place density tests shall also be repeated for improperly compacted embankments that are excavated, refilled and recompacted at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [31 22 13] - 1 - Rough Grading Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 31 22 13

ROUGH GRADING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Excavating subsoil. 2. Cutting, grading, filling, rough contouring, and compacting.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials suppliers.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: Excavated material, graded free of roots, rocks larger than one inch, subsoil, debris and large weeds.

B. Subsoil Fill: Excavated material, graded free of lumps larger than 6 inches, rocks larger than 3 inches, land debris.

C. Structural Fill: Approved material, free of lumps, frozen soil, wood, topsoil or other deleterious material.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Call Local Utility Line Information service not less than three working days before performing Work. 1. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding

construction areas.

B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

C. Notify utility company to remove or relocate any utilities.

D. Protect utilities indicated to remain from damage.

E. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping.

F. Protect bench marks, survey control point, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

3.3 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated, relandscaped, or regraded.

B. Do not excavate wet subsoil or excavate and process wet material to obtain optimum moisture content.

C. When excavating through roots, perform Work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.

D. Stockpile subsoil in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 12 feet and protect from erosion.

E. Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench existing slopes greater than 1: 4 to key placed fill material to slope to provide firm bearing.

F. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil as specified for fill.

3.4 FILLING

A. Fill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

B. Place fill material in continuous layers and compact in accordance with schedule at end of this section.


C. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

D. Slope grade away from building minimum 5 percent slope for minimum distance of 10 ft, unless noted otherwise.

E. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.

F. Repair or replace items indicated to remain damaged by excavation or filling.

3.5 TOLERANCES

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot from required elevation.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Structural Fill: 1. Maximum 6 inches compacted depth. 2. Compact uniformly to minimum 95 percent of maximum density.

B. Subsoil Fill: 1. Maximum 8 inches compacted depth. 2. Compact uniformly to minimum 95 percent of maximum density.

C. Topsoil Fill: 1. Maximum 8 inches compacted depth. 2. Compact uniformly to minimum 90 percent of maximum density.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [31 23 16] - 1 - Excavation and Fill Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 31 23 16

EXCAVATION AND FILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Soil densification. 2. Excavating for building foundations. 3. Excavating for paving, roads, and parking areas. 4. Excavating for slabs-on-grade. 5. Excavating for site structures. 6. Excavating for landscaping.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Local utility standards when working within 24 inches of utility lines.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Excavation Protection Plan: Describe sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and installation required to protect excavations and adjacent structures and property; include structural calculations to support plan.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate soil densification grid for each size and configuration footing requiring soils densification.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


construction areas.


B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work.

B. Excavate subsoil to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, and construction operations.

C. Excavate to working elevation for piling work.

D. Compact disturbed load bearing soil in direct contact with foundations to original bearing capacity; perform compaction in accordance with Section 31 23 23 and Section 31 23 17.

E. Slope banks with machine to angle of repose or less until shored.

F. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

G. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.

H. Trim excavation. Remove loose matter.

I. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd measured by volume. Remove larger material as specified in Section 31 23 23.

J. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions.

K. Correct areas over excavated as specified in Section 31 23 23.

L. Stockpile subsoil in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 12 feet and protect from erosion.

M. Repair or replace items indicated to remain damaged by excavation.



B. Perform inspection of excavation and controlled fill operations in accordance with applicable code.

C. Request visual inspection of bearing surfaces before installing subsequent work.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.


B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.

C. Protect structures, utilities and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth operations.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [31 23 17] - 1 - Trenching Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 31 23 17 TRENCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Excavating trenches for utilities from 5 feet outside building to utility service. 2. Compacted fill from top of utility bedding to subgrade elevations. 3. Backfilling and compaction.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Utility: Any buried pipe, duct, conduit, or cable.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Excavation Protection Plan: Describe sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and installation required to protect excavations and adjacent structures and property; include structural calculations to support plan.

C. Product Data: Submit data for geotextile fabric indicating fabric and construction.

D. Materials Source: Submit name of imported fill materials suppliers.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.



1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify Work associated with lower elevation utilities is complete before placing higher elevation utilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS

A. Fill: Material free of lumps, frozen soil, wood, topsoil or other deleterious material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All work shall conform to the requirements of all local, State and Federal agencies having jurisdiction and the requirements of these specifications.

B. Unless otherwise directed or permitted, not more than one hundred feet (100') of any trench shall be open at any time.

C. Surface encumbrances, located so as to create a hazard to employees involved in excavation work or in the vicinity thereof at any time during operations, shall be removed or made safe before excavating is begun.

D. During excavation, material satisfactory for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner at a distance from the banks of the trench sufficient to avoid overloading and to prevent slides and cave-ins. Adequate drainage shall be provided for the stockpiles and surrounding areas by means of ditches, dikes, or other approved methods. The stockpiles shall also be protected from contamination with unsatisfactory excavated material or other material that may destroy the quality and fitness of the suitable stockpiled material.

If the Contractor fails to protect the stockpiles and any material becomes unsatisfactory as a result, such material, if directed by the Owner, shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory on-site or imported material from approved sources at no additional cost.

E. Grading shall be done as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into the excavation, and any water accumulating therein shall be removed so that the stability of the bottom and sides of the excavation is maintained. In wet trenches dewatering equipment shall be operated ahead of pipe laying and the water level kept below the pipe invert.

F. The trench shall be excavated as shown on the Drawings or as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to be installed, whichever is more stringent. Trench walls below and above the top of the pipe shall be sloped, or made vertical, as


recommended in the manufacturer's installation manual. The trench width below an elevation one foot above the top of pipe shall not exceed that recommended in the installation manual. Where no manufacturer's installation manual is available, trench walls below an elevation one foot above the top of pipe shall be vertical and trench walls one foot or more above the top of pipe shall be adequately sloped as required to prevent slides and cave-in unless proper precautions, as stipulated by OSHA, are taken. If adequate trench slopes are not or cannot be provided in the available contract limits, then use of sheeting and shoring and/or a trench box is mandatory.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut. However, sections of sewer lines under pavement or in locations where surface conditions make it difficult or impractical to excavate open trenches, installation shall be made by boring or jacking as a Contractor operation and subject to the Owner's review. All sewer pipes smaller than 36 inches in diameter which is installed by boring or jacking shall be installed in steel pipe casing.

H. Dust conditions shall be kept to a minimum by the use of water, salt, calcium chloride, or other means.

3.2 LINES AND GRADES

A. Lay pipes to lines and grades indicated on Drawings. 1. Architect/Engineer reserves right to make changes in lines, grades, and depths of

utilities when changes are required for Project conditions.

B. Use laser-beam instrument with qualified operator to establish lines and grades.

3.3 PREPARATION


construction areas.

B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

C. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping.

D. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

E. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities indicated to remain.

F. Establish temporary traffic control when trenching is performed in public right-of-way. Relocate controls as required during progress of Work.

3.4 TRENCHING

A. Excavate subsoil required for utilities to utility service.


B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation and allow inspection. Remove water or materials that interfere with Work.

C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

D. Hand trim excavation as necessary. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter.

E. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock.

F. Correct areas over excavated.

G. As trenches are backfilled, the Contractor shall removal all surplus material, regrade and leave clear, free, and in good order all roadways and sidewalks affected by the construction of the work. During the progress of and until the expiration of the guarantee period, he shall maintain in good and safe conditions the surface or any street over the trenches and promptly fill all depressions over and adjacent to trenches caused by settlement of backfilling.

H. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess material not being used, from site.

3.5 COVERING ENDS

A. Before leaving the work for the night, during a storm, or for any other reason, care must be taken that the unfinished end of any pipe is securely closed with a tightly fitting cover or plug. Any earth or other material that may find entrance into the pipe, through any such open end of an unplugged pipe shall be removed at the Contractor's expense.

3.6 STABILIZATION

A. If portions of the bottom of trenches or excavations consist of material unstable to such a degree that, in the opinion of the Owner, it cannot adequately support the pipe or structure, the bottom shall be over excavated and stabilized with coarse aggregate Size No. 9 gravel in compliance with Section 904.02 of the INDOT Standard Specifications latest edition. Depth of stabilization shall be as directed by the Owner.

3.7 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen fill materials.

B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces.

C. Coarse Aggregate Size No. 9 and 11 gravel shall comply with Section 904.02 of the INDOT Standard Specifications latest edition.

D. Granular material, which is noted on the drawings as granular material or B-borrow, shall comply with Article 211.02 of the INDOT Standard Specifications latest edition.


Maximum stone size shall not exceed 1 inch or the maximum size recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller.

E. Earth backfill material shall contain no more than 5% organic material, no particles larger than four inches and shall be free of trash, rubble and debris. The Plastic Index of the fraction passing the No. 40 sieve shall not be more than 25.

F. Crushed stone material shall be No. 53 complying with Section 904.02 of the INDOT Standard Specifications latest edition.

G. Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage utilities in trench.

H. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

I. Remove surplus fill materials from site.

J. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.

K. Trenches shall be backfilled to existing grade or grades as shown on the Drawings.

L. Pipe bedding, haunching and initial backfill for aluminized type 2 corrugated steel pipe and reinforced concrete pipe shall be structural backfill or "B" borrow to a depth shown on the drawings. Such backfill shall be placed in lifts of a maximum of 6 inches thickness.

The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of pipe for the full length of pipe. Care shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under pipe haunches.

M. Backfill for the remainder of the trenches shall be as follows: 1. Backfill for trenches in turfed or seeded areas and in miscellaneous areas shall be

of approved earth material and contain no stones over four (4") in their largest dimensions. Stones that are used in backfilling shall be distributed among the earth backfill so that all interspace are filled with fine material. All such backfilling shall be deposited in lifts of a maximum 12 inches lose thickness and compacted by hand tamping or approved mechanical tamping devices. Excess earth to the amount required to replace settlement shall be neatly rounded over the trench and the remainder stockpiled where designated on the drawings or hauled off site. The Contractor shall maintain Trenches until settlement has ceased and trenches remain level with the adjacent ground.

2. Backfill of all trenches under structures and paved areas shall be structural backfill as classified. In addition, the top six inches (6") below the base of the pavement shall be backfilled with No. 53 stone. The backfill shall be placed in six-inch (6") maximum lifts and the method of placing and compacting the backfill shall comply with Article 211.04 of the INDOT Standard Specifications latest edition, as applicable.


3.8 TOLERANCES


B. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1inch from required elevations.

C. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1inch from required elevations.



B. Perform laboratory material tests in accordance with ASTM D1557.

C. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, compact, and retest.

3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Protecting finished work.

B. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [31 23 23] - 1 - Backfill Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 31 23 23

BACKFILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Backfilling building perimeter to subgrade elevations. 2. Backfilling site structures to subgrade elevations. 3. Fill under slabs-on-grade. 4. Fill under paving. 5. Fill for over-excavation.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Indiana Department of Transportation (INDOT) Publication: Standard Specifications latest edition.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data for geotextile fabric indicating fabric and construction.

C. Materials Source: Submit name of imported fill materials suppliers.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS

A. Coarse Aggregate Size No. 9 and 11 gravel shall comply with Section 904.02 of the INDOT Standard Specifications latest edition.

B. Granular material, which is noted on the drawings as granular material or B-borrow, shall comply with Article 211.02 of the INDOT Standard Specifications latest edition. Maximum stone size shall not exceed 1 inch or the maximum size recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller.

C. Earth backfill material shall contain no more than 5% organic material, no particles larger than four inches and shall be free of trash, rubble and debris. The Plastic Index of the fraction passing the No. 40 sieve shall not be more than 25.


D. Crushed stone material shall be No. 53 complying with Section 904.02 of the INDOT Standard Specifications latest edition.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected.

C. Verify underground tanks are anchored to their own foundations to avoid flotation after backfilling.

D. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support loads imposed by fill.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.

B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.

C. Scarify subgrade surface to depth of 8 inches.

D. Proof roll to identify soft spots; fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.

3.3 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

C. Place material in continuous layers as follows: 1. Subsoil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not

exceeding 8 inches (200 mm) compacted depth. 2. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not

exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) compacted depth.

D. Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.

E. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.

F. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls.


G. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place.

H. Slope grade away from building minimum 5 percent slope for minimum distance of 10 ft, unless noted otherwise.

I. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.

J. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.

K. Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill materials.

3.4 TOLERANCES


B. Top Surface of Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.




C. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs-on-grade and paving.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Protecting finished work.

B. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [31 25 13] - 1 - Erosion Control Devices Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 31 25 13

EROSION CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Erosion Control methods as shown on drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Perform Work in accordance with EPA General Permit.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 All material necessary to complete the work specified by this specification shall conform to the details shown in the plans, as specified below, and shall meet all requirements of any local or state agency having jurisdiction and their Standard Specifications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SITE STABILIZATION

A. Incorporate erosion control devices indicated on the Drawings into the Project at the earliest practicable time.

B. Construct, stabilize and activate erosion controls before site disturbance within tributary areas of those controls.

C. Stockpile and waste pile heights shall not exceed 12 feet. Slope stockpile sides at 2: 1 or flatter.

D. Stabilize any disturbed area of affected erosion control devices on which activity has ceased and which will remain exposed for more than 20 days. 1. During non-germinating periods, apply mulch at recommended rates. 2. Stabilize disturbed areas which are not at finished grade and which will be

disturbed within one year in accordance with Section 32 92 19 temporary seeding specifications.

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [31 25 13] - 2 - Erosion Control Devices Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

3. Stabilize disturbed areas which are either at finished grade or will not be disturbed within one year in accordance with Section 32 92 19 permanent seeding specifications.

E. Stabilize diversion channels, sediment traps, and stockpiles immediately.


A. Inspect erosion control devices on a weekly basis and after each runoff event. Make necessary repairs to ensure erosion and sediment controls are in good working order.

B. When the temporary erosion control items specified herein are no longer required due to the advancement of construction operations, or evidenced by the successful establishment of soil holding ground cover, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to remove and dispose of all straw bales, stakes, fences, posts, filter fabric, silt, sediment and other associated materials and to regrade, shape and seed or sod the disturbed areas.

C. The Contractor and Owner shall have in their possession, an approved Erosion and Sediment Control Plan. The Contractor shall abide by its methods and those shown on the plans. Any non-compliance of the report shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer.

3.3 CLEANING

A. When sediment accumulation in sedimentation structures has reached a point one-third depth of sediment structure or device, remove and dispose of sediment.

B. Do not damage structure or device during cleaning operations.

C. Do not permit sediment to erode into construction or site areas or natural waterways.

D. Clean channels when depth of sediment reaches approximately one half channel depth.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [32 11 23] - 1 - Aggregate Base Course Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 32 11 23

AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Aggregate subbase. 2. Aggregate base course.

1.2 REFERENCES


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Submit data for geotextile fabric and herbicide.

C. Materials Source: Submit name of aggregate materials suppliers.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Furnish each aggregate material from single source throughout the Work.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATE MATERIALS

A. No. 2 subbase materials shall meet the gradation as set forth in Subsection 903.02, Course Aggregates, INDOT Standard Specifications latest edition.

B. No. 53 "Type O" subbase materials shall meet the gradation as set forth in the INDOT Standard Specifications latest edition.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify compacted substrate is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads]

C. Verify substrate has been inspected, gradients and elevations are correct.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Correct irregularities in substrate gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re-compacting.

B. Do not place fill on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces.

3.3 AGGREGATE PLACEMENT

A. Spread aggregate over prepared substrate to total compacted thickness indicated on Drawings.

B. Place aggregate in maximum 6 inch layers and compact.

C. Level and contour surfaces to elevations, profiles, and gradients indicated.

D. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate when required to assist compaction.

E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain specified compaction density.

F. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.

3.4 TOLERANCES


B. Maximum Variation From Flat Surface: 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge.

C. Maximum Variation From Thickness: 1/4 inch.

D. Maximum Variation From Elevation: 1/2 inch.





END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [32 12 16] - 1 - Flexible Pavement Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 32 12 16

FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Asphalt paving base course, binder course, and wearing course.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Asphalt Institute: 1. AI MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot- Mix Types.


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Submit product information for asphalt and aggregate materials. 2. Submit mix design with laboratory test results supporting design.



A. Mixing Plant: Conform to INDOT standards.

B. Obtain materials from same source throughout.

C. Perform Work in accordance with INDOT’s standards.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Do not place asphalt mixture when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.

C. Place asphalt mixture when temperature is not more than 15 degrees F less than initial mixing temperature.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Cement: INDOT AC20.

B. Aggregate for Base Course Mix: In accordance with State Department of Transportation standards.

C. Aggregate for Binder Mix: See Details.

D. Aggregate for Topping Mix: See Details.

E. Fine Aggregate: Manufactured sand.

F. Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime or other mineral dust, free of foreign matter.

G. Tack Coat: Asphalt Emulsion AE-T.

2.2 MIXES

A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly.

B. Asphalt Paving Mixtures: 1. Base Course: 4.5 to 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture. 2. Binder Course: 4.5 to 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in

accordance with AI MS-2. 3. Wearing Course: 5 to 7 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture. Topping

course shall contain a minimum of 10 percent fine aggregate.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify utilities indicated under paving are installed with excavations and trenches backfilled and compacted.

C. Verify compacted granular subbase is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

D. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.


3.2 TACK COAT

A. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt paving. Do not tack coat these surfaces.

3.3 ASPHALT PAVING

A. Install Work in accordance with INDOT standards.

B. Place each course to compacted thickness identified on Drawings.

C. Place tack coat at a rate of 0.05 gallons per square yard where new paving will cover existing paving.

D. Place binder course.

E. Place topping course within twenty-four hours of placing and compacting binder course.

F. Compact paving by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude paving from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

G. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES


B. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge.

C. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch.

D. Variation from Indicated Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.



B. Asphalt Paving Mix Temperature: Measure temperature at time of placement.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B. Immediately after placement, protect paving from mechanical injury for 15 days or until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F.


END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [32 13 13] - 1 - Rigid Pavement Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 32 13 13

RIGID PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete paving for:

a. Concrete sidewalks. b. Concrete curbs and gutters.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric,

Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-

Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 4. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 5. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming

Compounds for Curing Concrete. 6. ASTM C1116 - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and

Shotcrete. 7. ASTM C1371 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance of

Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers. 8. ASTM C1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance

Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer. 9. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for

Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

10. ASTM E408 - Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces Using Inspection-Meter Techniques.

11. ASTM E903 - Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres.

12. ASTM E1918 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Surfaces in the Field.

13. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



B. Product Data: 1. Submit data on concrete materials, joint filler, admixtures, and curing compounds


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.



B. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301.

B. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751.

2.2 REINFORCING

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; 40 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars; galvanized finish.

B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ASTM A185; in flat sheets or coiled rolls; galvanized finish.

C. Dowels: ASTM A615; 40 ksi yield grade, plain steel, galvanized finish.

D. Concrete used in sidewalk construction shall be reinforced with fiber reinforcement. 1. Reinforcement shall be added at the time of mixing at a rate of one pound per

cubic yard. 2. Fiber shall be 3/4" length. 3. Fibers shall conform to ASTM C1116-89 except that nylon fibers conforming to

all other requirements of the standard may be used.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150 Normal - Type I Portland type, gray color.

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33.


C. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.

D. Air Entrainment: Add air-entraining agent as indicated in ACI 301 Table 3.4.1.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1; Promulsion-60 manufactured by Protex Industries, Inc.

2.5 CONCRETE MIX

A. Weight: Normal Weight.

B. Strength for concrete/paving: 4000 psi, 28 day compressive strength; minimum cement requirements in accordance with ACI 301, Table 3.8.5 lb. except not less than 520 pounds of cement per cubic yard.

C. Strength for Concrete Curbs, Gutters, and Walks: 4000 psi, 28-day compressive strength; minimum 520 pounds of cement per cubic yard.

D. Slump: In accordance with ACI 301; 3-inch maximum slump for concrete paving.

E. Proportions: Selection in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1, trial batches or Method 2, field test data.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify compacted granular subbase is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Moisten substrate to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.

B. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.


3.3 FORMING

A. Place and secure forms and screeds to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.

B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.

3.4 REINFORCING

A. Place reinforcing as indicated on Drawings.

B. Interrupt reinforcing at expansion joints.

C. Place dowels to achieve paving and curb alignment as detailed.

3.5 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301, 305, and 306.

B. Ensure reinforcing, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.

C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.

D. Place concrete to pattern indicated.

3.6 JOINTS

A. Place expansion joints at 50 foot intervals. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.

B. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. Recess top of filler 1/4 inch for sealant installation.

C. Provide scored or sawn joints at 5 feet intervals between sidewalks and curbs and between curbs and paving.

D. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of slab. Concrete pavement joints shall be constructed in accordance with the type dimensions and at the locations required by the plans unless directed otherwise by the Architect/Engineer. Concrete pavement joints shall comply with all applicable provisions of Section 501.14 of the INDOT Standard Specifications. 1. The backer rod shown in the expansion joint detail shall be "Cera-rod" as

manufactured by W.R. Meadows or an approved equal. 2. The joint sealer shall be "Pourthane" as manufactured by W.R. Meadows or an

approved equal.


3.7 FINISHING

A. Paving: Light broom.

B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom and trowel joint edges.

C. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom.

D. Direction of Texturing: Transverse to paving direction.

E. Place curing compound sealer on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.8 JOINT SEALING

A. Separate pavement from vertical surfaces with 1/2-inch thick joint filler.

B. Place joint filler in pavement pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

C. Extend joint filler from bottom of pavement to within 1/4 inch of finished surface.

3.9 ERECTION TOLERANCES


B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.

C. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.



B. Inspect reinforcing placement for size, spacing, location, support.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect paving from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Do not permit vehicular traffic over paving for 7 days minimum after finishing or until 75 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [32 17 23] - 1 - Painted Pavement Markings Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 32 17 23

PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Traffic lines and markings. 2. Legends. 3. Paint.

1.2 REFERENCES



A. Paint Adhesion: Adhere to road surface forming smooth continuous film one minute after application.

B. Paint Drying: Tack free by touch so as not to require coning or other traffic control devices to prevent transfer by vehicle tires within two minutes after application.




A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Invert containers several days prior to use when paint has been stored more than 2 months. Minimize exposure to air when transferring paint. Seal drums and tanks when not in use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Paint shall comply with Article 909.05 of the Standard Specification.


2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Paint equipment shall consist of a machine of the spray type capable of applying the paint directly to the pavement under pressure through a nozzle. The machine shall be equipped with an air blast device for cleaning the pavement ahead of the painting operation, a guide pointer to keep the machine on an accurate line, and a device to agitate the paint. It shall also have a device to maintain a uniform flow and application of the paint, an automatic device to provide a broken or skip line of the length required, and at least 2 spray guns capable of being operated individually or together. When using fast dry traffic paint, the equipment shall be capable of heating the material from ambient air temperature to a maximum of 160EF. Some lines and markings may be applied with a brush or small hand-propelled machine designed for the purpose, if approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Do not apply paint to concrete surfaces until concrete has cured for 28 days.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. All dirt, oil, grease, excess pavement marking material, loose or other foreign material shall be removed to clean and prepare the pavement to receive the pavement marking. Removal shall be accomplished by brooming, sandblasting, waterblasting, compressed air, or other approved mechanical means. Grooving or grinding will not be permitted. The surface shall be thoroughly dry. Paint shall be applied when the pavement temperature is 40°F or above.

3.3 EXISTING WORK

A. Remove existing markings in an acceptable manner. Do not remove existing pavement markings by painting over with blank paint. Remove by methods that will cause least damage to pavement structure or pavement surface. Satisfactorily repair any pavement or surface damage caused by removal methods.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. Parking lot stall markings shall be continuous white non-reflectorized stripes, 4" in width. They shall be clearly and sharply delineated, straight and true and tangent. Segments shall be square at each end without mist, drip, or spatter. The wet film thickness of paint shall be a minimum of 0.015 inch.




B. Protect painted pavement markings from vehicular and pedestrian traffic until paint is dry and track free. Follow manufacturer's recommendations or use minimum of 30 minutes. Consider barrier cones as satisfactory protection for materials requiring more than 2 minutes dry time.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [32 91 19] - 1 - Landscape Grading Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 32 91 19

LANDSCAPE GRADING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Final grade topsoil for finish landscaping.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures

B. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials source.



A. Furnish each topsoil material from single source throughout the Work.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. Topsoil: As specified in Section 31 20 00. Some topsoil is provided on site. Supplement as needed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected.

C. Verify substrate base has been contoured and compacted.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect landscaping and other features remaining as final Work.

B. Protect existing structures, fences, sidewalks, utilities, paving, and curbs.

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [32 91 19] - 2 - Landscape Grading Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

3.3 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

A. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots.

B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove contaminated subsoil.

C. Scarify surface to depth of 3 inches where topsoil is scheduled. Scarify in areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading topsoil has compacted subsoil.

3.4 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. Place topsoil in areas where seeding is required to thickness as scheduled. Place topsoil during dry weather.

B. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate rough or low areas. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade.

C. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.

D. Manually spread topsoil close to plant material, building, and other structures to prevent damage.

E. Roll placed topsoil.

F. Remove surplus subsoil and topsoil from site.

G. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.

3.5 TOLERANCES


B. Top of Topsoil: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK


B. Prohibit construction traffic over topsoil.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Compacted topsoil thicknesses: 1. Seeded Grass: 6 inches. 2. Landscape Beds adjacent to lawns: 6 inches. 3. Landscape Beds bordered on all sides with pavement: 18 inches.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [32 92 19] - 1 - Seeding Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 32 92 19

SEEDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fertilizing. 2. Seeding. 3. Hydroseeding. 4. Mulching. 5. Maintenance.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data for seed mix, fertilizer, mulch, and other accessories.




B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass height; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer.


A. Provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, germination percentage, inert matter percentage, weed percentage, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging.


1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.


B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of seed mixture.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable.

C. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer.


A. Seeding Season: March 15 - June 15 and August 15 - October 15.

B. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is frozen or too dry, during windy periods, or when the temperature will be above 85 degrees during the germination period.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.

B. Maintain seeded areas immediately after placement for not less than 60 days after substantial completion and longer as required to establish an acceptable lawn. If seeded in fall and not given full 60 days of maintenance, or if not considered acceptable at that time, continue maintenance the following spring until acceptable lawn is established.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED MIXTURE

A. Suppliers: 1. Stock Seed Farms; Murdock, Nebraska.. 2. Wildlife Nurseries; Oshkosh, Wisconsin. 3. Applewood Seed Company; Arvada, Colorado. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.


B. Seed Mixture:

"TALL FESCUE SLOPE MIX"

PROPORTION BY

WEIGHT

COMMON NAME

BOTANICAL NAME

MIN. %

GERM.

MIN. % PURE

SEED

MAX. % WEED SEED

PERMANENT MATRIX

35 %

Tall Fescue

Festuca elatior (var. arundinacea) (equal amounts of 'Kentucky 31' & 'Alta')

85

98

0.30

21 %

Perenn.

Ryegrass

Lolium perenne (equal amounts of 'Fiesta II' &'Manhattan II')

90

97

0.30

14 %

Creeping

Red Fescue

Festuca rubra var.

90

98

0.30

TEMPORARY MATRIX

23 %

Seed Oats

Avina sativa

-

-

0.50

7 %

Annual

Ryegrass

Lolium

multiflorum

90

95

0.50

C. Sowing Rate 1. Sow grass seed at the following rates:

a. Sow Mixture 5 lbs/1,000 sq. ft. 2. The following formula shall be used to determine the amount of commercial seed

required to provide in each kind of seed the specified quantities of pure live seed. a. Live Seed x Purity x Germination = Pounds Commercial Seeds Required

2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Topsoil: Excavated from site and free of weeds.

B. Topsoil: Must be supplemented as required. Provide a fertile, friable, natural loam, surface soil obtained from local sources (do not obtain from bogs or marshes), capable


of sustaining vigorous plant growth; free of subsoil, clay or impurities, plants, weeds and roots; pH value of minimum 5.5 and maximum 7.5.

C. Lime: Natural dolomitic limestone containing not less than 85% of total carbonates with a minimum of 30% magnesium carbonates, ground so that not less than 90% passes a 10-mesh sieve and not less than 50% passes a 100-mesh sieve.

D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade.

E. Commercial Fertilizer: Complete fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived from organic sources. Provide slow release fertilizer with percentage of nitrogen required to provide not less than 4 lb. of actual nitrogen, 1 lb. of phosphorus and 2 lb. of potash per 1000 square feet of lawn area.

F. Superphosphate: Soluble mixture of treated minerals; 20% available phosphoric acid. For lawns, provide high phosphorus fertilizer to supplement complete fertilizer as required pending topsoil analysis. Desired total of phosphorus required: 3.6 lb. of actual phosphorus per 1000 square feet of lawn area.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Mulching Material: Oat or wheat straw, free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental to plant life, and dry. Hay or chopped cornstalks are not acceptable.

B. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter capable of inhibiting vigorous growth of grass.

C. Erosion Fabric: Jute matting, open weave.

D. Herbicide: Systematic weed control: "Tupersan" or equal.

E. Stakes: Softwood lumber, chisel pointed.

F. String: Inorganic fiber.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.

B. Analyze to ascertain percentage of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, soluble salt content, organic matter content, and pH value.

C. Provide recommendation for fertilizer and lime application rates for specified seed mix as result of testing.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that prepared soil base has been set at finish grade and is ready to receive the work of this Section. (Finish grade will be set 1/10' (1.2") from final grade. See Section 32 91 19.).

C. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner, which will avoid possible damage. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned.

D. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Architect before seeding.

E. Preparation of Unchanged Grades: Where seeding areas that have not been disturbed by excavating operations, prepare soil* for seeding as follows: Apply 3 inches of topsoil and soil amendments as specified; till to a depth of approximately 6 inches; remove high areas and fill in depressions; till soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture, free of clods, stones, roots and other extraneous matter.

*Prior to preparation of unchanged areas, remove existing vegetation. Dispose of such material outside of Owner's property; do not turn over into soil being prepared for lawns. If a herbicide is used, delay seeding as required to ensure proper germination.

3.2 ADDITION OF TOPSOIL AND OTHER SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Spread topsoil as required to meet final grade. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade. Remove vegetable matter and foreign non-organic material from topsoil while spreading.

B. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with any topsoil required to meet final grade. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed.

C. Add fertilizer at rates of 25 lbs. (slow-release 16-4-8) per 1000 square feet and 13 lbs. (0-20-0) per 1000 square feet. Rates may vary based on topsoil analysis.

D. If required, add lime or aluminum sulfate to bring soil mix to the pH range specified. Mixing shall be done in a thorough manner to ensure uniform distribution of materials throughout, by tilling or other approved method. 1. Limestone: When the pH value is below the specified level, add ground

limestone at the rate required to raise the pH. 2. Aluminum sulfate or wettable sulfur: When pH value is above specified level,

add aluminum sulfate or wettable sulfur at the rate required to lower the pH.

E. Coordinate the removal of any remaining stockpiled topsoil with appropriate party.


3.3 FINAL PREPARATION OF SOIL

A. After topsoil and other soil amendments have been spread as required, thoroughly till into top 3 inches of subgrade. Meet lines, grades and elevations as shown on plans, after light rolling and natural settlement. (After tilling in amendments, wet the soil thoroughly to settle it and allow it to dry before final grading.)

B. Grade to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, rake and drag lawn areas, remove ridges and fill depressions until smooth. Ensure positive drainage and blend slopes into level areas. Limit final grading to areas that can be seeded immediately after grading.

C. Restore lawn areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after final grading and prior to seeding.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Top of Final Grade: Plus or minus 1/2 inch from final grade.

3.5 SEEDING

A. Apply seed using a spreader or seeding machine evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly.

B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day.

C. Immediately following seeding, apply a straw mulch uniformly in a continuous blanket at the rate of 2-1/2 tons per acre, or 2 - 50 lb. bales per 1000 sq. ft. of area. A mechanical blower may be used for straw mulch application. Maintain clear of shrubs and trees.

D. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after mulching. Saturate to 4 inches of soil.

3.6 HYDROSEEDING

A. Apply seeded slurry with a hydraulic seeder/mulcher at a rate per seeding schedule and a tackifier (60 gals/acre) and wood cellulose fiber mulch (2000 lbs/acre) evenly in two intersecting directions.

B. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been hydroseeded/mulched. Saturate to 6-8 inches of soil.

3.7 SEED PROTECTION

A. Identify seeded areas with stakes and string around area periphery as needed to discourage foot traffic. Remove once grass is established.

B. Cover seeded slopes where grade is 4 inches per foot or greater with erosion fabric. Roll fabric onto slopes without stretching or pulling.


C. Lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6 inch deep excavated topsoil trench. Overlap edges and ends of adjacent rolls minimum 12 inches. Backfill trench and rake smooth, level with adjacent soil.

D. Secure outside edges and overlaps at 36 inch intervals with stakes.

E. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil.

F. At sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. Lap ends and edges minimum 6 inches.

3.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, regrading and replanting for not less than 60 days after substantial completion and longer as required to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare areas.

B. Watering: Keep soil moist during seed germination period, requiring at least daily watering. First week after germination, soak ground every other day. Thereafter, supplement rainfall to produce total of 1 inch per week after germination until the end of the maintenance period.

C. Mowing: Mow twice. When grass reaches 2-1/2 in. in height, mow to 1-3/4 in. height. Remove grass clippings. Thereafter, Owner to be responsible for mowing maintenance.

D. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides, if required, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides.

E. Reseed and mulch spots larger than 1 sq. ft. not having uniform stand. A stand of turf is defined as 95 percent ground cover.

F. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. Remove all barriers and signs at end of maintenance period.

3.9 ACCEPTANCE

A. Seeded areas will be inspected at completion of maintenance period and accepted subject to compliance of installation and maintenance requirements.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [33 05 13] - 1 - Manholes and Structures Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 33 05 13 MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Monolithic concrete manholes with transition to cover frame, covers, anchorage,

and accessories. 2. Modular precast concrete manhole with tongue-and-groove joints, covers,

anchorage, and accessories. 3. Monolithic FRP manholes with transition to cover frame, covers, anchorage, and

accessories. 4. Masonry manholes with masonry transition to cover frame, covers, anchorage,

and accessories. 5. Bedding and cover materials.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 530/530.1 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures and

Specifications for Masonry Structures.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)

Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Brick. 4. ASTM C62 - Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units

Made From Clay or Shale). 5. ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole

Sections. 6. ASTM C497 - Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or

Tile. 7. ASTM C913 - Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Water and

Wastewater Structures. 8. ASTM C923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between

Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals. 9. ASTM D3753 - Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester

Manholes and Wetwells.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Equivalent strength: Based on structural design of reinforced concrete as outlined in ACI 318.

B. Design of Lifting Devices for Precast Components: In accordance with ASTM C913.


C. Design of Joints for Precast Components: In accordance with ASTM C913; maximum leakage of 0.025 gallons per hour per foot of joint at 3 feet of head.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. None required.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years’ experience.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Comply with precast concrete manufacturer’s instructions for unloading, storing and moving precast manholes.

C. Store precast concrete manholes to prevent damage to Owner’s property or other public or private property. Repair property damaged from materials storage.

D. Mark each precast structure by indentation or waterproof paint showing date of manufacture, manufacturer, and identifying symbols and numbers shown on Drawings to indicate its intended use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANHOLES 1. Structures per INDOT Standards

B. Manhole Sections: Reinforced precast concrete in accordance with ASTM C478 with gaskets in accordance with ASTM C923.

2.2 FRAMES AND COVERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. As noted on drawings or equal.

2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.3 COMPONENTS

A. Manhole Steps: Formed FRP rungs; 3/4 inch diameter. Formed integral with manhole sections.

B. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 03 30 00 leveled top surfaces.


2.4 CONFIGURATION

A. Shaft Construction: Concentric with eccentric cone top section; lipped male/female dry joints; sleeved to receive pipe sections.

B. Shape: Cylindrical.

C. Clear Inside Dimensions: As required.

D. Design Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Clear Cover Opening: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Pipe Entry: Furnish openings as indicated on Drawings.

G. Steps: 12 inches wide, 16 inches on center vertically, set into manhole wall.

2.5 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS

A. Bedding: As shown on drawings.

2.6 FINISHING - STEEL

A. Galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M; hot dip galvanize after fabrication.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify items provided by other sections of Work are properly sized and located.

C. Verify built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into Work.

D. Verify correct size of manhole excavation.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves required by other sections.

B. Do not install structures where site conditions induce loads exceeding structural capacity of structures.

C. Inspect precast concrete structures immediately prior to placement in excavation to verify structures are internally clean and free from damage. Remove and replace damaged units.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Excavation and Backfill: 1. Excavate for manholes in accordance with Section 31 23 16 in location and to

depth shown. Provide clearance around sidewalls of structure for construction operations.

2. When groundwater is encountered, prevent accumulation of water in excavations. Place manholes in dry trench.

3. Where possibility exists of watertight structure becoming buoyant in flooded excavation, anchor structure to avoid flotation.

B. Place base pad, trowel top surface level.

C. Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations, anchor to base pad.

D. Backfill excavations for manholes in accordance with Section 31 23 16.

E. Form and place manhole cylinder plumb and level, to correct dimensions and elevations.

F. Cut and fit for pipe.

G. Grout base of shaft sections to achieve slope to exit piping. Trowel smooth. Contour to form continuous drainage channel as indicated on Drawings.

H. Set cover frames and covers level without tipping, to correct elevations.

I. Coordinate with other sections of Work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

3.4 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. Lift precast components at lifting points designated by manufacturer.

B. When lowering manholes into excavations and joining pipe to units, take precautions to ensure interior of pipeline and structure remains clean.

C. Set precast structures bearing firmly and fully on crushed stone bedding, compacted in accordance with provisions of Section 31 23 16 or on other support system shown on Drawings.

D. Assemble multi-section structures by lowering each section into excavation. Lower, set level, and firmly position base section before placing additional sections.

E. Remove foreign materials from joint surfaces and verify sealing materials are placed properly. Maintain alignment between sections by using guide devices affixed to lower section.

F. Joint sealing materials may be installed on site or at manufacturer’s plant.

G. Verify manholes installed satisfy required alignment and grade.


H. Remove knockouts or cut structure to receive piping without creating openings larger than required to receive pipe. Fill annular space with mortar.

I. Cut pipe to finish flush with interior of structure.

J. Shape inverts through manhole as shown on Drawings.

3.5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. Prepare crushed stone bedding or other support system shown on Drawings, to receive base slab as specified for precast structures.

B. Erect and brace forms against movement in accordance with Section 03 10 00.

C. Install reinforcing steel as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with Section 03 20 00.

D. Place and cure concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

3.6 FRAME AND COVER INSTALLATION

A. Set frames using mortar and masonry. Install radially laid concrete brick with 1/4 inch thick vertical joints at inside perimeter. Lay concrete brick in full bed of mortar and completely fill joints. Where more than one course of concrete brick is required, stagger vertical joints.

B. Set frame and cover 2 inches above finished grade for manholes with covers located within unpaved areas to allow area to be graded away from cover beginning 1 inch below top surface of frame.



B. Test concrete manhole and structure sections in accordance with ASTM C497.

C. Test cast-in-place concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

D. Vertical Adjustment of Existing Manholes: 1. Where required, adjust top elevation of existing manholes to finished grades

shown on Drawings. 2. Reset existing frames, grates and covers, carefully removed, cleaned of mortar

fragments, to required elevation in accordance with requirements specified for installation of castings.

3. Remove concrete without damaging existing vertical reinforcing bars when removal of existing concrete wall is required. Clean vertical bars of concrete and bend into new concrete top slab or splice to required vertical reinforcement, as indicated Drawings.

4. Clean and apply sand-cement bonding compound on existing concrete surfaces to receive cast-in-place concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00.


END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [33 11 16] - 1 - Site Water Distribution Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 33 11 16

SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe and fittings for site water line including domestic water line and fire water

line. 2. Valves. 3. Hydrants. 4. Positive displacement meters. 5. Backflow preventers. 6. Underground pipe markers. 7. Precast concrete vault. 8. Bedding and cover materials.

1.2 REFERENCES



B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings.

C. American Society of Sanitary Engineering: 1. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent. 2. ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers.

D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 3. ASTM C858 - Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility

Structures. 4. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics



6. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

7. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.

8. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.


9. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.

10. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

11. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

12. ASTM D3035 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter.

13. ASTM D3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.

E. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.

F. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C104 - American National Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for

Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for

Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. 3. AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for

Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 4. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally

Cast, for Water. 5. AWWA C500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 6. AWWA C502 - Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants. 7. AWWA C504 - Rubber-Sealed Butterfly Valves. 8. AWWA C508 - Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 in. (50 mm)

Through 24 in. (600 mm) NPS. 9. AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply Service. 10. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their

Appurtenances. 11. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 12. AWWA C700 - Cold-Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case. 13. AWWA C701 - Cold-Water Meters - Turbine Type, for Customer Service. 14. AWWA C702 - Cold-Water Meters - Compound Type. 15. AWWA C706 - Direct-Reading, Remote-Registration Systems for Cold-Water

Meters. 16. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 in. through 12 in., for

Water Distribution. 17. AWWA C901 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 in. through 3

in., for Water Service. 18. AWWA M6 - Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance.

G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 246 - Hydrants for Fire - Protection Service.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. None required.




B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, thrust restraints, and invert elevations.

C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.


A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

B. Perform Work in accordance with local standard.



B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER PIPING

A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151: 1. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods. 3. Jackets: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket 10 mil polyethylene tape.

B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K annealed: 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper. 2. Joints: Compression connection or AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze.

C. PVC Pipe: AWWA C900 Class 100: 1. Fittings: AWWA C111, cast iron. 2. Joints: ASTM D3139 compression gasket ring.

2.2 GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Mueller 2. Kennedy Valve 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Brass or Bronze body, non-rising stem, inside screw, single wedge or disc, compression ends, with control rod, post indicator, extension box.


C. 3 inches and Larger: AWWA C500, Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with square nut, single wedge, flanged ends, control rod, post indicator, extension box.

2.3 BALL VALVES


B. 2 inches and Smaller: Brass body, Teflon coated brass ball, rubber seats and stem seals, Tee stem pre-drilled for control rod, AWWA compression inlet end, compression outlet with electrical ground connector, with control rod, extension box.

2.4 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Mueller 2. Kennedy Valve 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

B. 2 inches to 24 inches: AWWA C508, iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.

2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES


B. 2 inches to 24 inches: AWWA C504, iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat, water or lug ends, ten position lever handle.

2.6 HYDRANT


B. Hydrant: In accordance with utility company requirements.

C. Hydrant Extensions: Fabricate in multiples of 6 inches with rod and coupling to increase barrel length.

D. Hose and Streamer Connection: Match sizes and type of thread with fire department, two hose nozzles, one pumper nozzle.

E. Finish: Primer and two coats of enamel color in accordance with utility company requirements.


2.7 POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT METERS

A. Furnish materials in accordance with utility company standards.


A. Furnish materials in accordance with local standards.

2.9 UNDERGROUND PIPE MARKERS

A. Plastic Ribbon Tape: Bright colored, continuously printed, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

B. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Water Service" in large letters.

2.10 PRECAST CONCRETE VAULT


B. Product Description: Precast vault designed in accordance with ASTM C858, comprising modular, interlocking sections complete with accessories.

C. Size to be determined by its contents and ability to change out equipment. Contractor to verify actual size based on contents.


A. Bedding: Fill Type A3 as specified in Section 31 05 16.

B. Cover: Fill Type A3, as specified in Section 31 05 16.

C. Soil Backfill from Above Pipe to Finish Grade: Soil Type S2, as specified in Section 31 05 13. Subsoil with no rocks over 3 inches in diameter, frozen earth or foreign matter.]

2.12 ACCESSORIES

A. Concrete for Thrust Restraints: Concrete type specified in Section 03 30 00.

B. Opening as noted on drawing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Verify building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 BEDDING

A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 23 17 for Work of this Section.

B. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at change of pipe direction. Place concrete to permit full access to pipe and pipe accessories. Provide trust restraints as shown in details.

C. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent.

D. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe in accordance with Section 31 23 23.

E. Place fill material in accordance with Section 31 23 23.

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE

A. Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping in accordance with local code or as shown on drawings, whichever is stricter.

B. Group piping with other site piping work whenever practical.

C. Install pipe to indicated elevation to within tolerance of 5/8 inches.

D. Install ductile iron piping and fittings to AWWA C600.

E. Route pipe in straight line.

F. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.

G. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed under Section 33 13 00.

H. Form and place concrete for thrust restraints at each elbow or change of direction of pipe main.

I. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 5 feet of cover.

J. Install plastic ribbon tape continuous over top of pipe buried 12 inches below finish grade, above pipe line; coordinate with Sections 31 23 23 and 31 23 17.


K. Install trace wire continuous over top of non-metallic pipe buried 6 inches above pipe line; coordinate with Section 31 23 23 and 31 23 17.

L. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 31 23 23.

3.5 INSTALLATION - VALVES AND HYDRANTS

A. Set valves on solid bearing.

B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade.

C. Set hydrants plumb; locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to and facing roadway.

D. Set hydrants to grade, with nozzles at least 20 inches above ground.

E. Locate control valve 4 inches away from hydrant.

F. Provide drainage pit 36 inches square by 24 inches deep filled with 2 inches washed gravel. Encase elbow of hydrant in gravel to 6 inches above drain opening. Do not connect drain opening to sewer.

G. Install Work in accordance with local standards.

3.6 INSTALLATION - METERS

A. Install Work in accordance with local standards.

3.7 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Install water service in accordance with utility company requirements that may include backflow preventers, water meter with by-pass valves, etc.

B. Install water meter and backflow preventer in concrete vault located on site as shown on drawings.

C. Install water service to 5 feet of building. Connect to building water service. Refer to Section 22 11 00.

D. Install Work in accordance with local standards.

3.8 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Flush and disinfect system in accordance with Section 33 13 00.



B. Perform pressure test on domestic site water distribution system in accordance with local standards.


C. Compaction Testing for Bedding: In accordance with ASTM D1557.

D. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [33 12 13] - 1 - Water Service Connections Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 33 12 13

WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe and fittings for domestic water service connections to buildings. 2. Corporation stop assembly. 3. Curb stop assembly. 4. Meter setting equipment. 5. Water meters. 6. Backflow preventers. 7. Underground pipe markers. 8. Precast concrete vault. 9. Bedding and cover materials.

1.2 REFERENCES



B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings.

C. American Society of Sanitary Engineering: 1. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent. 2. ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers.

D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal

Castings. 3. ASTM C858 - Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility

Structures. 4. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics



6. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

7. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.


8. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.




E. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.

F. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their

Appurtenances. 2. AWWA C700 - Cold-Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case. 3. AWWA C701 - Cold-Water Meters - Turbine Type, for Customer Service. 4. AWWA C702 - Cold-Water Meters - Compound Type. 5. AWWA C706 - Direct-Reading, Remote-Registration Systems for Cold-Water

Meters. 6. AWWA C800 - Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings. 7. AWWA C901 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 in. through 3

in., for Water Service. 8. AWWA M6 - Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for precast concrete vaults to include detail drawings showing the vault and accessories.

C. Product Data: Submit data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, corporation stop assemblies, curb stop assemblies, meters, meter setting equipment, service saddles, backflow preventer, and accessories.



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, curb stops, connections, thrust restraints, and invert elevations.



A. Perform Work in accordance with utility company standards.




B. During loading, transporting, and unloading of materials and products, exercise care to prevent any damage.

C. Store products and materials off ground and under protective coverings and custody, away from walls and in manner to keep these clean and in good condition until used.

D. Exercise care in handling precast concrete products to avoid chipping, cracking, and breakage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER PIPING AND FITTINGS

A. Polyethylene Pipe: AWWA C901: 1. Fittings: AWWA C901, molded. 2. Joints: Compression.

2.2 CORPORATION STOP ASSEMBLY


B. Corporation Stops: 1. Brass or red brass alloy body conforming to ASTM B62. 2. Inlet end threaded for tapping according to AWWA C800. 3. Outlet end suitable for service pipe specified.

C. Service Saddles: 1. Double strap type, designed to hold pressures in excess pipe working pressure.

2.3 CURB STOP ASSEMBLY


B. Curb Stops: 1. Brass or red brass alloy body conforming to ASTM B62. 2. Plug type valve. 3. Positive pressure sealing.

C. Curb Boxes and Covers: 1. Cast iron body, Extension Type or Buffalo Type. 2. Minneapolis or Arch Pattern Base. 3. Lid with inscription WATER, with Pentagon Plug.


2.4 METER SETTING EQUIPMENT


B. Outside Meter Setting: 1. Meter Yokes: Copper or iron, riser type assembly with bronze inlet inverted key

angle valve expansion type outlet connection and Ell fitting; flared copper tubing connections both ends.

2. Meter Yokes: Copper or iron, inlet and outlet horizontal or vertical setting with matching couplings, fittings and stops.

2.5 WATER METERS

A. Furnish materials in accordance with utility company.



B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 1. Comply with ASSE 1013. 2. Bronze body, with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs. 3. Two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type

differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve opening under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.

C. Double Check Valve Assemblies: Comply with ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent.



B. Plastic Ribbon Tape: Bright colored, continuously printed, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

C. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with “Water Service” in large letters.



B. Product Description: Precast vault designed in accordance with ASTM C858, comprising modular, interlocking sections complete with accessories.

C. Vault as shown on drawings and size capable of enclosing all fittings required and room for maintenance on fittings.



A. Bedding: Fill Type A3 as specified in Section 31 05 16.

B. Cover: Fill Type A3, as specified in Section 31 13 16.

C. Soil Backfill from Above Pipe to Finish Grade: Soil Type S1, as specified in Section 31 05 13. Subsoil with no rocks over 3 inches in diameter, frozen earth or foreign matter.

2.10 ACCESSORIES


B. Access way: As shown on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 INSTALLATION - CORPORATION STOP ASSEMBLY

A. Make connection for each different kind of water main using suitable materials, equipment and methods approved by the local utility.

B. Provide service clamps for mains other than of cast iron or ductile iron mains.

C. Screw corporation stops directly into tapped and threaded iron main at 10 and 2 o'clock position on main's circumference; locate corporation stops at least 12 inches apart longitudinally and staggered.

D. For plastic pipe water mains, provide full support for service clamp for full circumference of pipe, with minimum 2 inches width of bearing area; exercise care against crushing or causing other damage to water mains at time of tapping or installing service clamp or corporation stop.


E. Use proper seals or other devices so no leaks are left in water mains at points of tapping; do not backfill and cover service connection until approved by the local utility.

3.4 BEDDING

A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 23 17 for Work of this Section.

B. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent.

C. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe in accordance with Section 31 23 23.

D. Place fill material in accordance with Section 31 23 23.

3.5 INSTALLATION - PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping in accordance with drawings or local code whichever is strictest.

B. Group piping with other site piping work whenever practical.

C. Route pipe in straight line.

D. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.

E. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed under Section 33 13 00.

F. Form and place concrete for thrust restraints at each elbow or change of direction of pipe main.

G. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 5 feet of cover.

H. Install plastic ribbon tape buried 6 inches below finish grade, above pipe line; coordinate with Section 31 23 23.

I. Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe above pipe line; coordinate with Section 31 23 23.

J. Install Work in accordance with local standards.

3.6 INSTALLATION - CURB STOP ASSEMBLY

A. Set curb stops on solid bearing.

B. Install Work in accordance with local standards.

3.7 INSTALLATION - WATER METERS

A. Install Work in accordance with utility standards.


3.8 INSTALLATION - BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Install backflow preventer where indicated on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Comply with local water company requirements and plumbing codes in regards to testing and installation requirements.

3.9 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Install water service in accordance with utility company requirements.

B. Install water meter and backflow preventer in concrete vault located on site. Refer to drawings, utility requirements, and local standards.

C. Install water service to 5 feet of building. Connect to building water service. Refer to Section 22 11 00.



A. Construct valve vaults of precast or poured in place concrete as shown on drawings. Verify correct size to house all components per local utility standards.

B. Seal vault joints watertight with preformed plastic joint sealant compound. Apply asphalt waterproofing to exterior walls.

C. Seal annular space between pipe and wall sleeves as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. Install vault covers and frames; adjust to finished grade elevation.



B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

C. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. Perform pressure test on domestic site water distribution system in accordance with local standards.

E. Compaction Testing for Bedding: In accordance with ASTM D1557.

F. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.


END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [33 12 16] - 1 - Water Utility Distribution Valves Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 33 12 16

WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Valves. 2. Valve boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 2. AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply Service. 3. AWWA C550 - Protecting Epoxy Interior Coating for Valves and Hydrants. 4. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their

Appurtenances.

B. National Sanitation Foundation: 1. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. None required



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.

C. Provide Operation and Maintenance Data for valves.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years’ experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years’ experience and approved by local authorities.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing and protecting products.


B. Prepare valves and accessories for shipment according to AWWA Standards and seal valve and ends to prevent entry of foreign matter into product body.

C. Store products in areas protected from weather, moisture, or possible damage; do not store products directly on ground; handle products to prevent damage to interior or exterior surfaces.



B. Conduct operations not to interfere with, interrupt, damage, destroy, or endanger integrity of surface or subsurface structures or utilities, and landscape in immediate or adjacent areas.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

B. Coordinate work with local standards and utilities within construction area.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for maintenance materials.

B. Furnish one tee wrench to Owner; required length.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DOUBLE-DISC GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Mueller Company 2. Clow Eddy - Iowa 3. American Flow Control 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Double-Disc Gate Valves: AWWA C500, NSF 61; iron body, bronze trim. 1. Gate: Double disc parallel seat gate. 2. Stem: Non-rising stem. 3. Seals: O-ring stems seals. 4. Operating Nut: Square; open counterclockwise unless otherwise indicated. 5. Ends: Flanged, mechanical joint or bell end connections. 6. Coating: AWWA C550; interior and exterior. 7. Provide valves 16 inch diameter and larger with bypass valves and gear

operators. 8. Sizes 12 inches diameter and smaller: 200 psig. 9. Sizes 14 inches diameter and larger: 150 psig.


2.2 RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Mueller Company 2. Clow Eddy - Iowa 3. American Flow Control 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Resilient Wedge Gate Valves: AWWA C509; iron body, bronze or ductile iron. 1. Resilient seats. 2. Stem: Non-rising bronze stem. 3. Operating Nut: Square; open counterclockwise unless otherwise indicated. 4. Ends: Flanged, mechanical joint or bell end connections. 5. Coating: AWWA C550; interior/exterior. 6. Sizes 12 inch diameter and smaller: 200 psig. 7. Sizes 16 inch diameter and larger: 150 psig.

2.3 VALVE BOXES

A. 12 inch diameter Valves and Smaller: Domestic cast iron, two-piece, screw type.

B. Valves larger than 12 inch diameter: Domestic cast iron, three-piece, screw type; round base.

C. Cast iron lid marked "Water".

2.4 ACCESSORIES


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Determine exact location and size of valves from Drawings; obtain clarification and directions from Architect/Engineer prior to execution of work.

C. Verify invert elevations prior to excavation and installation of valves.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum locations.

B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities to remain from damage.

C. Do not interrupt existing utilities without permission and without making arrangements to provide temporary utility services.


1. Notify Owner not less than 7 days in advance of proposed utility interruption. 2. Do not proceed without written permission from the local utility.

D. Perform trench excavation, backfilling and compaction in accordance with Section 31 23 17.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install valves in conjunction with pipe laying; set valves plumb.

B. Install Work in accordance with local standards.




A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

B. Perform pressure test on domestic site water distribution system in accordance with AWWA C600.

END OF SECTION

09/13/2016 18-700-060-1 [33 12 19] - 1 - Water Utility Distribution Fire Hydrants Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 33 12 19

WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FIRE HYDRANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fire hydrants.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C502 - Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants. 2. AWWA C503 - Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants. 3. AWWA C550 - Protecting Epoxy Interior Coating for Valves and Hydrants. 4. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their

Appurtenances.

B. National Sanitation Foundation: 1. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects

C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 281 - Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of

Hydrants

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. None required


A. Provide uniform color scheme for fire hydrants in accordance with NFPA 281.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years’ experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years’ experience.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing and protecting products.


B. Prepare hydrants and accessories for shipment according to AWWA Standards and seal hydrant and ends to prevent entry of foreign matter into product body.

C. Store products in areas protected from weather, moisture, or possible damage; do not store products directly on ground; handle products to prevent damage to interior or exterior surfaces.



B. Conduct operations not to interfere with, interrupt, damage, destroy, or endanger integrity of surface or subsurface structures or utilities, and landscape in immediate or adjacent areas.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

B. Coordinate work with local standards and utilities within construction area.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Mueller Company 2. Clow Eddy - Iowa 3. American Flow Control 4. Or equal. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Dry-barrel Break-away Type: AWWA C502; cast-iron body, compression type valve. 1. Bury Depth: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Inlet Connection: 6 inches. 3. Valve Opening: 5-1/4 inches diameter. 4. Ends: Mechanical Joint or Bell End. 5. Bolts and Nuts: Corrosion resistant. 6. Coating: AWWA C550; interior. 7. Direction of Opening: Counterclockwise unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wet-Barrel Type: AWWA C503; cast-iron body. 1. Valve Openings: Individual for pumper and hose nozzles. 2. Ends: Mechanical joint or bell end. 3. Bolts and Nuts: Corrosion resistant. 4. Coating: AWWA C550; interior.

D. One pumper, two hose nozzles.


1. Obtain thread type and size from local fire department. 2. Attach nozzle caps by separate chains.

E. Finish: Primer and two coats of enamel color in accordance with utility company requirements.

2.2 ACCESSORIES


B. Aggregate: Aggregate for hydrant drainage specified in Section 32 11 23.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Determine exact location and size of hydrants from Drawings; obtain clarification and directions from Architect/Engineer prior to execution of work.

C. Verify invert elevations of existing work prior to excavation and installation of fire hydrants.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum locations.

B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities to remain from damage.

C. Do not interrupt existing utilities without permission and without making arrangements to provide temporary utility services. 1. Notify Owner not less than 7 days in advance of proposed utility interruption. 2. Do not proceed without written permission from the Architect/Engineer.

D. Perform trench excavation, backfilling and compaction in accordance with Section 31 23 17.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fire hydrants; provide support blocking and drainage gravel; do not block drain hole.

B. Set hydrants plumb with pumper nozzle facing roadway; set hydrants with centerline of pumper nozzle 18 inches above finished grade and safety flange not more than 6 inches nor less than 2 inches above grade.

C. Paint hydrants in accordance with local color scheme.







B. Perform pressure test on domestic site water distribution system in accordance with AWWA C600.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [33 13 00] - 1 - Disinfection of Water Distribution Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 33 13 00

DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes disinfection of potable water distribution system; and testing and reporting results.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit procedures, proposed chemicals, and treatment levels for review.

C. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements.

D. Certificate: Certify cleanliness of water distribution system meets or exceeds specified requirements.



B. Disinfection Report: 1. Type and form of disinfectant used. 2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 3. Test locations. 4. Name of person collecting samples. 5. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in treated water in ppm for each outlet

tested. 6. Date and time of flushing start and completion. 7. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested.

C. Bacteriological Report: 1. Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and telephone

number. 2. Time and date of water sample collection. 3. Name of person collecting samples. 4. Test locations. 5. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested.


7. Certify water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards of authority having jurisdiction.

D. Water Quality Certificate: Certify water conforms to quality standards of authority having jurisdiction, suitable for human consumption.


A. Perform Work in accordance with AWWA C651.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS

A. Calcium Hypochlorite shall contain 70% available chlorine by weight. Table or granular forms are acceptable.

B. Sodium Hypochlorite shall be supplied in strengths ranging from a minimum of 5% to a maximum of 16%. Product shall be supplied in manufacturer's containers and shall not have undergone any significant deterioration.

C. Liquid Chlorine shall be used only when suitable equipment is available and only under the supervision of a person familiar with the physiological, chemical, and physical properties of this element.

D. Use of any other agent must be approved by the Owner prior to execution.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify piping system has been cleaned, inspected, and pressure tested.

C. Perform scheduling and disinfecting activity with start-up, water pressure testing, adjusting and balancing, demonstration procedures, including coordination with related systems.

3.2 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURE

A. After pressure and leakage tests have been completed, all units shall be thoroughly flushed to remove all foreign material. Entrapped air shall be released at high points and the unit shall be completely filled with water to allow the disinfection agent to come in contact with all interior surfaces. In the event that complete venting cannot be accomplished through available outlets, the Contractor shall furnish and install necessary corporation cocks and vent piping, at his own expense.


3.3 CHLORINE PREPARATION

A. Liquid Chlorine - A chlorine gas-water solution shall be applied by means of a solution-feed chlorinating device, or, if approved by the Architect/Engineer, the dry gas may be fed directly through proper devices for regulating the rate of flow and providing effective diffusion of the gas into the water within the unit being treated. Chlorinating devices for feeding solutions of the chlorine gas shall provide means to prevent the backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder.

B. Calcium Hypochlorite - Granular calcium hypochlorite shall be prepared as a water mixture before introduction into the unit. The dry powder shall first be made into a past and then thinned to approximately a one percent chlorine solution. To prepare a one percent chlorine solution, add one pound of calcium hypochlorite to 7-1/2 gallons of water.

C. Sodium Hypochlorite - Water solution shall be prepared by adding hypochlorite to water.

3.4 CHLORINE APPLICATION

A. Point of Application - Chlorinating agent shall be applied at the supply end of the unit being disinfected. For pipes, disinfectant shall be applied through a corporation cock installed in the top of the pipe.

B. Rate of Application - Water shall be introduced at a controlled rate in order to regulate the chlorine dosage. The rate of chlorine mixture flow shall be proportioned to the rate of water entering the unit so the chlorine dose applied shall produce at least 50-mg/l chlorine residual after a period of 24 hours. The Consultant shall approve the method of determining the rate of flow of water into the unit being disinfected.

C. Isolating Systems - Valves shall be manipulated to keep the strong chlorine solution and/or contaminated water from flowing into units that have been previously chlorinated and/or flushed.

D. Quality - The chlorinated water shall be retained in the unit long enough to destroy all nonspore-forming bacteria. The minimum retention period shall be 24 hours with chlorine residual at the end of this period of not less than 50 mg/l (ppm).

E. Disinfecting Valves - All valves and appurtenances shall be operated while the line or unit is being disinfected to insure that all surfaces of the valves are disinfected.

F. Swabbing - Disinfection of pipe, fittings or valves that must be placed in service immediately shall be accomplished by thoroughly flushing and swabbing with a 5 percent solution of calcium hypochlorite immediately prior to assembly. Approval must be secured from the Designer before this method of disinfection will be accepted.

G. Final Flushing and Test - Following chlorination, the unit shall be flushed with potable water until the replacement water in the system is proven to be comparable in quality to the water which will enter that unit or system. This acceptable condition of


water delivered by each unit or system shall continue for at least two days, as demonstrated by laboratory bacteriological examination of samples. Laboratory tests shall also show chlorine residual after final flushing of less than one mg/l (ppm).

H. Repetition of Flushing and Testing - If the initial treatment results in an unsatisfactory bacteria test, disinfection shall be repeated by the Contractor at no additional cost until satisfactory bacteriological test results are obtained.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [33 31 00] - 1 - Sanitary Sewer System Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 33 31 00

SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sanitary sewage pipe. 2. Underground pipe markers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,

Using Rubber Gaskets. 2. ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic

Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications. 3. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 4. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining

Plastic Pipe.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill operations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data indicating pipe material used and pipe accessories.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.



B. Project Record Documents: Record location of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts, and invert elevations.





1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements and elevations are as indicated.

1.8 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate the Work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building, connection to municipal sewer utility service, and trenching.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY SEWAGE PIPE

A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe 1. Sanitary sewer PVC pipe and fittings less than 18 inches in diameter shall be in

accordance with the requirements of ASTM D3034, Type PSM, with a maximum SDR of 35 and elastomeric gasket joints.

2. Elastomeric gasket joints shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D3212.

3. Elastomeric seals (gaskets) shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM F477.


A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton Name Plate Corp. 2. Allen Systems, Inc. 3. Emed Co., Inc. 4. Linetec, Inc. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Underground-Type Plastic Line Markers: Manufacturer's standard permanent bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape with metallic lining, intended for direct burial service, not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Provide green tape with black printing reading "Caution Sewer Line Buried Below".

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and personnel required to make all test including weirs, pipe stoppers, air compressor, air storage tank, pressure regulating valves, pressure gauges, stopwatch, etc., Contractor shall take precautions necessary, including blocking of stoppers or plugs, to protect the safety of property and personnel.


B. Contractor shall provide groundwater gauges, wells or other means as required to measure the groundwater level. Such gauges, wells or other means shall be removed by Contractor after testing unless otherwise directed by the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on drawings.

3.2 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Before installing piping, the Contractor shall carefully verify location, depth, type of joint needed and size of pipe to which connection is proposed. He shall assure himself that the lines can be run as contemplated without interfering with footings, walls, other piping, fixtures, etc. Any necessary deviation shall be referred to the A/E in writing for final approval before lines are run.

B. All lengths of pipe shall be dimensioned accurately to measurements established at the site and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Cut sections of pipe shall be reamed to remove all burrs.

C. Utmost care shall be exercised in transporting and handling all pipe, fittings, valves, etc., in order to avoid shock and damage to pipe and coatings. Lifting’s shall be hoist or skids when hand lifting is not feasible. Dropping will not be permitted. Pipe handled on skidways must not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Damaged or defective pipe and appurtenances shall be replaced.

D. Pipe laying shall proceed upgrade with the spigot ends of bell and spigot pipe pointing in the direction of flow. Each pipe shall be laid accurately to the line and grade shown on the Drawings. Pipe shall be laid and centered so that the sewer has a uniform invert. As the work progresses, the interior of the sewer shall be cleared of all superfluous materials.

E. Before making pipe joints, all surfaces of the portions of the pipe to be joined shall be clean and dry. Lubricants, primers, and adhesives shall be used as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. The joints shall then be placed, fitted, joined, and adjusted so as to obtain the degree of water tightness required.

F. The Contractor shall cut all pipe and drill all holes that may be necessary.

G. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings. Bending pipe is prohibited. Any transition from one pipe size to another shall be made with a reducing fitting. Reducing bushings are prohibited except where specifically called for on the Drawings or unless approved by the A/E.


3.3 INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION

A. During backfilling of pipe lines, install continuous underground type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6" to 8" below finished grade.

3.4 TEMPORARY PLUGS

A. Installed piping systems shall be temporarily plugged at the end of each day's work or other interruption to progress on a given line. Plugging shall be installed in a manner satisfactory to the Designer, and it shall be adequate to prevent entry of animals into the pipe or the entrance or insertion of deleterious materials.

B. Standard plugs shall be inserted into all dead-end pipes, tees, or crossings; spigot ends shall be capped; flanged ends shall have blind flanges of sheet metal or plywood.

C. Plugs installed for pressure testing shall be fully secured and blocked to withstand the test pressure.

D. Where plugging is required because of contract division or phasing for later connection, the ends of such lines shall be equipped with a permanent type plug or blind flange. Installation or removal of such plugging shall be considered incidental to the Work.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D2321.

B. Push-On Joints: All foreign matter shall be wiped off the mating surfaces of the compression joint. The surfaces should then be coated with a lubricating material furnished by the pipe manufacturer to overcome the frictional resistance. Joint assembly shall then be completed by forcing the plain end of the entering pipe into the bell end of the preceding pipe section.



B. Source and quality of water, test procedures, and disposal of water or other fluid shall be approved by the Owner.

C. All tests shall be made in the presence of the local utility. Preliminary tests made by the Contractor without being observed by the local utility will not be accepted. Notify the local utility at least 48 hours before any work is to be inspected or tested.

D. All defects in piping systems shall be repaired and/or replaced and retested until acceptable to the local utility. Repairs shall be made to the standard of quality specified for the entire system.

E. Sections of the system may be tested separately, but any defect that may develop in a section previously tested and accepted shall be promptly corrected and retested.


F. All leaks discovered within one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the work by the Owner shall be located, repaired and retested by the Contractor, regardless of the total line leakage rate, at no additional cost to the Owner.

G. Deflection testing shall be performed for all installed flexible sewer piping, except for house service piping. Flexible piping includes PVC piping.

3.7 GRAVITY SEWER LEAKAGE TESTING

A. Flush all lines with water prior to testing. The minimum flushing velocity shall be 2.5 fps.

B. Infiltration Test: 1. When the groundwater level is two (2) feet or more above the crown of the entire

pipe length, an infiltration test shall be made by sealing off a length of sewer and measuring the depth of flow over a measuring weir, or by pumping the infiltrated water into containers for measurement. Tests shall be conducted for a minimum of four (4) hours. Infiltration leakage shall not exceed 200 gallons per 24 hours, per inch diameter, per mile of sewer.

C. Exfiltration Test: 1. When the grounds water level is less than two (2) feet above the crown of the

entire pipe length, the sewer shall be tested for leakage by exfiltration. Exfiltration leakage test shall consist of isolating the particular section and filling it with water to a point at least two (2) feet above the crown of the pipe at the upper manhole or at least two (2) feet above the groundwater level at the upper manhole, whichever is higher, and allowing it to stand not less than four (4) hours. The section shall then be refilled with water up to the original point and after four (4) hours the drop in water surface shall be measured. The water level must not drop more than six (6) inches during the test. If the water level drops more than six (6) inches during the test, then a measured volume of water is to be added during the test to raise the water level to the starting elevation. The computed leakage shall not exceed 200 gallons per 24 hours, per inch diameter, per mile of sewer.

D. Air Test: 1. Air tests are acceptable in lieu of infiltration/exfiltration testing. The sewer line

to be tested shall be tested in increments between manholes. The line shall be sealed at each end. The seal at one end shall have an orifice through which to pass air into the pipe. An air supply shall be connected to the orifice at one end of the line. The air supply line shall contain an on-off gas valve and a pressure gauge having a range of from 0 to 10 PSI. The gauge shall have minimum division of 0.10 PSI and shall have an accuracy of + 0.04 PSI.

2. The pipeline under test shall be pressurized to 4 PSIG. The line shall be allowed to stabilize between 4 PSIG and 3.4 PSIG for a period of no less than 5 minutes. If necessary, air shall be added to the line to maintain the pressure above 3.5 PSIG. After the stabilization period, the gas valve shall be closed. When the line pressure drops to 3.5 PSIG, commence timing with a stopwatch.


The stopwatch shall be allowed to run until such time as the line pressure drops to 2.5 PSIG. Then the watch shall be stopped and the time lapse compared with the allowable time lapse shown.

Nominal Pipe Size, In.

T(time) Min/100 ft.

Nominal Pipe Size, In.

T(time) Min/100 ft.

3

0.2

21

3.0

4

0.3

24

3.6

6

0.7

27

4.2

8

1.2

30

4.8

10

1.5

33

5.4

12

1.8

36

6.0

15

2.1

39

6.6

18

2.4

42

7.3

3. If the time lapse is greater than that specified, the section undergoing tests shall

have passed. If the time is less than that specified, the line has not passed the test and the Subcontractor shall be required to make all repairs and retests. If the pipeline to be tested is beneath the groundwater level, the test pressure shall be increased 0.433 PSI for each foot the underground level is above the average crown elevation of the pipe.

E. Repair: 1. When leakage occurs in excess of the specified limits, defective pipe or joints

shall be located and repaired. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove and reconstruct as much of the original work as necessary to obtain a sewer test within the allowable leakage limits.

3.8 DEFLECTION TESTING

A. A deflection test shall be performed on the entire length of installed flexible sewer piping upon the completion of all work, including the leakage test, backfill, and placement of any fill, grading, paving, concrete, or superimposed loads.

B. Deflection shall be determined by use of a deflection device or by use of a spherical, spheroidal, or elliptical ball, a cylinder, or circular sections fused to a common shaft.

C. The ball cylinder, or circular sections shall meet the following requirements: 1. Have a diameter, or minor diameter as applicable, of 95 percent of the normal

inside diameter of the pipe. A tolerance of plus 0.5 percent will be permitted.


2. The ball, cylinder, or circular sections shall be of a homogeneous material throughout, shall have a density greater than 1.0 as related to water at 39.2EF, and shall have a surface brinell hardness of not less than 150.

3. The ball, cylinder, or circular sections shall be center bored and through bolted with a 1/4-inch minimum diameter steel shaft having a yield strength of 70,000 psi or more, with eyes at each end for attaching pulling cables. The eyes (or loops) shall be suitably backed with flange or heavy washer such that a pull exerted on the opposite end of the shaft shall produce compression throughout the remote end of the ball, cylinder or circular sections.

4. Circular sections shall be so spaced that the distance from the external faces of the front and back sections shall equal or exceed the diameter of the circular sections.

D. Failure of the ball, cylinder, or circular sections to pass freely through a pipe run, either by being pulled through or by being flushed through with water, shall be cause for rejection of that run.

E. When a deflection device is used for the test in lieu of the ball, cylinder, or circular sections, such device shall be approved by the Owner prior to use. The device shall be sensitive to 1.0 percent of the diameter of the pipe being measured and shall be accurate to 1.0 percent of the indicated dimension.

F. Installed pipe showing deflections of 5.0 percent of the normal diameter of the pipe or more shall be retested by a run from the opposite directions. If the retest indicates a deflection in excess of 5.0 percent, the suspect pipe shall be rejected.

G. Any pipe showing deflections in excess of 5 percent within one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the work by the Owner shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

H. All rejected sewer pipe due to excessive deflection shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.



B. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [33 41 00] - 1 - Storm Drainage Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 33 41 00

STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Storm drainage piping. 2. Accessories. 3. Underground pipe markers. 4. Catch basins and plant area drains. 5. Cleanouts. 6. Bedding and cover materials.

1.2 REFERENCES


Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop. 2. AASHTO M330 – Standard Specification for Polypropylene Pipe, 300- to 1500-

mm (12- to 60-in) Diameter.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and

Culvert Pipe. 2. ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm

Drain, and Sewer Pipe. 3. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,

Using Rubber Gaskets. 4. ASTM C924 - Standard Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-

Pressure Air Test Method. 5. ASTM C969 - Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance

Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines. 6. ASTM C1103 - Standard Practice for Joint Acceptance Testing of Installed

Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines. 7. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics



9. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

10. ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.

11. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.


12. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

13. ASTM D2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.




17. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

18. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. None required.


A. Perform Work in accordance with local utility and INDOT standards.

1.5 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate the Work with termination of storm sewer connection outside building, trenching, and connection to municipal sewer utility service.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76, Class III nominal diameter as shown on the drawings. 1. Fittings: Reinforced concrete. 2. Joints: ASTM C443, rubber compression gasket.

B. Corrugated High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe: all corrugated high density polyethylene storm sewer pipe and fittings shall have a smooth interior. Diameters 12 inch to 36 inch shall conform to AASHTO M294 type S; 8 and 10 inch diameters shall meet the strength requirements of AASHTO M252 with the addition that the pipe have a smooth interior liner. Material shall conform to ASTM C3350. 1. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published installation

guide.

C. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2751, SDR 35, Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) material; inside nominal diameter of that shown on the drawings, bell and spigot style solvent sealed ends.


1. Fittings: ABS. 2. Joints: ASTM D2235, solvent weld.

D. Polypropylene (PP) Pipe: AASHTO M330; All polypropylene storm sewer pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations. 1. Fittings and Joints: ASTM F2881or AASHTO M330. Bell and Spigot. 2. Gaskets: ASTM F477; installed by pipe manufacturer.


A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton Name Plate Corp. 2. Allen Systems, Inc. 3. Emed Co., Inc. 4. Linetec, Inc. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements

B. Plastic Ribbon Tape: Bright colored, continuously printed, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

C. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Storm Sewer Service" in large letters.

2.3 CATCH BASINS AND PLANT AREA DRAINS

A. Catch Basin Lid and Frame Manufacturers: 1. Neenah Foundry Co. 2. East Jordan Iron Works 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

B. Catch Basin Lid and Frame: 1. As indicated on the drawings.

C. Shaft Construction and Eccentric Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast Concrete pipe sections, lipped male/female dry joints, nominal shaft diameter as shown on drawings.

D. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 01 30 00.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanout Lid and Frame Manufacturers: 1. As indicated on drawings.


A. As shown in bedding details on drawings.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify trench cut/excavation base is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with coarse aggregate.

B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

3.3 BEDDING

A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 23 17 for work of this Section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.

B. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level materials in continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth.

C. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density.

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE

A. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM D2321. Seal joints watertight.

B. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings..

C. Install aggregate at sides and over top of pipe. Install top cover to minimum compacted thickness of 12 inches, compact to 95 percent.

D. Refer to Section 31 23 23 for backfilling and compacting requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting.

E. Refer to Section 33 05 13 for manhole requirements.

F. Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe buried 12 inches below finish grade, above pipe line; coordinate with Section 31 23 23, and 31 23 17.

G. Install Work in accordance with local utility and INDOT standards.


3.5 INSTALLATION - CATCH BASINS AND CLEANOUTS

A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.

B. Form and place Cast-In-Place Concrete base pad, with provision for storm sewer pipe end sections.

C. Level top surface of base pad; sleeve concrete shaft sections to receive storm sewer pipe sections.

D. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated on Drawings.

E. Install Work in accordance with Municipality of Fishers and INDOT standards.


A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing aggregate cover over pipe.

C. Compaction Testing: In accordance with ASTM D1557.

D. When tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.

E. Infiltration Test: Test in accordance with ASTM 969.

F. Pressure Test: Test in accordance with ASTM C924 and ASTM C1103, depending on size of pipe.


A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Protecting finished Work.

B. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. 1. Take care not to damage or displace installed pipe and joints during construction

of pipe supports, backfilling, testing, and other operations. 2. Repair or replace pipe that is damaged or displaced from construction operations.

END OF SECTION

07/25/2018 18-700-060-1 [33 46 00] - 1 - Subdrainage Copyright © 2018 by RQAW Corporation

SECTION 33 46 00

SUBDRAINAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Building perimeter drainage system. 2. Retaining wall drainage system. 3. Slab-on-grade drainage system. 4. Filter aggregate and fabric. 5. Bedding.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C412 - Standard Specification for Concrete Drain Tile. 2. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer

Pipe and Fittings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. None required.



B. Project Record Documents: Record location of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts and principal invert elevations.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Procedures for submittals.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE MATERIALS


B. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: ASTM D2729; plain end, 4 inch inside diameter; with required fittings.


C. Use perforated pipe at subdrainage system; unperforated through sleeved walls.

2.2 AGGREGATE AND BEDDING

A. Filter Aggregate as shown on drawings

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Pipe Coupling: Solid plastic.

B. Filter Fabric: Water pervious type, black polyolefin or polyester manufactured by Akzo Nobel Geosynthetics Co.

C. Pipe Sleeve: Plastic type for foundation wall.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify excavated base is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with Type A4 aggregate.

B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage drainage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Place drainage pipe on compacted impervious fill.

B. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on Drawings; with maximum variation from indicated slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

C. Place pipe with perforations facing down. Mechanically join pipe ends.

D. Install pipe couplings.

E. Install Type A1 A4 aggregate at sides, over joint and top of pipe. Install top cover compacted thickness of 12 inches.

F. Place filter fabric over leveled top surface of aggregate cover prior to subsequent backfilling operations.


G. Place aggregate in maximum 6 inch lifts, consolidating each lift.

H. Refer to Section 31 23 23 for compaction requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting.

I. Place impervious fill over drainage pipe aggregate cover and compact.

J. Connect to storm sewer system with unperforated pipe.



B. Request inspection prior to [and immediately after] placing aggregate cover over pipe.

3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Protecting installed construction.

B. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation begins.

END OF SECTION